Advanced User Guide
These operating instructions are for the EOS R5 Mark II with
firmware ver. 1.2.0 or later installed.
E
CT2-D306-D
© CANON INC. 2025
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Supplemental Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Compatible Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Instruction Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Quick Start Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Operation of Battery Packs and Power Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Compatible Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Software/Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Preparation and Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Inserting/Removing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Inserting/Removing Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Turning on the Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Multi-Function Shoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Eye Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Menu Operations and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Quick Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Touch-Screen Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Shooting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
P: Program AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Av: Aperture-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
M: Manual Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Shooting and Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Anti-Flicker Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Shooting with Speedlites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flash Function Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Picture Style Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Picture Style Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Picture Style Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
HDR Shooting (PQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Color Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Clarity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Auto Lighting Optimizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Highlight Tone Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Custom White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
White Balance Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Lens Aberration Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Long Exposure Noise Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Dust Delete Data Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Multiple Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Focus Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Pre-Continuous Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Interval Timer Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Silent Shutter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Shutter Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Enabling Shutter Release Without a Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Customizing Quick Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Shooting with the Touch Shutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Image Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
High-Speed Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Metering Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
HDR/C. Log View Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Display Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Optical Viewfinder Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Blackout-Free Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Shooting Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reverse Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Display Frame Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Viewfinder Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Auto Power Off Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Metering Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
AE for Priority Subjects During AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Manual Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Exposure Lock (AE Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
General Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Tab Menus: Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Movie Recording Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
High Frame Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Main Recording Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Movie Cropping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Sound Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Audio Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Audio Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Audio Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Custom Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
HDR Movie Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Time-Lapse Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Movie Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Tally Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Pre-Recording Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Movie Auto Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
False Color Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Zebra Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Shooting Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Quick Control Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Standby: Low Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Canon Log HDMI Output Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Metadata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Time Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Other Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
General Movie Recording Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
AF/Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
AF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Movie Servo AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Selecting the AF Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Manual Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Registering People to Prioritize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Servo AF Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Customizing AF Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Focus Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Selecting the Drive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Using the Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Remote Control Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Tab Menus: Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Image Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Magnified Image Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Voice Memo Recording and Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Movie Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
4K/8K Movie Frame Grab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Playback on a TV Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Protecting Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Erasing Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Rotating Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Changing Movie Orientation Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Rating Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Protecting Images When Setting a Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Copying Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Print Ordering (DPOF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
RAW Image Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
In-Camera Upscaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Converting HEIF to JPEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
VR Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Setting Image Search Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Resuming from Previous Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Customizing Playback Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Displaying the Highlight Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
AF Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Playback Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Movie Play Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Communication Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Tab Menus: Communication Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Available Network Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Preparing to Use Communication Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Network-Specific Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Transferring Images to an FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Connecting to EOS Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Uploading Images to image.canon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Syncing Time Between Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Live Streaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Using Camera Control API (CCAPI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
GPS Device Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Linked Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
EOS Multi Remote Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Basic Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Checking and Editing Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Airplane Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
Bluetooth Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Renaming the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Error Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Wireless Communication Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Checking Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Wireless Communication Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Checking the MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
App Selection for USB Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Save/Load Communication Settings on Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Resetting Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Tab Menus: Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Folder Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Still Photo File Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Movie Clip Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
File Naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Card Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
Auto Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Adding Orientation Information to Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Date/Time/Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
System Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Beeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Audio Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Screen Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Viewfinder Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Screen and Viewfinder Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
UI Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
HDMI Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Cooling Fan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Shutter at Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Sensor Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Password Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Power Saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Resetting the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Custom Shooting Mode (C1-C3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Save/Load Camera Settings on Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Battery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Copyright Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Other Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Control Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Tab Menus: Control Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Control Customization Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Custom Functions/My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Tab Menus: Custom Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
Custom Function Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Tab Menus: My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
Registering My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Importing Images to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Importing Images to a Smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
Using a Battery Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Using a Cooling Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Trademarks and Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Introduction
Before starting to shoot, be sure to read the following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the Safety Instructions and Handling
Precautions. Also read this Advanced User Guide carefully to ensure that you use the
camera correctly.
Take some test shots, and understand about product liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If
the camera or memory card is faulty and images cannot be recorded or transferred to a
computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images recorded with the
camera (or music/images with music transferred to the memory card) for purposes other
than personal enjoyment.
Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
Connecting other devices
Use the included interface cable or a Canon cable when connecting the camera to a
computer or other device. When connecting an interface cable, also use the included
cable protector (
).
•
Package Contents
•
Supplemental Information
•
Compatible Accessories
• Instruction Manuals
•
Quick Start Guide
• About This Guide
• Operation of Battery Packs and Power Accessories
•
Compatible Cards
• Safety Instructions
• Handling Precautions
•
Part Names
• Software/Apps
10
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is
missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap (Camera Cover R-F-5) and shoe cover ER-SC3)
Battery Pack LP-E6P
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E*
Strap
Interface Cable
Cable Protector
11
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.)
The camera does not come with a memory card ( ) or HDMI cable.
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Be careful not to lose any of these items.
No software CD-ROM is included. Software ( ) can be downloaded from the Canon
website.
For details on compatible interface cables, visit the Canon website ( ).
Caution
The transmission rate when the included interface cable is used is equivalent to
SuperSpeed USB (USB 5Gbps).
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon website
(
).
Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold separately, and when a
lens kit is purchased, some accessories included with the lens may not match
those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
12
Instruction Manuals
Instruction Manual (included with the camera)
Be sure to read before use.
Advanced User Guide
Complete instructions are provided in this Advanced User Guide.
For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/C017/
Lens Instruction Manuals
View or download from the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/
For software instruction manuals, see Software Instruction Manuals.
Note
Select [ : Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.
15
Set the focus mode to AF ( ).
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.
For lenses without a focus mode switch, set [ : Focus mode] to
[AF].
Set the power switch to < > ( ).
Flip out the screen ( ).
When the language setting screen is displayed, see Language.
When the date/time/zone setting screen is displayed, see Date/Time/
Zone.
When the password setting screen is displayed, see Setting a
Password.
After [Welcome] appears on the screen, follow the on-screen
instructions to connect the camera to your smartphone ( ).
17
4.
5.
6.
Set the shooting mode to [ ] ( ).
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
Focus on the subject ( ).
A tracking frame [ ] appears over any face detected.
Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Take the picture (
).
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
18
7.
8.
9.
About This Guide
Icons in This Guide
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos
Icons in This Guide
< >
Indicates the Main dial.
< >
Indicates Quick control dial 1.
< >
Indicates Quick control dial 2.
< >
Indicates the Multi-controller.
< >
Indicates the lens control ring.
< >
Indicates the Set button.
*
Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button you pressed, as
timed after you release the button.
In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera's buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this guide when discussing relevant operations
and functionality.
to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or
[BULB] mode.
Links to pages with related topics.
Warning to prevent shooting problems.
Supplemental information.
Tips or advice for better shooting.
Troubleshooting advice.
20
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and
Sample Photos
Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to < > ( )
and the Multi-function lock feature is off ( ).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults.
Illustrations in this guide show the camera with the RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM lens
attached as an example.
Sample photos in this guide are only for illustration.
In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount adapter is used.
21
Operation of Battery Packs and Power
Accessories
○: Fully functional △: Partially functional ×: Not compatible
With one power source in the battery grip, or without a battery grip
Without a
Battery Grip
Battery Grip
BG-R20
Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP
Battery Grip
BG-R20EP
Battery Grip
BG-R10
Battery Pack
LP-E6P
○ ○ ○ ○
△*
2
*
3
*
6
Battery Pack
LP-E6NH/
LP-E6N
△*
2
*
3
*
6
△*
2
*
3
*
6
△*
2
*
3
*
4
*
6
△*
2
*
3
*
6
△*
2
*
3
*
6
Battery Pack
LP-E6*
1
× × × × ×
DC Coupler
DR-E6P
○ ○ ○ ○
△*
2
*
3
With two power sources in the battery grip
Power Source 1 Power Source 2
Battery Grip
BG-R20
Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP
Battery Grip
BG-R20EP
Battery Grip
BG-R10
Battery Pack
LP-E6P
Battery Pack
LP-E6P
○ ○ ○
△*
2
*
3
*
6
*
7
Battery Pack
LP-E6NH/
LP-E6N
△*
2
*
3
*
5
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
4
*
5
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
5
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
6
*
7
Battery Pack
LP-E6*
1
× × × ×
Battery Pack
LP-E6NH/
LP-E6N
Battery Pack
LP-E6NH/
LP-E6N
△*
2
*
3
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
4
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
6
*
7
△*
2
*
3
*
6
*
7
Battery Pack
LP-E6*
1
× × × ×
DC Coupler
DR-E6P
- ○ ○ ○
△*
2
*
3
* 1: Cannot be used as a power source.
* 2: Network connectivity (Wi-Fi/wired LAN) not available.
* 3: Reduces continuous shooting speed and prevents selection of 8K DCI/8K UHD/RAW/SRAW
movie recording size, Fine image quality, and 239.76/200.00/119.88/100.00/59.94/50.00 fps frame
rates.
HDMI RAW output, still photo shooting during movie recording, High Frame Rate movies, and pre-
continuous shooting are not available.
* 4: Cooling fan cannot be used.
* 5: If LP-E6P and LP-E6NH, LP-E6N, or non-certified battery are installed in combination, the number
of shots available and the available operating time may decrease, compared to when only one
LP-E6P is installed.
22
* 6: If one or more battery as follows; LP-E6NH, LP-E6N, or non-certified battery is installed, or when
BG-R10 (battery model does not matter) is used, you cannot use up all the battery capacity.
* 7: If even one battery with no or low remaining capacity is installed, you may not be able to shoot (no
battery remaining capacity).
Caution
DC Coupler DR-E6 and Wireless File Transmitter WFT-R10 cannot be used.
Note
With Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N loaded or Battery Grip BG-R10 attached, a
message about restricted operation is displayed on startup and when unavailable
functions are selected.
For optimal camera performance, use Battery Pack LP-E6P and Battery Grip
BG-R20/BG-R20EP.
23
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera. If the card is new or was previously
formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format it with this camera ( ).
CFexpress cards
* Type-B compatible
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
* UHS-II and UHS-I cards compatible
Cards That Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a CFexpress card that supports VPG400 or a card with ample
performance (fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording quality ( ).
The VPG-400 Logo is a Certification Mark of CompactFlash Association, used under
license.
In this manual, “CFexpress card” refers specifically to CFexpress cards, “SD card”
refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards collectively, and “card” refers to all memory
cards in general.
* A card is not included. Please purchase it separately.
24
WARNING:
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others.
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If
swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
PRODUCT CONTAINS BUTTON/COIN CELL BATTERY
Button/coin cell batteries are hazardous and must be kept out of reach of children at all
times, whether new or used.
These batteries can cause severe or fatal injuries in 2 hours or less if swallowed or placed
inside any part of the body.
If it is suspected a button/coin cell battery has been swallowed or placed inside any part of
the body, seek medical attention immediately.
Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence of
smoke or a strange smell.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the
lens cap attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
25
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing, flush the
exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly with
copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
•
Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
•
Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
•
Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
•
Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
•
Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use when
the product is still warm in temperature.
Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 - 40 °C (41
- 104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering,
even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is
recommended when using the product in hot places and for people with circulation problems
or less sensitive skin.
Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of electromagnetic
waves and even result in accidents.
Do not leave batteries near pets.
Pets biting a battery could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product
damage or fire.
26
CAUTION:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise physical
injury or property damage may result.
Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the
product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached
on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or
expose the product to strong impacts.
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.
Do not touch the screen storage compartment (A), because its temperature
can increase by repeated continuous shooting for extended time or movie
recording. This may cause burns.
The camera and memory cards may become hotter when [ : Auto pwr off
temp.] is set to [High].
•
We recommend using a tripod or the like to avoid handheld shooting, which
may cause problems such as low-temperature contact burns.
•
Do not touch CFexpress cards immediately after shooting. Cards may be hot,
which may cause burns. Wait until the card has cooled down before removing
it.
27
Handling Precautions
Camera care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery
compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed. Also attach the
shoe cover to the multi-function shoe.
This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help prevent sand,
dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting inside, but it is impossible to
prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow
dirt, dust, water, or salt to get on the camera.
If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust, or salt gets
on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
Using the camera in dusty or dirty locations may lead to damage.
Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or salt to
remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that moisture (water),
dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly consult the nearest Canon Service
Center.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet
or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong
radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera
malfunction or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High
temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the
camera yourself.
Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
Only use a commercially available blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, or
other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body
or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the
contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera malfunction.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may
form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in
a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of
the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the camera or
remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera off and wait until the moisture has
fully evaporated before resuming use. Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still
internally cold, do not remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to
the ambient temperature.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the
camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage,
press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still
working.
28
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion
such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before
using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot
such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon
Service Center or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still photo/movie
shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.
When shooting with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently away from the angle of view.
Always keep intense light sources such as the sun, lasers, and other intense artificial
light sources out of the image area and not near it. Concentrated intense light may
cause smoke or damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Attach the lens cap to prevent direct sunlight and other light from entering the lens when
you are not shooting.
Screen and viewfinder, LCD panel
The following does not affect images captured by the camera.
Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead,
and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction.
They do not affect the images recorded.
If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see
remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear
when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force, physical shock,
or vibration.
Keep card contacts free of dust and foreign material. Do not touch card contacts with
your fingers or metal objects.
Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a
television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Cards may become hot after long sessions of repeated continuous shooting or still photo
shooting/movie recording. This is not a malfunction.
29
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and
attach the rear lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts
(1).
Smudges on the image sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's
internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have
the sensor cleaned by a nearest Canon Service Center.
Battery
Tips for using the battery and charger
Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location.
When storing the battery for extended periods, charge it about once a year. When
charging the battery, aim to charge it to approx. 50% instead of fully charging it ( ).
At room temperature (23°C/73°F), it takes approx. 60 min. to charge a depleted battery
to about approx. 50%. Battery charging time varies greatly depending on ambient
temperature.
If the battery is not used for an extended period, the trace amount of current that
continues to flow inside the battery when it is removed from the camera may eventually
lead to over-discharge and prevent further use, even after charging.
30
(1) < > Mode button
(2) Movie shooting button
(3) Strap mount
(4) < > Main dial
(5) Shutter button
(6) < / > Multi-function/FTP server image transfer button
(7) Self-timer lamp/AF-assist beam
(8)
Grip (battery compartment)
(9)
DC coupler cord hole
(10)
Depth-of-field preview button
(11)
Contacts
(12)
Lens mount
(13)
Shoe cover
(14)
Flash sync contacts
(15)
Multi-function shoe
(16)
RF lens mount index
(17)
< > Focal plane mark
(18)
Strap mount
(19)
Tally lamp
(20)
Shutter curtain/Image sensor
(21)
Lens release button
(22)
Lens lock pin
(23)
Remote control terminal
(24)
Body cap
32
(
21
)
(
25
)
(
24
)
(
17
)
(
19
)
(
18
)
(
20
)
(
23
)
(
22
)
(
6
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
16
)
(
15
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
5
)
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
12
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
33
(1) LCD panel
(2) Eyecup
(3) Speaker
(4) Microphone
(5) < / > Still photo shooting/movie recording switch
(6) Terminal cover
(7) < > External microphone IN terminal
(8)
< > Digital terminal
(9)
Exhaust vent
(10) < > Headphone terminal
(11)
< > HDMI OUT terminal
(12) < > Sync terminal
(13)
< / > LCD panel info switching/illumination/cropping button
(14)
Power/multi-function lock switch
(15)
< > Quick control dial 2
(16)
< > AE lock button
(17)
< > AF point selection button
(18)
< > AF start button
(19)
< > Multi-controller (can also be pressed straight in)
(20)
< > Quick control dial 1
(21)
< > Set button
(22)
< > Erase button
(23)
< > Playback button
(24)
< > Menu button
(25)
< / > Rating/voice memo button
34
(
13
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
10
)
(
14
)
(
15
)(
8
) (
18
)
(
17
)
(
3
)
(
9
)(
1
)
(
2
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
16
)
(1)
Viewfinder eyepiece
(2)
Screen
(3)
Accessory positioning hole
(4)
Intake vent
(5)
Tripod socket
(6)
Serial number (body number)
(7)
Accessory positioning hole
(8)
Access lamp
(9)
Dioptric adjustment knob
(10)
< > Magnify/reduce button
(11)
< > Info button
(12) < > Quick Control button
(13) Card slot cover
(14) Battery compartment cover lock
(15) Battery compartment cover
(16) Card slot 1
(17) Card slot 2
(18) Card eject button
35
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the strap mount from the bottom, then pass it through the
strap buckle as shown. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not
loosen from the buckle.
39
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting cables (an interface cable or HDMI cable), use the included cable
protector. Using the cable protector helps prevent accidental disconnection and terminal
damage.
When connecting the camera to a computer, use a Canon cable (included or sold
separately).
When connecting the camera to a television or other display device, use a commercially
available HDMI cable.
Preparation
1.
Prepare the cable protector.
The cable protector consists of the protector (1) and a clamp (2).
2.
Attach the protector to the camera.
40
Cable insertion/connection
Insert the cables in the clamp, attach the clamp to the protector, then connect the cables to
the camera.
With both a Canon interface cable and an HDMI cable
1.
Pass each cable through the clamp.
(3) Canon interface cable
(4) HDMI cable
2.
Attach the clamp to the protector.
41
3.
Connect each cable to the camera.
With only a Canon interface cable or HDMI cable
Pass the cable through the clamp (2) as shown, then attach the clamp to the protector.
Caution
Using the camera when an interface cable or HDMI cable is connected without the
cable protector may damage the camera terminal. Make sure each cable is
securely connected to the camera terminal.
42
Software/Apps
Software/App Overview
Installing Computer Software
Installing Smartphone Apps
Software Instruction Manuals
Software/App Overview
Computer software
EOS Utility
Enables you to transfer captured images from the camera to a connected computer, set
various camera settings from the computer, and shoot remotely from the computer.
Digital Photo Professional
Software recommended for users who shoot RAW images. Enables image viewing,
editing, printing, and more.
Neural network Image Processing Tool
For RAW image processing with superior image quality, applying deep learning.
Requires a paid subscription.
Neural network Upscaling Tool
For JPEG/TIFF upscaling, applying deep learning. Requires a paid subscription.
Picture Style Editor
Enables you to edit existing Picture Styles or create and save original Picture Style files.
Cinema RAW Development
For RAW movie processing, playback, and exporting.
Canon XF Utility
For transferring movie files to a computer, as well as playback and still photo extraction.
Canon RAW Plugin for Avid Media Access
For importing RAW movies into Avid Media Composer.
Canon RAW Plugin for Final Cut Pro
For importing RAW movies into Apple Final Cut Pro.
43
Canon Plugin for ProRes RAW
For importing RAW movies recorded with Atomos recorders in ProRes RAW format into
Apple Final Cut Pro.
EOS Multi Remote
Enables remote shooting, setting configuration, and FTP transfer with multiple cameras
from a computer.
Smartphone apps
Camera Connect
Enables you to transfer captured images from the camera to a smartphone over a wired
or wireless connection, set various camera settings from the smartphone, and shoot
remotely from the smartphone.
Digital Photo Professional Express
App for RAW image processing and image editing on a smartphone or tablet. Requires
a paid subscription.
Content Transfer Professional
Enables FTP transfer and other operations for captured images or images on a
smartphone. Requires a paid subscription.
EOS Multi Remote (for Smartphones/Tablets)
Enables remote shooting, setting configuration, and FTP transfer with multiple cameras
from a smartphone or tablet.
44
Installing Computer Software
Always install the latest version of the software. In this case, previous versions are
overwritten.
Caution
Do not install software while the camera is connected to the computer. The
software will not be installed correctly.
Installation is not possible without an internet connection.
Older versions of the software do not support RAW image processing or correct
display for images from this camera.
1.
Download the software.
Connect to the internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
https://cam.start.canon/
Depending on the software, you may need to enter the camera's serial
number. The serial number is on the bottom of the camera.
2.
Extract the installer on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.
For macOS
Double-click the dmg file to open the installation window.
Double-click the icon in this window to start the installer.
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
45
Preparation and Basic Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera
operations.
• Charging the Battery
•
Inserting/Removing Batteries
•
Inserting/Removing Cards
• Using the Screen
• Turning on the Power
• Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses
• Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
• Multi-Function Shoe
•
Using the Viewfinder
•
Using Eye Control
•
Basic Operations
•
Menu Operations and Settings
•
Quick Control
•
Touch-Screen Operation
48
Charging the Battery
1.
Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.
2.
Fully insert the battery into the charger.
Do the opposite to remove the battery.
49
3.
Charge the battery.
LC-E6
Flip out the charger prongs as shown and plug the charger into a power
outlet.
LC-E6E
Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power
outlet.
Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Level
Charge Lamp
Color Display
0–49%
Orange
Blinks once per second
50–74% Blinks twice per second
75% or higher Blinks three times per second
Fully charged Green Turned on
50
Charging a depleted battery takes approx. 3 hr. at room temperature (23°C/73°F).
The time required to charge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery's remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F) takes longer (up to approx.
4 hr.).
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power
outlet.
You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether
the battery is charged or not.
If the battery is charged, attach the provided protective cover so that the battery-shaped
hole < > is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is exhausted,
attach the protective cover in the opposite orientation.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power
current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life.
Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing the battery when it is fully
charged may lower the battery performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source.
If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or
region. To avoid damage, do not connect to portable voltage transformers.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been fully charged,
the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery's recharge performance (
) and purchase a new battery.
Caution
After disconnecting the charger's power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx.
10 sec.
If the battery's remaining capacity ( ) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be
charged.
The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6P/
LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6.
51
Inserting/Removing Batteries
Insertion
Removal
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6P into the camera.
Insertion
1.
Slide the battery compartment cover lock and open the cover.
2.
Insert the battery.
Insert the end with the electrical contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in place.
For details on compatible battery packs, see Operation of Battery
Packs and Power Accessories.
52
3.
Close the cover.
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
53
Inserting/Removing Cards
Insertion
Formatting Cards
Removal
This camera accepts two cards. Recording is possible as long as there is at least one
card in the camera.
With two cards inserted, you can select one card to record to, or you can record the same
image to both cards at once ( ).
Caution
Make sure the SD card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1.
Slide the cover to open it.
Pull the card slot cover toward you to open it.
55
2.
Insert the card.
Card 1 (CFexpress card)
Card 2 (SD card)
The card in the rear card slot is [ ] (CFexpress card), and the one in
front of it is [ ] (SD card).
CFexpress card: With the card label facing you, insert the open side of
the card (2) into the card slot. Inserting cards the wrong way may
damage the camera.
The gray card-eject button pops out.
SD card: With the card label facing you, insert the card into the card
slot until it clicks into place.
3.
Close the cover.
Close the cover and slide it as shown until it clicks shut.
56
4.
Set the power switch to < > ( ).
(3) Card selection icon
(4) Card 1 (CFexpress card)
(5) Card 2 (SD card)
Icons representing loaded cards are shown on the shooting screen
(
) accessed by pressing the < > button and on the Quick
Control screen (
). The camera will record to cards shown with a
card selection icon [ ] [ ].
57
Removal
1.
Open the cover.
Set the power switch to < > and make sure the access lamp (6)
is off.
Pull the card slot cover toward you to open it.
If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover.
2.
Remove the card.
CFexpress card: Press the card eject button (7) to eject the card.
SD card: Gently press the card in, then release it to eject it.
Pull the card straight out, then close the cover.
Caution
Do not remove cards immediately after a red [ ] icon is displayed as you
are shooting. Cards may be hot, due to high internal camera temperature. Set the
power switch to <
> and stop shooting for a while before removing cards.
Removing hot cards immediately after shooting may cause you to drop and damage
them. Be careful when removing cards.
59
Note
The number of shots available varies depending on remaining card capacity and
settings such as image quality and ISO speed.
Setting [ : Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from
forgetting to insert a card ( ).
Caution
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do
not open the card slot cover during this time. To avoid corrupting image data
or damaging cards or the camera, never do any of the following while the
access lamp is lit or blinking.
• Removing the card.
•
Removing the battery.
•
Shaking or striking the camera.
•
Unplugging or plugging in a power cord
(when using optional household power outlet accessories).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 ( , ).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert the
card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and
then format the card with the camera (
). The card may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card's contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not expose
the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts, contact failure
may result.
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
Use of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not
recommended.
When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.
60
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
1.
Flip out the screen.
2.
Rotate the screen.
When the screen is out, you can tilt it up or down or rotate it to face the
subject.
Indicated angles are only approximate.
3.
Face it toward you.
Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.
61
Caution
Avoid forcing the screen into position as you rotate it, which puts undue pressure
on the hinge.
When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of the
flipped-out screen will be limited.
Note
Keep the screen closed and facing the camera body when the camera is not in use.
You can protect the screen.
A mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen faces
subjects in front of the camera.
62
Turning on the Power
Changing the Interface Language
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
Setting a Password
Connecting the Camera to a Smartphone
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Battery Level Indicator
< >
The camera turns on.
< >
The camera turns on. Multi-function locking is engaged ( ).
< >
The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position
when not using the camera.
Note
If you set the power switch to < > while an image is being recorded to the
card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording
finishes.
63
Changing the Interface Language
Set the Language if the [Language ] setting screen appears after you turn on the camera.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
Set the Date/Time/Zone if the [Date/Time/Zone] setting screen appears.
Setting a Password
To prevent unauthorized access to information on the camera, set a camera password.
Caution
Setting a password does not protect images or other data on cards.
Canon cannot be held liable for theft involving the camera or cards.
If you select [Do not ask again], be careful not to allow third-party access to data
or information on the camera, such as in the settings.
64
1.
Set the password.
Enter a six-digit number, then select [OK].
2.
Select [OK].
65
3.
Reenter the password.
Select [OK] to set the password.
The [Password] screen is displayed when the power switch is set to
< > or the camera resumes operation from auto power off. Enter the
password you set.
If you select [Do not ask again] and [OK], then restart the camera, this
screen will not be displayed from that startup.
[Reset]: Select to reset the camera to defaults and remove the
password.
66
Caution
Until you enter the password, these connections are not available while the
password screen is displayed.
• USB connection
• Wi-Fi connection
•
Bluetooth connection
• Wired LAN connection via Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan CF-R20EP
Select [Do not ask again] on the password screen in these situations.
• When using Bluetooth connections with the power switch set to < > or
during auto power off
• When automatically uploading images to image.canon
• When using automatic connection as implemented with the Camera Control
API
•
When using EOS Multi Remote
Note
For details on operations such as changing the password, see Password
Management.
67
Connecting the Camera to a Smartphone
Instructions for connecting to a smartphone are displayed if you select [OK] when the setup
screen appears ( ).
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever the power switch is set to < >, the sensor is cleaned automatically
(which may make a faint sound). During the sensor cleaning, the screen will display
[ ]. To enable automatic sensor cleaning when the power switch is set to < > as
well, you can set this in [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).
If you repeatedly turn the power switch to < / > or < > within a short
time period, the [ ] icon may not be displayed, but this does not indicate the camera is
malfunctioning.
68
Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to < >, the battery level will be indicated.
Display
Level (%) 100–70 69–50 49–20 19–10 9–1 0
Caution
Remaining capacity may not be displayed correctly under some shooting
conditions.
Battery performance may decrease at low temperatures. Under these conditions,
keep the camera warm in a pocket or similar container until you will use it. At this
time, keep your pocket free of metal objects such as key chains. Contact with metal
objects may short-circuit the battery.
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
•
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
•
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
•
Using Image Stabilizer.
•
Using Wi-Fi features.
•
Using the screen frequently.
•
Using accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe.
The number of available shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
Lens operations are powered by the camera's battery. Certain lenses may exhaust
the battery faster than others.
In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a sufficient
battery level.
Note
See [ : Battery info.] to check the battery status ( ).
69
Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses
Attaching a Lens
Detaching a Lens
Caution
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to < >.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch
the rotating part.
Tips for avoiding smudges and dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to
the camera.
Remove smudges and dust on the body cap before attaching it.
Note
With RF-S lenses, an approx. 1.6× crop factor is applied to the center of the regular
image area.
70
Attaching a Lens
1.
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap (1) and body cap (2) by turning them as
shown by the arrows.
2.
Attach the lens.
Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place.
71
3.
Set the focus mode to AF.
AF stands for autofocus.
MF stands for manual focus. Autofocus is disabled.
For RF lenses with a focus mode switch
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.
For RF lenses without a focus mode switch
Set [ : Focus mode] to [AF].
4.
Remove the front lens cap.
72
Detaching a Lens
While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the lens you removed.
73
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
Attaching a Lens
Detaching a Lens
All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching an optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R.
The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Note
With EF-S lenses, an approx. 1.6× crop factor is applied to the center of the regular
image area.
Attaching a Lens
1.
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap (1) and body cap (2) by turning them as
shown by the arrows.
74
2.
Attach the lens to the adapter.
Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding
mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow
until it clicks into place.
(3) Red index
(4) White index
3.
Attach the adapter to the camera.
Align the red mount indexes (5) on the adapter and camera and turn
the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
75
4.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.
< > stands for autofocus.
< > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate.
5.
Remove the front lens cap.
76
Detaching a Lens
1.
While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by
the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
2.
Detach the lens from the adapter.
Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the lens you removed.
Caution
For lens precautions, see Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses.
77
Multi-Function Shoe
Using the Multi-Function Shoe
The multi-function shoe is a hot shoe that supplies power to accessories and offers
advanced communication functionality.
Using the Multi-Function Shoe
Removing the shoe cover
Place your finger on the shoe cover (1) as shown in the figure and press down on part
(A) as you pull the cover off in the direction shown. If removal is difficult, try pulling the
cover off with a finger placed on part (B).
After removal, keep the shoe cover in a convenient place to avoid losing it.
Attaching accessories
When attaching accessories that communicate through contacts of the multi-function
shoe, insert the accessory's mounting foot until it clicks into place, then slide the
mounting foot locking lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction
Manual.
The following accessories cannot be attached directly to the multi-function shoe.
• Speedlite EL-1/600EXII-RT/600EX-RT/580EX II
•
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT (Ver. 3)/ST-E3-RT (Ver. 2)/ST-E3-RT
•
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
• GPS Receiver GP-E2
To use the accessories listed above with the camera, you will need Multi-Function Shoe
Adapter AD-E1, sold separately. For details, refer to the AD-E1 Instruction Manual.
When attaching accessories other than these that are designed for regular hot shoes,
insert the accessory's mounting foot all the way in, then slide the mounting foot locking
lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction Manual.
78
Electronic Viewfinder EVF-DC2/EVF-DC1 cannot be attached to the multi-function shoe.
Attempting to attach the accessories by force may damage them or the multi-function
shoe.
Attaching the shoe cover
After removing accessories from the multi-function shoe, reattach the shoe cover to
protect the contacts from dust and water.
Slide the shoe cover in the direction shown, as you press down on part (A), until part (B)
is fully inserted.
Caution
Attach accessories correctly as described in Attaching accessories. Incorrect
attachment may cause the camera or accessories to malfunction, and accessories
may fall off.
Blow off any foreign material on the multi-function shoe with a commercially
available blower or similar tool.
If the multi-function shoe becomes wet, turn off the camera and allow it to dry
before use.
Use the shoe cover included with the camera.
79
Using the Viewfinder
Dioptric Adjustment
Using Eyecup ER-kE (Sold Separately)
Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or
viewfinder ( ).
Dioptric Adjustment
Adjust the diopter for clear viewfinder display.
Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right.
Caution
The viewfinder and screen cannot be activated at the same time.
At some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and
right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
80
Using Eyecup ER-kE (Sold Separately)
Outdoors, using Eyecup ER-kE may improve eye control accuracy and viewfinder visibility.
1.
Attach Eyecup ER-kE.
Hold Eyecup ER-kE as shown in both hands.
Insert the side of Eyecup ER-kE with ▼ markings into the groove
around the camera eyecup, then press down from above until the
accessory is fully attached.
Caution
When attaching Eyecup ER-kE, avoid pinching the edge of the
camera eyecup (A). With this edge pinched, Eyecup ER-kE can
easily come off.
81
With Eyecup ER-kE fully inserted, press the lower part toward the
camera.
You can rotate Eyecup ER-kE as necessary for adjustment. It clicks
every 90° and can be rotated 360°.
2.
To remove Eyecup ER-kE:
Press firmly on the top and bottom of Eyecup ER-kE.
Pull the top toward you and remove it from the camera eyecup.
Note that the rubber part may come off if pulled too forcefully.
82
Caution
Speedlites or similar accessories cannot be attached or removed while Eyecup
ER-kE is attached. Remove Eyecup ER-kE temporarily before attaching or
removing other accessories.
The dioptric adjustment knob cannot be operated while Eyecup ER-kE is attached.
Adjust the diopter before attaching Eyecup ER-kE.
Note
Eyecup ER-kE has a strap mount (B) to prevent the eyecup from being dropped.
Pass a commercially available strap through (B) and the camera strap or other
parts to secure it.
83
Using Eye Control
Performing Calibration
Using Eye Control for AF
Configuring Pointer Display
Managing Calibration Data
You can control focusing by looking at AF points to select them in viewfinder shooting (eye
control).
Caution
Eye control is only available in still photo shooting.
Performing Calibration
The process of registering characteristics of your line of sight for accurate detection of eye
movement by the camera in viewfinder shooting is called calibration. Calibration enables
higher eye control accuracy.
Points to know before calibration
Be aware of the following points before calibration.
It may not be possible to detect your line of sight if you are squinting. If so, open your
eye or eyes wider as you look at the viewfinder.
It may not be possible to detect your line of sight if your eye is too close to the
viewfinder. If so, keep your eye a little farther from the viewfinder. Using Eyecup ER-kE
(sold separately) makes it easier to detect your line of sight.
During calibration, keep looking at indicators until they disappear completely.
Eye control may be less accurate if your eye is off-center, relative to the viewfinder.
Adjust how you are holding the camera to your face, so that the four corners of the
screen appear evenly spaced.
Eye control may be less accurate if you point the camera downward during calibration.
Hold the camera straight when performing calibration.
Note
Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.
84
Calibration operations
After adjusting the viewfinder ( ), perform calibration under the same conditions as when
you will shoot (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).
During calibration, keep your eye near the viewfinder.
1.
Select [ : Eye control ] ( ).
2.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the current [CAL no.]
number.
3.
Select [Start].
85
4.
Look through the viewfinder.
Holding the camera horizontally, look through the viewfinder so that the
four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced.
Press the < > button.
5.
Start calibration.
Look at the indicator displayed and press the < > button.
Keep looking at the indicator without blinking until it disappears.
This process is repeated for indicators at five positions (center, right,
left, top, and bottom).
86
6.
Perform calibration for vertical shooting.
For higher eye control accuracy, select [Refine] and perform calibration
for vertical shooting.
Holding the camera vertically, look through the viewfinder so that the
four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced, then repeat step 5.
If you will also shoot vertically with the camera grip facing the other
direction, perform calibration while holding the camera that way.
To finish calibration after performing calibration only for horizontal
shooting, go to step 7.
7.
Exit calibration.
Select [Exit]. Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the
calibration number shown in step 2.
8.
Verify pointer movement.
After calibration, look through the viewfinder and make sure the pointer
moves in response (
). If the pointer does not seem to follow your
gaze closely, perform calibration again.
87
Adding calibration data
To register calibration data for other users or eyewear conditions (such as with or without
glasses or contact lenses), select an available number to assign the data to from the
numbers labeled with [ ] on the [CAL no.] screen, then perform calibration.
88
Using Eye Control for AF
Caution
Always use eye control under the same eyewear conditions as when you
performed calibration (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).
Note
Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.
Menu settings
1.
Select [ : Eye control ] ( ).
2.
Select [Eye control ].
3.
Select [On].
You can enable switching between [Eye control] [On] and [Off] from
the Quick Control screen by customizing the Quick Control screen ( ).
89
4.
Select [CAL no.].
Select a calibration number matching your eyewear conditions (such as
with or without glasses or contact lenses).
5.
Select calibration data to use.
Press < >.
90
Operations in viewfinder shooting
1.
Look at the subject.
A pointer (1) is displayed when you look through the viewfinder.
After the subject set in [ : Subject to detect] is detected, a tracking
frame [
] (2) is also displayed.
Look at the position where you wish to focus.
The pointer may stop moving unless the camera can follow your eye
movement. If so, hold the camera away from your face for a moment,
then look through the viewfinder again so that the four corners of the
screen appear evenly spaced.
91
2.
Confirm the subject to start focusing.
Pressing the shutter button halfway confirms the subject to focus on.
With [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera focuses in the
area near the pointer.
With the AF area set to an option other than [Whole area AF], the
camera focuses after moving the AF area near the pointer.
With [
: AF operation] set to [ ]
The active AF point (3) is displayed in blue.
As long as you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera keeps
tracking and focusing on the confirmed subject, so there's no need for
you to keep following it with your eye.
To switch to another subject to track, first stop tracking the confirmed
subject by pressing <
>, then look at the new subject and hold down
the shutter button halfway.
With [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera keeps
tracking and focusing on confirmed subjects even when you release
the shutter button after holding it down halfway. To stop tracking
confirmed subjects, press <
>.
92
With [ : AF operation] set to [ ]
Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green.
Pressing the shutter button halfway sets the focus on the current
position.
3.
Shoot.
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
Caution
If the AF point does not move to your specified position after you confirm the
subject, hold the camera away from your face, then look through the viewfinder
again, or perform calibration again.
Note
You can assign eye control subject confirmation ([Move AF point by eye control])
and AF activation ([Metering and AF start]) to different buttons in [
: Customize
buttons for shooting].
93
Using eye control to display the focus guide
By setting [ : Focus guide] to [On], you can use eye control to display the focus guide
for assistance when focusing manually.
1.
Look at the subject.
Look at the subject to focus on.
2.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The focus guide (4) is displayed where you are looking.
For details on using the focus guide to focus, see Focus Guide.
Note
A tracking frame [ ] is also displayed after the subject set in [ : Subject to
detect] is detected.
94
General eye control precautions
When multiple people will use eye control on the same camera, each person should
select a different calibration number and perform calibration. Similarly, when the same
person will use eye control with and without glasses or contact lenses, a different
calibration number should be selected and calibration performed for each situation.
When using Eyecup ER-kE (sold separately), select a different calibration number and
perform calibration.
Keep your eye steady relative to the camera, with sunlight or other light blocked out and
the four corners of the screen appearing evenly spaced.
Calibration or eye control may not be possible in the following cases.
• When hard contact lenses are worn
• When color contact lenses are worn
• When you have had eye surgery or other medical treatment
• When special eyewear is worn, such as near-infrared blocking, mirrored, or bifocal
glasses or sunglasses
•
When a mask is worn
•
When your eye is too far from the viewfinder
•
When your eye is too close to the viewfinder
•
When your eye is too misaligned with the viewfinder
•
When the viewfinder or your eyewear is dirty
•
When the viewfinder is fogged up
•
When your contact lenses are not fully in contact with your eyes
•
When sunlight is shining directly into the viewfinder
Less responsive viewfinder display under low light may make eye control more difficult
to use.
95
Enhancing eye control accuracy
The camera can learn about eye characteristics from the calibration data it collects.
Eye control accuracy can be improved by repeating calibration under various levels of
brightness (such as indoors, outdoors, during the day, and at night) for the same
calibration number.
To use eye control in each camera orientation, repeat calibration for the same
calibration number with the camera held horizontally and vertically with the grip up and
down.
Keep the following tips in mind when performing calibration or using eye control.
• Look into the viewfinder so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly
spaced.
• Look at the subject.
• Avoid squinting.
•
Avoid blinking.
•
During calibration, look through the viewfinder as you do when shooting.
•
If you use glasses, wear them correctly.
•
In calibration outdoors, prevent sunlight from entering the viewfinder.
•
Use Eyecup ER-kE (sold separately, ).
•
Block out sunlight, to the extent possible, by keeping your face close to the
viewfinder.
•
If it is difficult to perform calibration or eye control correctly, try keeping both eyes
open as you look through the viewfinder.
Eye control accuracy can also be improved with the data collected from repeated
calibration (2–3 times) for the same calibration number even under the same brightness
and with the camera in the same position.
96
Configuring Pointer Display
You can configure pointer display, including whether the pointer is visible or not.
Pointer display
Pointer visibility can be set to [On], [Shtg standby], or [Off].
• Select [Shtg standby] to keep the pointer visible from when you look through the
viewfinder until the moment you confirm the subject to focus on using eye control.
•
In [ ] focus mode, setting [ : Focus guide] to [On] makes the pointer visible.
Sensitivity
Sensitivity of the pointer in response to eye movement is adjustable.
•
Set toward the positive end to make the pointer responsive even to subtle eye
movement.
• Set toward the negative end to make the pointer less responsive.
Color
Choose [Orange], [Purple], or [White] as the pointer color.
Display size
Choose [Standard] or [Small] as the pointer display size.
Display format
Choose [ ] or [ ] as the style of pointer displayed.
97
Managing Calibration Data
Entering names
You can enter names to identify calibration data.
1.
Select a calibration data number.
Select the number and press the < > button.
2.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
When you are finished entering text, press the < > button and
select [OK].
98
Saving and loading calibration data
Registered calibration data can be saved to a card. You can also load calibration data from
a card to use it.
1.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
2.
Select [Save/load (card)].
3.
Select [Save to card].
Select [Save to card] to save all calibration data on the camera to the
card.
Select [Load from card] to overwrite calibration data on the camera
with calibration data from the card.
99
Deleting calibration data
Eye control is less accurate if the same calibration number is used for calibration under
different eyewear conditions (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses) or by
multiple users. In this case, delete the calibration data and perform calibration again.
1.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
2.
Select [Delete].
3.
Delete the calibration data.
Select the data to delete and press < >.
To delete all calibration data, select [Delete all] and press < >.
After you select [OK] on the confirmation screen, the data is deleted.
100
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
Shutter Button
< > Main Dial
< > Quick Control Dial 1
< > Quick Control Dial 2
< > Multi-Controller
< > Mode Button
< / > Multi-Function/FTP Server Image Transfer Button
< > AF Start Button
< > Multi-Function Lock Switch
< / > LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination/Cropping Button
< > Control Ring
< > Info Button
101
Holding the Camera
Viewing the screen as you shoot
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see
Using the Screen.
(1) Normal angle
(2) Low angle
(3) High angle
Shooting through the viewfinder
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
(1) Horizontal shooting
(2) Vertical shooting
1.With your right hand, hold the camera firmly by the camera grip.
2.
With your left hand, support the lens from below.
3.
Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4.Rest your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5.To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6.Hold the camera near your face and look through the viewfinder.
102
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can
further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed
and aperture value.
The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed on the screen, in the
viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for 8 sec. (metering timer/ ).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the picture.
Preventing camera shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can
cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:
Hold the camera still, as shown in Holding the Camera.
Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button
completely.
103
Note
The camera will still pause before taking a picture if you press the shutter button
completely without pressing it halfway first, or if you press the shutter button
halfway and immediately press it completely.
Even during menu display or image playback, you can return to shooting standby
by pressing the shutter button halfway.
104
< > Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as <
> or < >, then turn the < > dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to select a shooting mode.
After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to set the white balance, drive
mode*, flash exposure compensation*, or Picture Style.
* Available only in still photo shooting.
(2) Turn only the < > dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture value, etc.
Note
The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the
Multi-function lock ( ).
105
< > Quick Control Dial 1
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as <
> or < >, then turn the < > dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to select a shooting mode.
After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to set the metering mode*, AF
operation*, ISO speed*, or AF area.
* Available only in still photo shooting.
(2) Turn only the < > dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Used for operations such as setting the exposure compensation amount and the
aperture value setting for manual exposures.
106
< > Quick Control Dial 2
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as <
>, then turn the < > dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
Used for operations such as switching between main tabs on the menu screen.
(2) Turn only the < > dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed.
Note
The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the
Multi-function lock ( ).
108
< > Multi-Controller
< > is an eight-direction key with center button. To use it, press lightly with the tip of your
thumb.
Examples of using the Multi-controller
•
AF point/magnified frame movement in still photo shooting or movie recording
•
White balance correction
•
Magnified area position movement during playback
•
Quick Control
•
Selecting or setting menu items
109
< > Mode Button
You can set the shooting mode.
Press the < > button, then use < >, < >, < >, or < > to select a
shooting mode.
110
< / > Multi-Function/FTP Server Image Transfer
Button
Shooting screen
By default, the < > button works in conjunction with dials to enable you to adjust
settings used in shooting or recording.
Settings you can configure in conjunction with dials
White balance ( )
Drive mode* ( )
Flash exposure compensation* ( )
Picture Style ( )
Metering mode* ( )
AF operation* ( )
ISO speed ( )
AF area ( )
* Available only in still photo shooting.
How to use with dials
Press the < > button to display the settings you can configure with dials ( ).
Press the <
> button again repeatedly (or turn the < > dial) to select a setting
to configure.
To adjust the upper row of setting items, turn the < > dial.
To adjust the lower row of setting items, turn the < > dial.
Caution
Advanced white balance settings such as color temperature cannot be configured
this way.
111
Note
To set the AF area, you can also press the < > button and then the < >
button.
Playback screen
Pressing the <
> button on the playback screen transfers images to the FTP server.
112
< > AF Start Button
Equivalent to pressing the shutter button halfway (except in [ ] mode).
113
< / > LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination/
Cropping Button
Each press of the < > button changes the information on the LCD panel.
Illuminate the LCD panel by holding down the < > button ( ).
Pressing the < > button on the playback screen switches to [ : Cropping] settings.
115
< > Control Ring
By default, exposure compensation can be set by turning the control ring of RF lenses or
mount adapters while pressing the shutter button halfway in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], or [M]
mode. Otherwise, you can assign a different function to the control ring by configuring [ ] in
[ : Customize dials/control ring] ( ).
116
< > Info Button
Each press of the < > button changes the information shown.
117
Menu Operations and Settings
Menu Screen in [ ] Mode
Menu Screen in [Fv]/[P]/[Tv]/[Av]/[M]/[BULB] Mode
Menu Setting Procedure
Dimmed Menu Items
(
1
)
(
6
)
(
4
)
(
3
)
(
2
)
(
5
)
(
8
)(
7
)
(1)
< > button
(2)
< > button
(3)
< > button
(4)
Screen
(5)
< > Quick control dial 1
(6)
< > button
(7)
< > Quick control dial 2
(8)
< > Main dial
118
Menu Screen in [ ] Mode
In [ ] mode, some tabs and menu items are not displayed.
119
Menu Screen in [Fv]/[P]/[Tv]/[Av]/[M]/[BULB] Mode
(1)
Main tabs
(2)
Secondary tabs
(3)
Secondary tab name
(4)
Menu items
(5)
: Shooting
(6)
: Autofocus
(7)
: Playback
(8)
: Communication functions
(9)
: Set-up
(10)
: Control customization
(11)
: Custom Functions
(12)
: My Menu
(13)
Menu settings
120
Menu Setting Procedure
1.
Press the < > button.
The menu is displayed.
2.
Select a tab.
Each time you turn the < > dial, the main tab (group of functions)
will switch. You can also switch tabs by pressing the < > button.
Turn the < > dial to select a secondary tab.
3.
Select an item.
Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press < >.
121
4.
Select an option.
Turn the < > dial to select an option.
The current setting is indicated in blue.
5.
Set an option.
Press < > to set it.
6.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button to return to shooting standby.
Note
The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the
< > button to display the menu screen.
Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen or using < >.
To cancel the operation, press the < > button.
122
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When focus bracketing has been set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. Use of these items has been limited by other functions
that have been set.
To investigate the limiting function, select a dimmed item and press < >.
Canceling the limiting function will enable you to configure the dimmed menu item.
Caution
It may not be possible to check the limiting function for some setting items.
Note
In [ : Reset camera], you can reset menu functions to the default settings by
selecting [Basic settings] in [Reset individual settings] ( ).
123
2.
Select a setting item and set your preferred option.
To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down.
To adjust the setting, turn the < > or < > dial, or press < >
left or right. Some items are set by pressing a button after this.
You can customize the setting items on the screen shown above in
[
: Customize Quick Controls] ( ).
To access the Customize Quick Controls screen, press and hold the
< > button ( ).
Press < > vertically or horizontally to select an item on the screen
shown above.
To adjust the setting, turn the < >, < >, or < > dial. Some
items are set by pressing a button after this.
125
[Display 1] [Display 2]
Movie recording screen
Quick Control in Movie Recording
As in still photo shooting, press the < > button to access the Quick Control screen. Each
press of the <
> button switches between screens if you have selected ([ ]) both
[Display 1] and [Display 2] in [ : Quick Ctrl screen] ( ), but only the selected screen is
displayed if one is selected ([
]).
Use the [Display 1] screen as described in Quick Control in Still Photo Shooting or
Playback. Use the [Display 2] screen as follows.
126
1.
Switch pages as needed.
Turn the < > or < > dial to switch pages.
You can also switch pages by tapping (A) or swiping left or right.
2.
Select an item.
Turn the < > dial or press < > vertically or horizontally to select
an item, then press the < >.
127
3.
Select an option.
To select an option, turn the < >, < >, or < > dial or press
< > up or down (or in some cases, left or right).
Detailed settings screen
Turn the < > dial to select a tab (1).
Press < > vertically or horizontally to change the setting (2).
Press < > to confirm your selection and return to the screen in step
2.
4.
Set an option.
Press < > to set it.
128
5.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button to return to shooting standby.
129
Touch-Screen Operation
Tapping
Dragging
Tapping
Sample screen (Quick Control)
Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen.
For example, when you tap [ ], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [ ],
you can return to the preceding screen.
Note
To have the camera beep for touch operations, set [ : Beep] to [Enable] ( ).
Responsiveness to touch operations can be adjusted in [ : Touch control] ( ).
130
Dragging
Sample screen (Menu screen)
Slide your finger while touching the screen.
131
Shooting Mode
This chapter describes shooting modes.
• A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
• A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
• Fv: Flexible-Priority AE
• P: Program AE
• Tv: Shutter-Priority AE
• Av: Aperture-Priority AE
• M: Manual Exposure
• BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
132
A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent
Auto)
[ ] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum
settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving
subject by detecting the motion of the subject.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Aim the camera at what you will shoot (the subject).
A tracking frame (1) may be displayed on the subject, under some
shooting conditions.
133
3.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
You can also focus by tapping a person's face or other subject on the
screen (Touch AF).
Under low light, the AF-assist beam ( ) is automatically activated if
needed.
Once the subject is in focus, that AF point turns green and the camera
beeps (One-Shot AF).
An AF point in focus on a moving subject turns blue and tracks subject
movement (Servo AF).
4.
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
Caution
Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
134
Note
AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press the
shutter button halfway.
[ ] mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset
scenes. If you prefer other color tones, set the shooting mode to [Fv], [P], [Tv],
[Av], or [M] and select a Picture Style other than [
] before shooting ( ).
135
Minimizing blurred photos
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. To avoid camera shake, consider
using a tripod. Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Attach the camera securely to the tripod.
Using a remote switch (sold separately, ) or a wireless remote control (sold
separately,
) is recommended.
FAQ
Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway
( ). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again.
After focusing, multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points.
The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera
shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately, ) is
recommended.
The bottom of pictures taken with flash is unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct light from the flash. If the subject is
close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
Note
Note the following if you are not using flash.
•
Under low light, when camera shake tends to occur, hold the camera steady or
use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, you can reduce the blur caused by
camera shake by setting the lens to the wide-angle end.
•
When shooting portraits under low light, tell subjects to stay still until you have
finished shooting. Any movement as you shoot will make the person look blurry
in the picture.
136
A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent
Auto)
Shooting Moving Subjects
Scene Icons
Shooting Moving Subjects
Pressing the shutter button halfway tracks moving subjects to keep them in focus.
Keep the subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at the
decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
137
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE
Enables the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to be set automatically or
manually. Equivalent to shooting in [P], [Tv], [Av], or [M] mode without needing to switch to
these modes.
* [Fv] stands for Flexible value.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [Fv].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Fv].
2.
Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
Turn the < > dial to select an item to set. [ ] appears to the left
of the selected item.
Turn the < > dial to set the option.
To reset the setting to [AUTO], press the < > button.
139
3.
Set the amount of exposure compensation.
Turn the < > dial and select the exposure level indicator. [ ] or
[ ] appears to the left of the exposure level indicator.
Turn the < > or < > dial to set the level.
To reset the setting to [±0], press the < > button.
Combinations of functions in [Fv] mode
Shutter Speed Aperture Value ISO Speed
Exposure
Compensation
Shooting Mode
[AUTO] [AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available Equivalent to [P]
Manual selection
Manual selection [AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available Equivalent to [Tv]
Manual selection
[AUTO] Manual selection
[AUTO]
Available Equivalent to [Av]
Manual selection
Manual selection Manual selection
[AUTO] Available
Equivalent to [M]
Manual selection —
Caution
Blinking of the values indicates a risk of underexposure or overexposure. Adjust the
exposure until the value stops blinking.
Slow synchro is not used under low light when you have set up [Fv] mode to
resemble [P] or [Av] mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [
: External Speedlite
control] is set to [1/*-30sec. auto].*
1
* 1: The value of “1/*” varies depending on current settings.
140
Note
Values for shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are
underlined.
You can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure
compensation amount to [±0] in step 2 or 3 by holding down the <
> button.
141
P: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's
brightness.
* [P] stands for Program.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [P].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [P].
2.
Focus on the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
Once the subject is in focus, an AF point is displayed (in green for One-
Shot AF or blue for Servo AF).
The shutter speed and aperture value are set automatically.
3.
Check the display.
As long as the exposure value is not blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
142
4.
Take the picture.
Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.
Caution
If a slow shutter speed and low aperture value blink, the subject is too dark.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
If a fast shutter speed and high aperture value blink, the subject is too bright.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of
light entering the lens.
Note
Differences between [P] and [ ] modes
[ ] mode limits available functions and sets the AF area, metering mode, and
many other functions automatically to prevent bad shots. In contrast, [P] mode only
sets the shutter speed and aperture value automatically, and you can freely set the
AF area, metering mode, and other functions.
Program shift
In [P] mode, you can freely change the combination (program) of shutter speed and
aperture value set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same
exposure. This is called Program shift.
With Program shift, you can press the shutter button halfway, then turn the < >
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed.
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns off).
Program shift cannot be used with flash.
143
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture
value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create
a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
* [Tv] stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1.
Set the shooting mode to [Tv].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Tv].
144
2.
Set the desired shutter speed.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
3.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The aperture value is set automatically.
4.
Check the display and shoot.
As long as the aperture value is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
Caution
If the lowest aperture value blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the < > dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
If the highest aperture value blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the < > dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking, or set a lower ISO speed.
145
Note
["] in shutter speed display stands for “seconds.” ([0"5] → 0.5 sec., [15"] → 15
sec., etc.)
146
Av: Aperture-Priority AE
Depth-of-Field Preview
In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed
automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. A higher f/
number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within
acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less
of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
* [Av] stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture value: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture value: f/32)
1.
Set the shooting mode to [Av].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Av].
147
2.
Set the desired aperture value.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
3.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The shutter speed is set automatically.
4.
Check the display and shoot.
As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
Caution
If a slow shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the < > dial to decrease the aperture value (open the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.
If a fast shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the < > dial to increase aperture value (close the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.
148
Note
Aperture value display
The higher the value, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The aperture value
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, [F00]
will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field Preview
Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture value
setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).
Note
The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground to
the background.
The depth-of-field effect is readily apparent on images as you change the aperture
value and press the depth-of-field preview button.
Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
149
M: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine
the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure
meter.
* [M] stands for Manual.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [M].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [M].
2.
Set the ISO speed ( ).
Turn the < > dial to set it.
With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation ( ).
3.
Set the shutter speed and aperture value.
To set the shutter speed, turn the < > dial, and to set the aperture
value, turn the < > dial.
150
4.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
Check the exposure level mark [ ] to see how far the current exposure
level is from the standard exposure level.
(1) Standard exposure index
(2) Exposure level mark
5.
Set the exposure and take the picture.
Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed
and aperture value.
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure
compensation ( ) as follows:
Tap the exposure level indicator
[ : Expo.comp./AEB]
Quick Control screen
Turn the control ring while pressing the shutter button halfway
Caution
Exposure may not be as expected when ISO Auto is set, because the ISO speed is
adjusted to ensure standard exposure for your specified shutter speed and
aperture value. In this case, set the exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation is not applied in flash photography with ISO Auto, even if
you have set an exposure compensation amount.
151
Note
In [M] mode with ISO Auto, [ ] (evaluative metering), and [ : AE lock meter.
mode after focus] set to the default setting ( ), holding down the shutter button
halfway locks the ISO speed after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed.
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the <
>
button was pressed.
Any existing exposure compensation amount is maintained if you switch to [M]
mode with ISO Auto after using exposure compensation in [P], [Tv], or [Av] mode
( ).
To coordinate exposure compensation in ½-stop increments with ISO speed set in
⅓-stop increments when [ : Exposure level increments] is set to [1/2-stop] and
used with ISO Auto, exposure compensation is further adjusted by adjusting shutter
speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will not change.
152
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
Bulb Timer
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely,
and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes,
fireworks, astrophotography, and other subjects requiring long exposures.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [BULB].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[BULB].
2.
Set the desired aperture value.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
153
3.
Take the picture.
The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
Elapsed exposure time is displayed on the LCD panel.
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
ISO 400 is used when the camera is set to ISO Auto.
When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer, keep
pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb exposure
time).
Note
You can reduce the noise generated during long exposures by using [ : Long
exp. noise reduction] ( ).
Using a tripod and the bulb timer is recommended for bulb exposures.
You can also shoot bulb exposures with Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately, ).
You can also shoot bulb exposures with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately). When you press the remote controller's release (transmit) button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop
the bulb exposure.
154
Bulb Timer
You can set the exposure time for bulb exposures in advance. This feature eliminates the
need to keep holding down the shutter button during bulb exposures, which can reduce
camera shake.
Note that the bulb timer can only be set and will only take effect in [BULB] (bulb exposure)
mode.
1.
Select [ : Bulb timer] ( ).
2.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press the < > button.
3.
Set the exposure time.
Select an option (hours : minutes : seconds).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set a value, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
155
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Take the picture.
After you press the shutter button completely, the bulb exposure
continues for your specified time.
[ ] and the exposure time are displayed on the LCD panel
during bulb timer shooting.
To clear the timer setting, select [Disable] in step 2.
Caution
Bulb exposure stops if you press the shutter button completely and release it during
the timer.
Bulb exposure continues even after your specified exposure time if you keep
pressing the shutter button completely (which overrides automatic stopping when
your specified exposure time elapses).
The bulb timer is cleared (and reverts to [Disable]) when you switch shooting
modes.
156
Still Photo Shooting
To prepare for still photo shooting, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
< >, then press the < > button and choose a shooting mode.
to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB]
mode.
•
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
•
Image Quality
•
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio
•
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
•
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos
•
Anti-Flicker Shooting
•
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting
•
Shooting with Speedlites
•
Flash Function Settings
•
Picture Style Selection
•
Picture Style Customization
•
Picture Style Registration
•
HDR Shooting (PQ)
• Color Space
• Clarity
•
Auto Lighting Optimizer
• Highlight Tone Priority
• White Balance
•
Custom White Balance
• White Balance Correction
• Lens Aberration Correction
•
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
• High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
• Dust Delete Data Acquisition
•
Multiple Exposures
158
• Focus Bracketing
• Pre-Continuous Shooting
• Interval Timer Shooting
•
Silent Shutter Function
• Shutter Mode
• Enabling Shutter Release Without a Card
• Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
• Customizing Quick Controls
• Shooting with the Touch Shutter
• Image Review
• High-Speed Display
• Metering Timer
• HDR/C. Log View Assist
•
Display Simulation
•
Optical Viewfinder Simulation
•
Blackout-Free Display
•
Shooting Information Display
•
Reverse Display
•
Display Frame Rate
•
Viewfinder Display Format
•
Auto Power Off Temperature
•
Metering Mode Selection
•
AE for Priority Subjects During AF
•
Manual Exposure Compensation
•
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
•
General Still Photo Shooting
159
Color/tone/Dynamic range
(1) Picture Style
• Picture Style Selection
• Picture Style Customization
• Picture Style Registration
(2) Color space
(3) Clarity
(4) HDR shooting (PQ)
(5) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(6) Highlight tone priority
White balance/Quality correction
(1) White balance
(2) Set Custom WB
(3) WB Shift/Bkt.
(4) Lens aberration correction
(5) Long exp. noise reduction
(6) High ISO speed NR
(7) Dust Delete Data
161
Assist shooting
(1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode
(2) Customize Quick Controls
(3) Metering timer
Assist shooting
(1) Image review
(2)
High speed display
(3) Blackout-free display
(4) Display simulation
(5) OVF sim. view assist
(6) HDR/C.Log View Assist.
Caution
[ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is displayed in gray when an IS-equipped lens is
attached.
163
Image Quality
Image Size Selection
RAW Images
Guide to Image Quality Settings
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
JPEG/HEIF Quality
Note
“Image quality” in this guide refers to both image size and JPEG/HEIF quality ( ).
Image Size Selection
You can specify , , , or for JPEG/HEIF images and or for RAW
images.
Note
HEIF is available when [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ]. You can
convert these images to JPEG images after shooting (
).
1.
Select [ : Img type/size] ( ).
The screen displayed varies depending on [ Rec options] settings
in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.].
165
2.
Set the image size.
Standard/Auto switch card/Record to multiple
For RAW images, turn the < > dial to select the size, and for
JPEG/HEIF images, turn the < > dial.
Press < > to set it.
Record separately
When [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to
[Rec. separately], turn the < > dial to select [ ] or [ ], then press
< >. Note that recording separately to and is not
available for RAW images.
Select an image size on the screen displayed, then press < >.
166
Note
is set if you set both RAW and JPEG/HEIF to [ ].
Two versions of each shot are recorded at your specified image quality when you
have selected both RAW and JPEG/HEIF. Both images have the same file number
but each has a different file extension, with .JPG for JPEG, .HIF for HEIF and .CR3
for RAW.
To record in different image quality to each card (as a RAW and JPEG image, for
example), set [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] to [Rec.
separately].
Meanings of image size icons are as follows: : RAW, : Compact RAW,
JPEG: JPEG, HEIF: HEIF,
: Large, : Medium, : Small 1, : Small 2.
167
RAW Images
RAW images are raw data from the image sensor in a digital form.
Compared to image files, offers smaller file sizes.
To process RAW images and save them as JPEG or HEIF images, you can use [ : RAW
image processing] ( ) or Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
For details on Digital Photo Professional, refer to the Digital Photo Professional instruction
manual.
Note
To view RAW images on a computer, consider using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP).
RAW images from this camera cannot be used with older versions of DPP.
Download the latest version of DPP from the Canon website and install it, which will
overwrite the previous version ( ).
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images captured
by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.
168
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the upper left of the shooting screen and
lower right of the viewfinder.
Note
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99 or
more shots continuously. Fewer shots are available for a value of 98 or lower, and
when [BUSY] is displayed on the screen, internal memory is full and shooting will
stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase.
After all captured images have been written to a card, you can once again shoot at
the maximum burst listed in
Still photo file size / Number of possible shots /
Maximum burst for continuous shooting.
170
JPEG/HEIF Quality
1.
Select [ : quality] ( ).
2.
Select the desired image size.
Select the image size, then press < >.
3.
Set the desired quality (compression).
Select the number, then press < >.
Higher numbers offer higher quality (lower compression).
Quality of 6–10 is indicated by < >, and 1–5, by < >.
Note
The higher the quality, the fewer shots will be available. In contrast, the lower the
quality, the more shots will be available.
171
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio
When using an RF or EF lens, you can change the aspect ratio before shooting. You can
use [1.6x (crop)] to shoot as if using a telephoto lens, because this option magnifies the
center of the image (an area equivalent to APS-C size).
With RF-S/EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically.
1.
Select [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
To proceed without changing shooting area display, press < > and
go to step 4.
172
3.
Select how the shooting area is displayed.
On the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
Select the type of display, then press < >.
Caution
/ / / image quality options are not available
when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
Shooting with [1.6x (crop)] and image quality set to / /
/ produces / / / images, respectively.
[1.6x (crop)] is used automatically with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
173
4.
Take the picture.
Setting examples
When is set
When is set or an RF-S or EF-S lens is used
When / is set
When / is set
174
When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an RF-S/EF-S lens is used, an image
magnified approx. 1.6× is displayed.
When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)]
is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured.
Caution
Areas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when [1.6x
(crop)] is set, or with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
[Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with RF-S/
EF-S lenses.
[ : Add cropping information] is only available when [Full-frame] is set.
When external flash units are used, flash auto zoom (automatic adjustment of flash
coverage) based on the [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] setting is not performed.
Note
For details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see Recording
pixel count for still photo recording.
Nearly 100% field of view coverage is maintained vertically and horizontally when
cropping or an aspect ratio is set.
Aspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio is set,
which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played back, the image
area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that only the shooting image area
is shown in
Slide Show.
175
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
In exposure bracketing, three consecutive images are captured at different exposures by
automatically adjusting the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1.
Select [ : Expo.comp./AEB] ( ).
2.
Set the AEB range.
Turn the < > dial to set the AEB range (1). By turning the < >
dial, you can set the exposure compensation amount.
Press < > to set it.
When you close the menu, the AEB range will be displayed on the
screen.
176
3.
Take the picture.
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
Increased exposure
Three bracketed shots are taken, according to the specified drive
mode, in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and
increased exposure.
AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to
turn off the AEB range display.
Caution
Exposure compensation in AEB may be less effective with [ : Auto Lighting
Optimizer] ( ) set to an option other than [Disable].
Note
[ ] blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB.
If the drive mode is set to [ ], press the shutter button three times for each shot.
In [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode, holding down the shutter button completely captures
three images, one after another, before the camera automatically stops shooting.
When [
] or [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured after a delay of 10
sec. When [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured after a delay of 2 sec.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
AEB is not available in flash photography or bulb exposures, or focus bracketing.
AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the power
switch to < > or when the flash is fully charged.
177
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos
ISO Speed Range When Set Manually
ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In [
]
mode, ISO speed is set automatically.
For details on ISO speed in movie recording, see ISO speed (recommended exposure
index) in movie recording.
Setting with a dial
1.
Set the ISO speed.
With an image displayed on the screen, set by turning the < > dial.
Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed automatically.
When [AUTO] is selected, pressing the shutter button halfway will
display the ISO speed actually set.
For details on the ISO Auto range, see ISO speed (recommended
exposure index) in still photo shooting.
178
Setting ISO speed from a screen of options
1.
Access the screen of ISO speed options.
Tap the ISO speed in the lower right of the screen.
2.
Select an option.
Turn the < > dial or select a registered setting value.
You can register frequently used ISO speed setting values by
specifying an option other than [AUTO] and selecting [Register].
Note
To specify [AUTO] when setting [ISO speed] in [ : ISO speed settings],
press the < > button.
179
ISO speed guide
Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of camera/subject shake
or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of field), in some shooting conditions.
High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper depth of field),
and longer flash range but may increase image noise.
Note
ISO speed can also be set with the < > button by pressing the < > button
to select the ISO speed item while an image is displayed.
Can also be set on the [ISO speed] screen in [ : ISO speed settings].
To expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H
(equivalent to ISO 102400), adjust [ISO speed range] in [
: ISO speed
settings] ( ).
Caution
Image noise (dots of light or banding) and irregular colors may increase and
apparent resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 102400), because this is
an expanded ISO speed.
Because L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the dynamic
range will be somewhat narrower compared to the standard setting.
When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure, or multiple
exposure, image noise (graininess, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or
color shift may become noticeable.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as a
combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images may
not be recorded properly.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure may
result.
180
4.
Set [Maximum].
Select the [Maximum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
5.
Select [OK].
182
ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto.
1.
Select [Auto range].
2.
Set [Minimum].
Select the [Minimum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
3.
Set [Maximum].
Select the [Maximum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
183
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
To prevent shutter speeds from being set too low automatically, you can set the minimum
shutter speed for ISO Auto.
This is effective in [P] or [Av] mode when shooting subjects in motion with a wide-angle lens,
or when using a telephoto lens. It can also reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1.
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
185
2.
Set the desired minimum shutter speed.
Auto
If you select [Auto], turn the < > dial to set the difference relative
to standard speed (toward Slower or Faster), then press < >.
Manual
If you select [Manual], turn the < > dial to select the shutter speed,
then press < >.
Caution
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set
with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will be set
to obtain the standard exposure.
This function will not be applied to flash photography.
Note
When [Auto (Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to a
single stop of the shutter speed.
186
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Uneven exposure and color may appear in continuous shooting at fast shutter speeds under
flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights, due to uneven vertical exposure. Anti-
flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by
flickering.
1.
Select [ : Anti-flicker shoot.] ( ).
2.
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
3.
Select [Auto flicker detection].
Select [Enable] for [ ] icon display on the shooting screen after
detection of flickering at 100 or 120 Hz.
[Auto flicker detection] is available regardless of the selected [Anti-
flicker shoot.] option.
187
Caution
[Anti-flicker shoot.]
When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutter-
release time lag may become longer.
Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the
flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects
of the flicker cannot be reduced.
In [Fv], [P], or [Av] mode, color tone of captured images may vary if the shutter
speed changes during continuous shooting or if you take multiple shots of the same
scene at different shutter speeds. To avoid inconsistent color tone, shoot in [Fv],
[Tv], or [M] mode at a fixed shutter speed.
Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
Shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed may change when you start
shooting with AE lock.
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image,
flicker may not be properly detected.
Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result may not
be obtained even if you use this function.
Exposure in flash photography may vary.
Note
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
Detect flicker manually if the screen flickers (as when the light source changes) by
pressing the < > button, selecting [Anti-flicker shoot.], then pressing the
< > button.
Flicker is not reduced in [ ] mode.
188
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting
Recommended Tv Setting
Manual Setting
Images may be affected by banding if you shoot under light sources that flicker at high
frequencies. High-frequency anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures at suitable
shutter speeds for high-frequency flickering, which minimizes the effect of this flickering on
images.
Caution
Exposure in still photo shooting may vary.
Before high-frequency anti-flicker shooting, consider setting [ : Same expo. for
new aperture] to [ISO speed].
1.
Select a shooting mode ( ).
Press the < > button to select [Tv] or [M].
2.
Select [ : HF anti-flicker shooting] ( , ).
3.
Select [HF anti-flicker shooting].
189
4.
Select [Enable].
5.
Select an item.
190
Recommended Tv Setting
The camera detects 50.0–8193.7 Hz light sources and displays a suitable shutter speed for
shooting under light sources that flicker at high frequencies. You can then switch to the
indicated shutter speed.
1.
Set the desired shutter speed.
Set the shutter speed you would prefer to shoot at. For light sources
that flicker at high frequencies, the camera will determine a suitable
shutter speed near this value.
2.
Select [Recommend Tv sett.].
3.
Select [OK].
It may improve HF flicker detection accuracy to magnify, as much as
possible, any areas affected by banding.
191
4.
Switch to the indicated shutter speed.
Select [Yes] to switch to the indicated shutter speed.
Selecting [Yes (move to Tv settings)] will display the [Manual setting]
screen. Go to step 2 in Manual Setting.
5.
Take the picture.
Caution
Shutter speeds displayed will be in a range of 1/50.0–1/8192.0 sec.
Do the following if [No flicker detected] is displayed, or if switching shutter speeds
does not eliminate banding.
•
Set the recommended Tv setting again.
•
Change how the camera is facing, as by rotating it about 90°, then set the
recommended Tv setting.
•
Try the manual setting option
HF flicker detection may be less accurate under these conditions.
• Scenes with repetitive patterns (with a lattice or stripes, for example)
• Subjects in constant motion
•
Extremely bright or dark scenes
•
Scenes with multiple light sources
• Scenes with small flashing light sources
•
Light sources flickering at lower frequencies
Note
Display of affected movies is not updated if a recommended Tv setting is applied
for high-frequency flickering during HDMI output of 8K/4K movies.
192
Manual Setting
Check on the screen for image areas affected by light sources that flicker at high
frequencies, then find a suitable shutter speed.
1.
Select [Manual setting].
2.
Adjust the shutter speed.
Do the following if banding is not eliminated at the shutter speed set by
the recommended Tv setting.
• Turn the < > dial. With the < > dial, you can increase the
shutter speed set by the recommended Tv setting (×2, ×3, ×4, and
so on) or decrease it (1/2×, 1/3×, 1/4×, and so on).
• Turn the < > dial to fine-tune the setting.
If this does not eliminate banding, change how the camera is facing, as
by rotating it about 90°, then set the recommended Tv setting.
3.
Shoot.
193
Caution
Shutter speeds you can set manually are in a range of 1/50.0–1/8192.0 sec.
Maximum sync speed in flash photography is limited to 1/181.0 sec. in shutter
modes other than [Electronic
].
In [Electronic ] shutter mode, maximum sync speed in flash photography is
limited to 1/128.0 sec. The following conditions limit maximum flash sync speed to
1/181.0 sec.
• With RF-S or EF-S lenses attached
•
When set to [1.6x (crop)] ( )
Dark lenses may prevent correct display simulation.
Image display on the screen or in the viewfinder may differ from actual shooting
results. Take some test shots in advance.
194
Shooting with Speedlites
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
Non-Canon Flash Units
Quick Flash Group Control
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Features of EL/EX series Speedlites (sold separately) can be used in flash photography with
the camera.
For instructions, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
Sync speed
Flash sync speeds vary as follows depending on the combination of camera settings.
Camera Setting
Flash Sync Speed
Shutter mode
Cropping/aspect ratio
Mechanical
1/200 sec.
*
1/250 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain
1/250 sec.
*
1/320 sec.
Electronic
1/160 sec.
*
1/250 sec.
* Equivalent to APS-C size
Note
For a faster flash sync speed in [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [Electronic ] mode, set
[
: Sync speed priority] to [Enable] ( ).
195
Flash exposure compensation
You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an image displayed on the
screen, press the <
> button and use a dial to set the amount of flash exposure
compensation ( ). You can set the flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
FE Lock
This enables you to obtain appropriate flash exposure for a specific part of the subject. Aim
the viewfinder center over the subject, press the camera's < > button, then compose the
shot and take the picture.
Caution
Some Speedlites cannot be attached directly to this camera. For details, see Multi-
Function Shoe.
Setting [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) to an option other than [Disable] may
still cause images to look bright even if you set lower flash exposure compensation
for darker images.
Using high-speed sync may cause banding in images. To reduce the banding, it
may help to do the following.
•
Move the Speedlite farther from the camera.
•
Lower the shutter speed.
•
Set [ : Shutter mode] to [Mechanical].
Note
The Speedlite will fire an intermittent AF-assist beam as needed, if autofocusing is
difficult under low light.
You can also set flash exposure compensation on the Quick Control screen ( ) or
in the [Flash function settings] setting of [ : External Speedlite control] ( ).
The camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera is
turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that support this
feature.
196
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash
can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera's shooting mode to [M] or [Av] and adjust the aperture value before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.
197
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync speed
Sync speed for non-Canon compact flash units varies by shutter mode. Before shooting,
confirm that flash sync is performed correctly.
[ : Shutter mode] Setting
Sync Speed
Mechanical 1/200 sec. or slower
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250 sec. or slower
Electronic
1/160 sec. or slower
With large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and
varies depending on the model. Before shooting, confirm that flash sync is performed
correctly by taking some test shots at a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
Sync terminal
You can use flash units with a sync cord via the sync terminal ( ). The terminal has
locking threads to prevent accidental cord detachment.
The sync terminal has no polarity. Sync cords can be connected regardless of polarity.
Caution
Using the camera with a dedicated flash unit or flash accessory for cameras of
other manufacturers poses a risk of malfunction and even damage.
Do not connect flash units with an output voltage of 250 V or more to the camera's
sync terminal.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera's hot shoe. It may not fire.
Note
You can use one flash unit attached to the camera's hot shoe and another
connected to the sync terminal at the same time.
198
Quick Flash Group Control
As you view the shooting screen in wireless multi-flash photography, you can configure the
settings for each flash group by pressing the button assigned to [Quick flash group
control] in [
: Customize buttons for shooting]. This example is based on assigning the
< > button ( ).
1.
Set the flash firing mode to < > (individual group control) to
prepare for wireless multi-flash photography.
For details, refer to the instruction manuals of flash units supporting
wireless multi-flash photography.
2.
During standby, press the < > button.
Settings (flash mode and flash exposure compensation) for each flash
group are displayed.
Turn the < > dial to select a flash group (A–E) to configure.
Turn the < > dial to set the flash mode.
Turn the < > dial to adjust flash output or flash exposure
compensation.
Note
The [Quick flash group control] setting screen can be displayed in [Fv], [P], [Tv],
[Av], [M], or [BULB] mode.
When Speedlites are set to a flash mode other than < > (individual group
control), pressing the < > button displays the [Flash function settings]
screen.
199
Flash Function Settings
Flash Firing
E-TTL Balance
E-TTL II Flash Metering
Continuous Flash Control
Sync Speed Priority
Slow Synchro
Flash Function Settings
Flash Custom Function Settings
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite Custom Functions
Functions of EL/EX Series Speedlites compatible with flash function settings can be set via
a camera menu screen. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before
setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
1.
Select [ : External Speedlite control] ( ).
200
2.
Select an option.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set to [Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist beam of the
Speedlite, set to [Disable].
201
E-TTL Balance
You can set your preferred appearance (balance) for flash shots. This setting enables you to
adjust the ratio of ambient light to Speedlite light output.
Set the balance to [Ambience priority] to lower the proportion of flash output and uses
ambient light to produce lifelike shots with a natural mood. Especially useful when
shooting dark scenes (indoors, for example). After switching to [P] or [Av] mode,
consider setting [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to [1/*-30sec.
auto]*
1
and using slow-sync shooting.
Set the balance to [Flash priority] to make the flash the main source of light. Useful for
reducing shadows on subjects and in the background from ambient light.
* 1: The value of “1/*” varies depending on current settings.
Caution
For some scenes, [Ambience priority] may yield the same results as [Standard].
202
E-TTL II Flash Metering
Set to [Eval (FacePrty)] for flash metering suitable for shots of people.
Set to [Evaluative] for flash metering that emphasizes firing in continuous shooting.
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered scene.
Note
Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be necessary.
Caution
Even when [Eval (FacePrty)] is set, some subjects and shooting conditions may
prevent you from obtaining the expected result.
203
Continuous Flash Control
Set to [E-TTL each shot] to perform flash metering for each shot.
Set to [E-TTL 1st shot] to perform flash metering for only the first shot before
continuous shooting. The flash output level for the first shot is applied to all subsequent
shots. Useful when prioritizing continuous shooting speed without recomposing shots.
Caution
Any subject movement in continuous shooting may cause exposure problems.
[E-TTL 1st shot] is set when [ : Shutter mode] is set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or
[Mechanical] in [ ] drive mode.
204
Sync Speed Priority
You can use a faster than normal sync speed in flash photography.
Available when [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II flash metering].
Flash sync speeds vary as follows when this feature is set to [Enable], depending on the
combination of other camera settings.
Camera Setting
Flash Sync Speed (Fastest)
Shutter mode
Cropping/aspect ratio
Elec. 1st-curtain
1/320 sec.
*
1/400 sec.
Electronic
1/200 sec.
*
1/320 sec.
* Equivalent to APS-C size
Note
Also applies with Speedlite 580EX II or later when [Flash mode] is set to [Manual
flash].
Flash units may not fire at your specified flash output level if the fastest flash sync
speed is used with [Flash mode] set to [Manual flash].
Has no effect in [Mechanical] shutter mode.
The following Speedlites support [Sync speed priority].
• Speedlite 430EX III / 470EX-AI / 600 EX II-RT / EL-100 / EL-1 / EL-5 / EL-10
• Macro Ring Lite MR14-EX II / Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT
Underexposure may occur in some shooting conditions when [Sync speed
priority] is set to [Enable].
Suitable exposure may not be obtained with [Sync speed priority] set to [Enable]
if receiver Speedlites in radio transmission wireless shooting are set to a positive
exposure compensation value.
205
Slow Synchro
You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in [P] or [Av] mode. Note that the
maximum flash sync speed varies depending on the combination of settings for [ :
Shutter mode] and [
: Cropping/aspect ratio].
1/*-30sec. auto
The shutter speed is set automatically in the following range to suit the brightness. High-
speed sync is also possible.
Shutter mode
Cropping/aspect ratio
Shutter Speed
Mechanical
1/200–30 sec.
*
1/250–30 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain
1/250–30 sec.
*
1/320–30 sec.
Electronic
1/160–30 sec.
*
1/250–30 sec.
* Equivalent to APS-C size
1/*-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions.
Effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. Light from the flash provides
standard exposure for subjects, but note that backgrounds may be dark.
206
1/* sec. (fixed)
Shutter speed is fixed as follows, which is more effective in preventing subject blur and
camera shake than with [1/*-1/60sec. auto]. However, in low light, the subject's
background will come out darker than with [1/*-1/60sec. auto].
Shutter mode
Cropping/aspect ratio
Shutter Speed
Mechanical
1/200 sec.
*
1/250 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain
1/250 sec.
*
1/320 sec.
Electronic
1/160 sec.
*
1/250 sec.
* Equivalent to APS-C size
Caution
High-speed sync is not available in [P] or [Av] mode when set to [1/* sec. (fixed)].
207
Flash Function Settings
The information displayed on the screen, position of display, and available options vary
depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other
factors. For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
Sample display
(1)
Flash mode
(2)
Wireless functions / Firing ratio control (RATIO)
(3)
Flash zoom (flash coverage)
(4)
Shutter synchronization
(5)
Flash exposure compensation
(6)
Flash exposure bracketing
Caution
Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible with
flash function settings.
208
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for automatic
flash photography.
[Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite's [Flash output level] yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible
with the respective flash mode.
Wireless functions
You can use radio or optical wireless transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-flash
lighting.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with
wireless flash photography.
209
Firing ratio control (RATIO)
With a macro flash, you can set the firing ratio control.
For details on firing ratio control, refer to the Instruction Manual of the macro flash.
Flash zoom (flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash head, you can set the flash coverage.
210
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after
the shooting starts.
Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds for natural-looking
shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights.
Set to [High-speed synchronization] for flash photography at higher shutter speeds than
the maximum flash sync shutter speed. This is effective when shooting with an open
aperture in [Av] mode to blur the background behind subjects outdoors in daylight, for
example.
Caution
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. or
slower. If the shutter speed is 1/40 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will
be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set.
Shutter speed is set to 1/8000 when [ : Shutter mode] is [Electronic ] and
[High-speed synchronization] is selected with a shutter speed of 1/8000 sec. or
faster.
Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust flash output.
211
Note
If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the flash
exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera and
Speedlite, the Speedlite's setting overrides the camera's.
212
Flash exposure bracketing
Speedlites equipped with flash exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the external flash
output automatically as three shots are taken at once.
213
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite's Custom Functions, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
Speedlite.
1.
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
2.
Set the desired functions.
Select the number.
Select an option.
Caution
EX series Speedlites always fire at full output when the [Flash metering mode]
Custom Function is set to [1:TTL] (autoflash).
The Speedlite's Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled from the
camera's [
: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the Speedlite.
214
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite
Custom Functions
1.
Select [Clear settings].
2.
Select the settings to be cleared.
Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn's].
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to clear all flash settings or
Custom Function settings.
215
Picture Style Selection
Picture Style Characteristics
Symbols
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In [ ] mode, [ ] (Auto) is set automatically.
1.
Select [ : Picture Style] ( , ).
2.
Select a Picture Style.
216
Picture Style Characteristics
Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid
for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
Note
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones, with slightly less sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits.
Skin tone can be adjusted by changing [Color tone] as described in Settings and
Effects.
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive
landscapes.
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of fine subject contours and subtle textures. The colors will be
slightly vivid.
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes images subdued, with lower contrast and
natural color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with
lower contrast.
Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Caution
Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG/HEIF images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
217
User Def. 1–3
You can add a new style based on presets such as [Portrait] or [Landscape] or a
Picture Style file, then adjust it as needed (
). With any User Defined Picture Style that
has not yet been registered, pictures will be taken with the same characteristics settings
as with the default settings of [Standard].
Caution
[ Auto] and the options from [ User Def. 1] to [ User Def. 3] are not
available when [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ].
[ Auto] is not available when [ : Focus bracketing] is set to [Enable].
218
Symbols
Icons on the Picture Style selection screen represent [Strength], [Fineness], and
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numbers
indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style.
Sharpness
Strength
Fineness
Threshold
Contrast
Saturation
Color tone
Filter effect (Monochrome)
Toning effect (Monochrome)
Caution
For movie recording, “*, *” is indicated for the [Fineness] and [Threshold]
parameters of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] cannot be set for movie
recording.
219
Picture Style Customization
Settings and Effects
Monochrome Adjustment
You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings. For details on
customizing [Monochrome], see
Monochrome Adjustment.
1.
Select [ : Picture Style] ( , ).
2.
Select a Picture Style.
Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the < > button.
3.
Select an option.
Select an option, then press < >.
For details on settings and effects, see Settings and Effects.
220
4.
Set the effect level.
Adjust the effect level, then press < >.
Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.
Note
For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be set
(not displayed).
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can restore the parameter settings of the
respective Picture Style to the defaults.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture Style,
then shoot.
221
Settings and Effects
Sharpness
Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
Fineness*
1
1: Fine 5: Grainy
Threshold*
2
1: Low 5: High
Contrast –4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
Saturation –4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
Color tone –4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone
* 1: Indicates the edge thinness that enhancement applies to. The smaller the number, the finer the
outlines that can be emphasized.
* 2: Contrast threshold between edges and surrounding image areas, which determines edge
enhancement. The smaller the number, the more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast
difference is low. However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
222
Monochrome Adjustment
Filter effect
Even with the same monochrome image, you can make white clouds, green trees, or other
elements stand out more by applying a filter effect.
Filter Sample Effects
N:None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye:Yellow Blue sky will look more natural, and white clouds will look crisper.
Or:Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.
R:Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G:Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Note
Increasing [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
Toning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in the selected color.
Effective when you want to create memorable images.
223
Picture Style Registration
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired,
and register it under [User Def. 1] – [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture
Styles with different settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software,
)
can also be modified here.
1.
Select [ : Picture Style] ( , ).
2.
Select [User Def. *].
Select a number from [User Def. 1] to [User Def. 3], then press the
< > button.
3.
Press < >.
With [Picture Style] selected, press < >.
224
4.
Select a base Picture Style.
Select the base Picture Style, then press < >.
Also select styles this way when adjusting styles registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (EOS software).
5.
Select an option.
Select an option, then press < >.
225
6.
Set the effect level.
Adjust the effect level, then press < >.
For details, see Picture Style Customization.
Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names in [User Def. *] have been changed from default
values.
Caution
If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Defined Picture Style.
You can restore the default [User Def. *] style and settings by selecting [Basic
settings] in [ : Reset camera].
Note
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *], then
shoot.
For instructions on registering a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
226
HDR Shooting (PQ)
[ HDR shooting (PQ)] enables you to capture HDR images conforming to the PQ
specification (referring to the input signal gamma curve for HDR image display) defined in
ITU-R BT.2100 and SMPTE ST.2084.
Note
Captured as HEIF or RAW images.
For optimal viewing, use an HDR display device.
Display varies depending on monitor performance.
1.
Select [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] ( , ).
2.
Select [HDR PQ].
[ ] and [ ] icons are shown on the screen.
For display on the camera screen, images are converted to resemble
how they would look on an HDR display device.
Caution
[HDR PQ] is not available with [ : Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit].
Appearance on HDR and non-HDR display devices may vary.
Image areas shown in gray in the histogram roughly indicate signal values that are
not used.
[ : Display frame rate set.] is automatically set to [Smooth].
227
Color Space
Adobe RGB
The range of reproducible colors is called the “color space.” For normal shooting, sRGB is
recommended.
In [
] mode, [sRGB] is set automatically.
1.
Select [ : Color space] ( ).
2.
Set a color space option.
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then press < >.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other professional applications.
Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible monitors or DCF 2.0
(Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
Note
File names of still photos shot in the Adobe RGB color space begin with “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile, refer to
the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
228
Clarity
You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges.
Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a
sharper appearance.
1.
Select [ : Clarity] ( , ).
2.
Set the effect level.
Caution
Setting clarity may darken or lighten the areas around boundaries in high-contrast
images.
The effect of this setting is not shown in images on the screen in still photo
shooting.
229
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too
low or high.
In [
] mode, [Standard] is set automatically.
1.
Select [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( , ).
2.
Set a correction option.
Caution
Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting
conditions.
If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or flash
exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come out
bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
Note
To enable [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to be set even in [M] and [BULB]
modes, press the < > button in step 2 to clear the checkmark [ ] for
[Disabled in M or B modes].
230
Highlight Tone Priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1.
Select [ : Highlight tone priority] ( , ).
2.
Set an option.
[Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes smoother.
[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than
[Enable], under some shooting conditions.
Caution
Noise may increase slightly.
The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
Note
[ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] and cannot be changed when you
set [
: HDR shooting (PQ)] to [HDR PQ] after pressing the < > button to
add a checkmark to this setting.
231
White Balance
White Balance
[ / ] Auto White Balance
[ ] Setting a Color Temperature
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, [Auto White Balance
( / )] provides suitable white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained
with auto white balance, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it
manually by shooting a white object.
In [
] mode, [ ] (auto white balance) is set automatically.
1.
Select [ : White balance] ( , ).
2.
Select a white balance setting.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
Note
For [ ] and [ ] setting instructions, see [ / ] Auto White Balance.
To set a suitable white balance for the light source of the shooting location, select
[ ] and turn the < > dial to set an MWB number ( ).
To set a color temperature directly, select [ ], then turn the < > dial ( ).
To adjust the current white balance, press the < > button after selecting the
light source, then adjust as needed ( ).
White balance settings cannot be changed while you are pressing the movie
shooting button to record a movie.
Movie Exif information will include the white balance setting value at the time
recording began.
232
(Approx.)
Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Auto: Ambience priority
3000–7000
Auto: White priority
Daylight 5200
Shade 7000
Cloudy, twilight, sunset 6000
Tungsten light 3200
White fluorescent light 4000
When using Flash Automatically set*
Custom 2000–10000
Color temperature 2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function. Otherwise, it will be
fixed to approx. 6000K.
233
White Balance
The human eye adapts to changes in lighting so that white objects look white under all kinds
of lighting. Digital cameras determine white from the color temperature of lighting and, based
on this, apply image processing to make color tones look natural in your shots.
234
[ / ] Auto White Balance
With [ ] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm
color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene.
If you select [ ] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color
cast.
1.
Select [ : White balance] ( , ).
2.
With [ ] selected, press the < > button.
3.
Select an option.
Caution
Precautions when set to [
] (White priority)
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the
picture may not be reduced.
When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [ ] (Ambience priority).
235
[ ] Setting a Color Temperature
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
1.
Access the WB screen.
Follow steps 1–2 in White Balance.
2.
Set the color temperature.
With [ ] selected, turn the < > dial to select a color temperature.
Press < > to exit the setting.
Note
When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
When setting [ ] to a value measured with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take some test shots in advance and adjust the setting as
needed to compensate for any difference between the color temperature meter and
the camera.
236
Custom White Balance
Registering Custom White Balances
Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances
Naming Custom White Balances
With custom white balance, you can set the white balance using an image captured under
the same lighting as at the shooting location.
Registering Custom White Balances
To register custom white balances, you can either register a picture taken during this
process or register an image recorded on a card.
Note
Up to five custom white balances can be registered to the camera.
Register separate custom white balances for still photos and movies, as needed.
Registering by shooting on-site
Registration from the Quick Control screen
1.
Press the < > button.
Select the [White balance] setting item.
237
2.
Select [Custom].
Select [ *], then press < >.
3.
Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance
data to.
Turn the < > dial or press < > left or right to select a number from
1 to 5, then press the < > button.
4.
Shoot a plain white object ( ).
The custom white balance is registered to the camera.
To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and
Shooting with Custom White Balances.
238
Registration from the menu
1.
Select [ : Set Custom WB] ( , ).
2.
Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance
data to.
Press < >.
Turn the < > dial or press < > up or down to select a number for
[ ] (from 1 to 5), then press < >. The custom white balance will be
registered to the selected number.
3.
Select [Record and register WB].
239
Registering from an existing image on a card
1.
Shoot a plain white object.
Shoot a plain white object as described in Shooting to register custom
white balances.
2.
Select [ : Set Custom WB] ( , ).
3.
Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance
data to.
Press < >.
Turn the < > dial or press < > up or down to select a number for
[ ] (from 1 to 5), then press < >. The custom white balance will be
registered to the selected number.
4.
Select [Select image on card].
Images recorded on the card are displayed.
241
5.
Select an image to register as the custom white balance.
Turn the < > dial to select the image captured in step 1, then press
< >.
6.
Register the image data as a custom white balance on the camera.
Select [OK] after the message, and your custom white balance will be
registered to the camera.
To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and
Shooting with Custom White Balances.
Caution
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
The following images cannot be selected.
• Images captured with Picture Style set to [Monochrome]
• Multiple exposures
•
Cropped images
• Images from other cameras
242
Shooting to register custom white balances
Note the following when shooting a plain white object to register the color as a custom white
balance.
Your selected number (1) blinks in the upper left of the screen and on the LCD panel.
Aim the camera at a plain white object so that white fills the area in (2).
Set the camera to Manual Focus and shoot so that the white object has standard
exposure.
You can use any of the white balance settings.
Caution
Correct white balance may not be obtained if the exposure of your image differs
greatly from standard exposure.
Note
If [Correct WB may not be obtained with the selected image] is displayed, try
shooting again from step 1.
Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray card or standard 18%
gray reflector (commercially available).
Images captured for this purpose are not recorded to a card.
243
Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances
Setting from the Quick Control screen
1.
Press the < > button.
Select the [White balance] setting item.
2.
Select [Custom].
3.
Select the custom white balance number.
Turn the < > dial or press < > left or right to select a number from
1 to 5, then press <
>.
244
4.
Take the picture.
The picture is taken with the [ *] setting applied.
246
Naming Custom White Balances
You can add a name (caption) to the five registered custom white balances (custom white
balance nos. 1–5).
1.
Select [ : Set Custom WB] ( , ).
2.
Select the custom white balance number.
On the [Set Custom WB] screen, select the number of the registered
custom white balance to add a name to.
3.
Select [Edit WB name].
247
4.
Enter text.
Use < >, < >, or < > to select a character, then press < >
to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
5.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
The information is saved, and display returns to the screen in step 2.
The entered name is displayed below [ *].
Note
As names, it may be helpful to enter the names of places where you captured the
custom white balance images, or the names of the light sources.
248
White Balance Correction
White Balance Correction
White Balance Auto Bracketing
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating
filter.
White Balance Correction
1.
Select [ : WB Shift/Bkt.] ( , ).
249
2.
Set the white balance correction.
Sample setting: A2, G1
Use < > to move the “■” mark on the screen to your preferred
position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. White
balance is corrected in the direction you move the mark.
The direction and amount of correction are indicated in the upper right
of the screen.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.
Note
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds of a color
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color temperature used to
indicate values such as the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
250
White Balance Auto Bracketing
White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images at once with
different color tones.
1.
Select [ : WB Shift/Bkt.] ( , ).
2.
Set the white balance bracketing amount.
Sample setting: B/A bias, ±3 levels
Turning the < > dial changes the “■” mark on the screen to “■ ■ ■”
(3 points). Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A bracketing, and
turning it counterclockwise sets the M/G bracketing.
The direction and amount of bracketing are indicated in the upper right
of the screen.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.
Caution
During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
Recording images to the card takes longer than in normal shooting.
251
Note
The bracketing sequence is (1) Standard white balance, (2) Blue (B) bias, and (3)
Amber (A) bias, or (1) Standard white balance, (2) Magenta (M) bias, and (3)
Green (G) bias.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance
bracketing.
The white balance icon blinks to indicate that white balance bracketing has been
set.
You can change the bracketing sequence ( ) and number of shots ( ) for the
white balance bracketing.
Bracket stands for bracketing.
252
Lens Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Distortion Correction
Focus Breathing Correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Diffraction Correction
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics.
The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction].
1.
Select [ : Lens aberration correction] ( , ).
2.
Select an option.
253
3.
Select a setting.
Confirm that the name of the attached lens and [Correction data
available] are displayed.
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed, see Digital Lens
Optimizer.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
Caution
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
Note
The amount of correction applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in [ ] mode when correction
data is registered on the camera.
254
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
Caution
To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the area
seen in viewfinder shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
Applying distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
The amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies.
Note
With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.
255
Focus Breathing Correction
Angle of view fluctuations from changes in focal position during movie recording can be
reduced.
This feature can be configured when [Distortion correction] is set to [Enable].
Caution
[Focus breathing correction] is not displayed in still photo shooting.
Applying focus breathing correction will narrow the angle of view. The extent of
narrowing depends on shooting conditions.
Test focus breathing correction before use, because the image processing may
affect apparent image resolution and noise.
Optimal correction is applied based on the position of the focusing distance range
switch on the lens. (The correction is also applied in MF mode.) Focus breathing
correction is not applied to any difference between the actual focusing distance and
the range of the switch.
Movies with abrupt changes to the angle of view may be recorded if you move the
focusing distance range switch during recording.
Correction artifacts may occur, depending on the lens and shooting conditions.
For details on lenses compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website ( ).
256
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along with diffraction
and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution.
If [Correction data not available] or [
] is displayed by [Digital Lens Optimizer], you can
use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
Caution
Image processing after you shoot takes longer when set to [High] (which causes
the access lamp to be illuminated longer).
Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes longer.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style
sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before shooting.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is not
possible.)
The effect of Digital Lens Optimizer cannot be checked on the screen at the time of
shooting.
Note
With [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [Standard] or [High], [Chromatic aberr corr]
and [Diffraction correction] are not displayed, but they are both set to [Enable] for
shooting.
257
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
Note
[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to
[Standard] or [High].
258
Diffraction Correction
Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
Caution
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
Note
“Diffraction correction” corrects degraded resolution not only from diffraction but
also from the low-pass filter and other factors. Thus, correction is also effective for
exposures with the aperture wide open.
[Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to
[Standard] or [High].
Caution
General precautions for lens aberration correction
Lens aberration correction cannot be applied to existing JPEG/HEIF images.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not
be recorded.
The amount of correction (except diffraction correction) is less for lenses that do
not provide distance information.
259
Note
General notes for lens aberration correction
Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the
effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions,
etc.
If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
Corrections are applied even when an extender or life-size converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the result
will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for diffraction
correction).
If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
260
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise such as dots of light or banding that tends to occur in long exposures at shutter
speeds of one sec. or slower can be reduced.
1.
Select [ : Long exp. noise reduction] ( ).
2.
Set a reduction option.
Auto
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting
is effective enough in most cases.
Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all images exposed for 1 sec. or
longer. The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected
with the [Auto] setting.
Caution
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, noise reduction after you shoot may take as long as
exposure for the shot.
Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto]
setting.
[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not displayed
until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
261
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
You can reduce the image noise generated. This function is especially effective when
shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.
1.
Select [ : High ISO speed NR] ( , ).
2.
Set the level.
Low / Standard / High
The camera applies an amount of noise reduction corresponding to
your specified level.
262
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
Preparation
Dust Delete Data Appending
Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in case sensor
cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically.
Preparation
Use an RF or EF lens.
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and set the focus to infinity (∞). If the lens
has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face toward you and turn the focusing ring
clockwise all the way.
1.
Select [ : Dust Delete Data] ( ).
263
2.
Select [OK].
After the automatic self-cleaning of the image sensor is performed, a
message will appear. Although there will be a mechanical sound of the
shutter during the cleaning, no picture is taken.
264
3.
Shoot a plain white object.
Shoot with a plain white object (such as a new sheet of white paper)
filling the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.).
Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if
there is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust
Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will
appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear.
Check the information in Preparation, select [OK], and shoot again.
265
Dust Delete Data Appending
The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from now on. Acquiring
Dust Delete Data immediately before shooting is recommended.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase dust spots
automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.
Caution
Dust Delete Data is not obtained when RF-S/EF-S lenses are used, or when [ :
Cropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)].
Dust Delete Data is not added to images when [Distortion correction] is set to
[Enable].
If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect
the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
266
Multiple Exposures
Merging Multiple Exposures with a JPEG Image Recorded on the Card
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be merged into a
single image.
1.
Select [ : Multiple exposure] ( ).
2.
Set [Multiple exposure].
Select an option, then press < >.
To exit shooting multiple exposures, select [Disable].
On:Func/Ctrl
Convenient when reviewing the results of each multiple exposure as
you shoot. Continuous shooting speed is slower with this option.
On:ContShtng
Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects. These
operations are not available during continuous shooting: menu screen
display, image review after capture, image playback, and undo last
image (
).
Note that the single exposures used for merging are discarded, and
only the multiple-exposure image is saved.
267
3.
Set [Multi-expos ctrl].
Select a merging option, then press < >.
Additive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on [No. of exposures], set negative exposure compensation.
Follow these basic guidelines to set the exposure compensation
amount.
Exposure compensation setting guidelines, by number of
exposures
Two exposures: –1 stop, three exposures: –1.5 stops, four exposures:
–2 stops
Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation is
set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. In multiple
exposures of the same scene, auto exposure control provides standard
exposure behind the subject.
Bright/Dark
Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is
compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are
retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the
relative brightness (or darkness) of the images.
268
4.
Set [No. of exposures].
Select the number of exposures, then press < >.
5.
Specify the images to save.
To save all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image, select
[All images] and press < >.
To save only the multiple-exposure image, select [Result only] and
press <
>.
269
6.
Set [Continue Mult-exp].
Select an option, then press < >.
With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
With [Continuously], multiple-exposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
7.
Shoot the first exposure.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the captured image will be displayed.
The [ ] icon blinks.
The number of remaining exposures is indicated on the screen (1) for
reference.
Pressing the < > button enables you to view the captured image
( ).
270
8.
Shoot the next exposures.
Images captured so far are displayed merged. For only image display,
press the <
> button repeatedly.
Multiple-exposure shooting will end when the set number of exposures
are taken.
Note
With [On:Func/Ctrl], you can press the < > button to view the multiple-
exposure image so far, and you can delete the previous single exposure ( ).
As shooting information, the multiple-exposure image has information captured for
the last shot.
Caution
Image noise, color shift, or banding may be noticeable in multiple exposures,
depending on subjects and shooting conditions.
With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable the
noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
Multiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to < > or
switch batteries or cards.
Multiple-exposure shooting ends if you set the shooting mode to [ ]/[C1]/[C2]/[C3]
or switch to movie recording.
If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will not be
possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during shooting, multiple-
exposure shooting will end.
[ : Display frame rate set.] is locked on [Smooth] when [Multiple
exposure] is set to an option other than [Disable].
Merging Multiple Exposures with a JPEG Image
Recorded on the Card
You can select a JPEG image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The
selected JPEG image will remain intact.
271
1.
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
2.
Select the first image.
Turn the < > dial to select the first image, then press < >.
Select [OK].
The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
272
3.
Take the picture.
When you select the first image, the number of remaining exposures as
set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.
Images you can select
You can select a JPEG image shot at the same angle of view as the first selected JPEG.
Images captured at a full-frame angle of view
Images captured using RF/EF lenses and with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] set to
[Full-frame]
Images captured at an APS-C angle of view
•
Images captured using RF/EF lenses and with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] set
to [1.6x (crop)]
•
Images captured using RF-S/EF-S lenses
Caution
The following images cannot be selected.
•
RAW or HEIF images
•
JPEG images in / / sizes
•
Images with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] set to an option other than [Full-
frame] or [1.6x (crop)]
•
Images from other cameras
Images that cannot be merged may be displayed.
Note
You can also select a JPEG image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
Select [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.
The color space set for the first image also applies to subsequent images.
273
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During
Shooting
To view the multiple-exposure image so far, check exposure, and see how the images are
merged, you can press the <
> button before you finish shooting your specified number
of exposures (when [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, but not with [On:ContShtng]).
Pressing the < > button will display the operations possible during multiple-exposure
shooting.
Option Description
Return to
previous screen
The screen before you pressed the <
> button will reappear.
Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (enabling you to replace it by shooting again).
The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
Save and exit
With [Save source imgs: All images], saves all single exposures and the
multiple-exposure image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
With [Save source imgs: Result only], saves only the multiple-exposure
image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
Exit without saving
Exits the multiple-exposure shooting without saving the image.
Caution
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure
images.
274
FAQ
Are there any restrictions on the image quality?
Multiple exposures are captured as JPEG [
] images. Even when [ : Img type/
size] is set to RAW only, these images are captured as JPEG [
] images.
Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single exposure from the
images recorded on the card ( ). Note that you cannot merge multiple images already
recorded on the card.
How are multiple-exposure files numbered?
With the camera set to save all images, multiple-exposure image files are named with
the next number after the number of the last single exposure used to create them.
Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
During multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off will not take effect. Note that before
you start multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off automatically takes effect at the
time set in the [Auto power off] option of [ : Power saving], which will cancel multiple-
exposure shooting.
275
Focus Bracketing
Focus bracketing enables continuous shooting with the focal distance changed automatically
after each shot. These images enable you to create a single image in focus over a deep
depth of field. Compositing is also possible using an application that supports depth
compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
1.
Select [ : Focus bracketing] ( ).
2.
Set [Focus bracketing].
Select [Enable].
3.
Set [Number of shots].
Specify the number of images captured per shot.
Can be set in a range of [2]–[999].
276
4.
Set [Focus increment].
Specify how much to shift the focus. This amount is automatically
adjusted to suit the aperture value at the time of shooting.
Larger aperture values increase the focus shift and make focus
bracketing cover a wider range under the same focus increment and
number of shots.
After completing the settings, press < >.
5.
Set [Exposure smoothing].
You can compensate for changes in image brightness during focus
bracketing by selecting [Enable], so that the camera makes
adjustments based on differences between the displayed and actual
aperture value (effective f/number), which varies by focal position.
Select [Disable] if you prefer not to compensate for changes in image
brightness during focus bracketing. Use this option for purposes other
than depth compositing of the captured images in applications such as
DPP.
277
6.
Set [Depth composite].
Select [Enable] for in-camera depth compositing. Both the depth-
composited image and the source images are saved.
Select [Disable] if you prefer not to perform in-camera depth
compositing. Only captured images are saved.
7.
Set [Crop depth comp.].
Select [Enable] for cropping before compositing, to prepare any
images without a sufficient angle of view for compositing alignment by
cropping them to correct the angle of view.
Select [Disable] if you prefer not to crop these images. In this case,
areas without a sufficient angle of view are covered by a black border
in the saved images. You can crop the images manually or edit them
as needed.
278
8.
Set [Flash interval].
Focus bracketing is available with compatible Speedlites, and with non-
Canon flash units fired via the sync terminal.
When set to [0], compatible Speedlites fire and the camera shoots as
soon as the Speedlites are fully charged. Refer to the instruction
manual of compatible Speedlites for precautions on continuous firing.
Consider setting a longer interval when using multiple compatible
Speedlites in wireless flash photography.
With non-Canon flash units, set a suitable interval time for the flash
recharging time and durability. Also refer to Non-Canon Flash Units.
9.
Take the picture.
To save your shots in a new folder, tap [ ] and select [OK].
Focus at the nearer end of your preferred focal range, then press the
shutter button completely.
Once shooting begins, release the shutter button.
The camera shoots continuously, shifting the focal position toward
infinity.
Shooting ends after your specified number of images, or at the far end
of the focal range.
To cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.
279
Caution
For best results, shoot subjects that are not moving. Using a tripod, remote switch
(sold separately, ), or wireless remote control (sold separately, ) is
recommended.
Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing, you
can crop the image if necessary.
For details on lenses and flash units compatible with this feature, visit the Canon
website (
).
Suitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus
increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting may
take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to decide a
suitable [Focus increment] setting.
Shooting under flickering light may cause uneven images. In this case, lowering the
shutter speed may give better results.
Focus bracketing is not available when the camera is set to manual focus ( ).
Canceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last image.
Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo
Professional.
Maximum shutter speed with focus bracketing is 1/8000 sec.
Flash sync shutter speed in focus bracketing is 1/125 sec. (for [Full-frame]) or
1/200 sec. (for [1.6x (crop)]).
Depth compositing is canceled if you open the battery compartment or card slot
cover, or if the remaining battery capacity becomes too low. After cancellation,
composited images are not saved.
Depth compositing may fail for patterned images (with a lattice or stripes, for
example) or images that are generally flat and uniform.
When taking several shots, start by focusing closer, then gradually focus farther
away.
Too great a distance when moving the focal position between multiple shots may
cause unevenness in depth-composited images, or it may cause compositing to
fail.
Depth compositing is intended for subjects that are not moving. For this reason,
shooting subjects in motion may prevent effective compositing.
Depth compositing of images with multiple subjects may fail if your shots are
composed with the subjects far apart from each other, for example.
To cancel depth compositing in progress, press the < > button. Cancellation
discards the composited image but keeps all source images.
In depth compositing, optimal images from the shots are selected and combined by
the camera. Not all of the shots are combined to create the composite image.
Note
For best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting.
Details such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined by
conditions for the first shot.
[ : Focus bracketing] reverts to [Disable] when the power switch is set to
< >.
280
Depth compositing image quality setting and images saved
Composited images are saved as JPEG or HEIF images with image quality. RAW
composited images are not produced.
When [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec.
separately], source images for both slots are saved with the same image quality as set
for the card selected in [ Play] in the [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] setting.
281
Pre-Continuous Shooting
With this feature, automatic shooting in continuous shooting drive mode is already in
progress before you press the shutter button completely, after you have pressed it halfway
for a moment. To prepare for pre-continuous shooting, set the number of images to capture.
Note that [
] is displayed on the shooting screen during pre-continuous shooting.
1.
Select [ : Pre-cont. shooting] ( ).
2.
Select [Number of images].
3.
Specify the number of images.
282
Caution
Use cards with 4 GB or more of free space.
The shutter-release time lag and continuous shooting interval may vary.
The number of shots available may not match the number displayed.
Subjects may be out of focus if there are sudden changes in the distance between
subjects and the camera while you are pressing the shutter button halfway.
Images may not be captured correctly when you use pre-continuous shooting with
a low battery.
Shutter speeds slower than [0"5] (0.5 sec.) are not available.
In [M] mode, consider shooting with ISO Auto.
With variable maximum aperture zoom lenses, exposure may change if you zoom
while pressing the shutter button halfway or completely.
Even with constant maximum aperture zoom lenses, exposure may change if you
zoom while pressing the shutter button halfway or completely. For details, refer to
the Canon website ( ).
Note
The electronic shutter is used in shooting.
The amount of preliminary shooting varies depending on the continuous shooting
speed. (For example, at a continuous shooting speed of approx. 30 shots/sec., the
camera shoots for about 0.5 sec. before you press the button completely.)
283
Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of shots, so that the
camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to your interval until your specified
number of shots are taken.
1.
Select [ : Interval timer] ( ).
2.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press the < > button.
284
3.
Set the shooting interval and number of shots.
Select an option to set (hours : minutes : seconds / number of shots).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
Interval
Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].
No. of shots
Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on
indefinitely until you stop it, set [00].
4.
Select [OK].
The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen.
(1) Interval
(2) Number of shots
285
5.
Take the picture.
First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval
timer settings.
During interval timer shooting, [ ] will blink.
After the set number of shots are taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
Note
Using a tripod is recommended.
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing the
shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next interval
timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent operations
such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing back images.
If the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is
shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots than
specified will be taken.
Even during interval timer operation, auto power off is triggered after approx. 8 sec.
of inactivity, as long as [Auto power off] under [
: Power saving] is not set to
[Disable].
Can also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, and multiple
exposures.
To stop interval timer shooting, select [Disable] or set the power switch to
< >.
286
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
In < > focus mode, the camera will not shoot unless subjects are in focus.
Consider setting the mode to manual focus and focusing manually before shooting.
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
Shooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting interval
will prevent shooting at the specified interval. For this reason, fewer shots than
specified will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as the shooting
interval may also reduce the number of shots.
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the
shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken
with the set intervals.
When using flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the flash
charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the flash from firing.
Intervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.
Interval timer shooting is canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the power
switch to <
>, switch the shooting mode to [BULB], [C1], [C2], or [C3], switch
to movie recording, or use EOS Utility (EOS software).
During interval timer shooting, you cannot use Remote Control Shooting or remote-
release shooting with a Speedlite.
287
Silent Shutter Function
Disables shutter release sounds, operating sounds, and firing and illumination of the flash
and other light sources.
The following settings are used and cannot be changed.
Shutter mode: [Electronic ]
Shutter release sound, focused beep: only headphone output
Touch sounds, self-timer sounds: silent
Shutter at shutdown: open
Long exposure noise reduction: [Disable]
Flash firing: [Disable]
AF-assist beam firing: [Disable]
Self-timer/remote control lamp: not illuminated
When using lenses equipped with focus preset, consider turning off the focus preset beep.
1.
Select [ : Silent shutter function] ( ).
2.
Select [On].
288
Shutter Mode
You can choose the method of shutter release.
1.
Select [ : Shutter mode] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Mechanical
Shooting activates the mechanical shutter. Recommended when
shooting with the aperture of a bright lens wide open.
Elec. 1st-curtain
Camera vibration blur may be reduced more than with the mechanical
shutter, under some shooting conditions.
Flash sync speed can be set higher than with the mechanical shutter.
Electronic
Enables reduced sound and vibration from shutter operations,
compared to mechanical shutter or electronic first-curtain.
Recommended when shooting with the aperture of a bright lens wide
open.
Maximum shutter speed can be set higher than for mechanical shutter
or electronic first-curtain.
• A white frame blinks on the screen when you press the shutter
button completely.
• Shutter operations are accompanied by beeps. You can disable
beeping in [ : Beep].
289
Caution
With the camera set to [Elec. 1st-curtain], defocused image areas may be
incomplete when you shoot near maximum aperture at high shutter speeds under
some shooting conditions. If you dislike the appearance of defocused image areas,
shooting as follows may give better results.
• Shoot with an option other than [Elec. 1st-curtain].
• Lower the shutter speed.
•
Increase the aperture value.
Setting [ : Silent shutter function] to [On] sets the shutter mode to [Electronic
].
Zooming during continuous shooting may cause changes in exposure even at the
same f/number. For details, refer to the Canon website ( ).
Depending on the lens used, consider shooting with [Elec. 1st-curtain] or
[Electronic ] to ensure effective image stabilization. For details, refer to the lens
instruction manual.
Precautions when set to [Electronic
]
The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the shooting
conditions.
Images may lack suitable exposure if the aperture value changes in [P] (Program
AE), [Tv] (Shutter-priority AE), or [Fv] (Flexible-priority AE) mode.
With some lenses and under some shooting conditions, lens focusing and aperture
adjustment may be audible.
Bands of light may be displayed and captured images may be affected by light and
dark banding if you shoot with electronic shutter during flash firing by other
cameras or under fluorescent lighting or other flickering light sources.
Banding may appear in the viewfinder or on the screen if you shoot under flickering
light sources.
290
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
Focal Length
This menu is displayed for configuration of camera IS mode settings when you are using a
non-IS lens. With IS-equipped lenses, setting the lens Image Stabilizer switch to <
>
combines stabilization by the lens and camera.
1.
Select [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] ( ).
2.
Select [IS mode].
Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.
3.
Select [Still photo IS].
[Always]: Provides constant image stabilization.
[Only for shot]: Image stabilization is active only at the moment of
shooting.
292
Caution
In some cases, this may not provide sufficient stabilization for certain lenses.
[IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is not available when lenses with an IS switch are
used. Use the IS switch on the lens instead.
Note
For details on image stabilization for movie recording, see Movie Digital IS.
Focal Length
Image stabilization based on your specified lens focal length is possible by setting the focal
length when using lenses that do not support lens communication.
1.
Select [Focal length].
2.
Set the focal length.
Turn the < > dial to select the digit of the focal length.
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
293
3.
Select [OK].
Caution
Set [ : Release shutter w/o lens] to [Enable]. [Disable] prevents image
stabilization.
[Focal length] is not displayed when lenses are attached that support lens
communication.
Note
Focal length can be set in a range of 1–1000 mm (in 1 mm increments).
294
Customizing Quick Controls
Quick Control items and the layout are customizable.
1.
Select [ : Customize Quick Controls] ( ).
2.
Select [Edit layout].
3.
Select items to remove.
Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to remove, then
press <
>.
Items shown on the Quick Control screen are labeled with a
checkmark. Items without a checkmark will be removed.
295
4.
Select items to add.
Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to add, then press
< >.
To change the layout, press the < > button.
5.
Change the layout.
Use the < > dial to select an item to move, then press < >.
Use the < > dial to move the item, then press < >.
Press the < > button to exit setup.
296
6.
Select [Save and exit].
7.
Review the screen.
Press the < > button to check the screen with your settings applied.
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or Clearing All Items
Select [Reset settings] to restore the default Quick Control screen items and layout.
Select [Clear all items] to remove all items from the layout, so that no Quick Control
screen is displayed when the < > button is pressed.
297
Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically.
1.
Enable the Touch Shutter.
Tap [ ] in the lower left of the screen.
Each time you tap the icon, it will toggle between [ ] and [ ].
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you tap, then the picture will be
taken.
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
298
2.
Tap the screen to shoot.
Tap the face or subject on the screen.
On the point you tap, the camera focuses (Touch AF) using your
specified AF Area.
When [ ] is set, the AF point turns green when focus is achieved,
then the picture is taken automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point turns orange and the picture
cannot be taken. Tap the face or subject on the screen again.
Caution
The camera shoots in single shooting mode regardless of the drive mode setting
([
], [ ], or [ ]).
Tapping the screen focuses with [One-Shot AF], even if [ : AF operation] is set
to [Servo AF].
Tapping the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
When shooting by tapping with [Review duration] in [ : Image review] set to
[Hold], you can take the next shot by pressing the shutter button halfway or tapping
[ ].
Note
To shoot with bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. Tap once to start exposure and
again to stop it. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
299
Note
When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in the [Screen
off] option of [ : Power saving].
301
High-Speed Display
High-speed display that switches between each shot and the live image is available when
shooting in [ ] (high-speed continuous shooting) drive mode and in a shutter mode other
than electronic shutter.
1.
Select [ : High speed display] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Select [Enable] for display that switches between each shot and the
live image.
Caution
Images may waver or flicker during high-speed display. This occurs more often at
high shutter speeds. However, this does not affect shooting results.
High-speed display is not performed for shutter speeds slower than 1/30 sec.,
aperture values higher than f/11, conditions that make autofocusing difficult, flash
photography, or ISO expansion. It may also stop as you are shooting.
High-speed display is not available in the following cases.
• With [ : OVF sim. view assist] set to [On]
• With [ : Display simulation] set to [Disable] or [Exposure only during
DOF]
303
HDR/C. Log View Assist
View Assist Display Conditions
View Assist Display Settings
The appearance of images in HDR shooting ( ) with [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] or in
shooting with custom pictures ( ) applied, as shown on the camera screen, viewfinder, or
non-HDR display devices connected via HDMI, can be made to resemble the appearance
on HDR display devices.
Caution
Recorded movies will look different from how they appear on the screen.
View Assist Display Conditions
[ : HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ]
[Gamma/Color Space] in [ : Custom Picture] is set as follows
•
Canon Log 2 / C.Gamut
•
Canon Log 3 / C.Gamut
•
PQ / BT.2020
•
HLG / BT.2020
* HLG stands for Hybrid Log-Gamma.
The following gamma/color space is selected in Registering look files, before setting
[Look File] to [On]
• HDR PQ(BT.2100)
•
HDR HLG(BT.2100)
305
3.
Select an option.
Screen and viewfinder
On (BT.709 during )
When the camera is set to [HDR PQ], converted images are displayed
that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display device.
Image display with a custom picture applied involves basic conversion
to a standard gamma/color space.
On (HDR Assist during )
When the camera is set to [HDR PQ], converted images are displayed
that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display device.
Image display with a custom picture applied involves conversion so that
subjects with intermediate brightness resemble how they would appear
on an HDR display device.
[HDMI]
Select [On].
Caution
Optical viewfinder simulation is used for display when [ : OVF sim. view assist]
is set to [On].
307
Note
[ ] is shown on the information display screen during movie recording with View
Assist.
View Assist is also used with magnified view.
View Assist display settings do not affect the images captured.
308
Display Simulation
With display simulation, display of image brightness and depth of field more closely matches
the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots.
1.
Select [ : Display simulation] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Exposure+DOF ( )
Image brightness and depth of field as displayed closely matches the
actual brightness (exposure) of your shots. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly. Similarly,
changes to the aperture value will alter the depth of field.
Exposure ( )
Image brightness as displayed closely matches the actual brightness
(exposure) of your shots. If you set exposure compensation, the image
brightness will change accordingly.
Exposure only during DOF ( )
Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to
see. Only when you press and hold the depth-of-field preview button
will image brightness resemble actual brightness (exposure) of your
shot, and you can check depth of field.
Disable ( )
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see.
Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the
standard brightness.
309
Caution
In flash photography, only the [Exposure only during DOF] setting applies.
Notes on [Exposure+DOF]
Display may flicker at some shutter speeds.
With EF lenses, this setting may increase the shutter-release time lag.
The depth of field shown is only a guideline. For more precise indication of the
depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.
[Exposure+DOF] is not available with some lenses.
[ ] blinks if either exposure or depth of field cannot be simulated, or if neither
can be simulated.
[ ] is dimmed if either exposure or depth of field simulation stops, or if both
simulations stop.
Zooming with certain lenses may change the exposure. For details, refer to the
Canon website ( ).
Depth-of-field previewing is canceled when you press the shutter button halfway.
310
Optical Viewfinder Simulation
Natural-looking viewfinder and screen display, resembling the view from an optical
viewfinder, is available in still photo shooting. Note that images displayed with this feature
set to [On] may differ from actual shooting results.
1.
Select [ : OVF sim. view assist] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Caution
Setting this feature to [On] sets [ : Display simulation] to [Disable].
Optical viewfinder simulation is used for display when this feature is set to [On] in
HDR shooting.
Optical viewfinder simulation is not used during display to external monitors,
including in display to both an external monitor and the camera screen.
Depending on setting screens, optical viewfinder simulation may not be used for
display.
Display may not resemble an optical viewfinder in some cases.
Display appearance may change during continuous shooting, with some
combinations of drive and shutter modes.
Note
Not available when the camera is set to shoot multiple exposures.
311
Blackout-Free Display
This display option makes it easier to shoot fast-moving subjects by eliminating the
momentary initial lack of viewfinder images (blackout) in continuous shooting.
1.
Select [ : Blackout-free display] ( ).
2.
Select [On].
Caution
Display may not be smooth in these cases.
•
In flash photography
•
In magnified view
•
Under low light
•
With [Multiple exposure] in [ : Multiple exposure] set to an option other
than [Disable]
The screen may flicker during aperture adjustment.
The shutter-release time lag may vary.
Has no effect when the following functions are in use.
•
Bulb timer
•
Long exposures (1 sec. or more)
• Long exposure noise reduction
•
Multiple-exposure shooting ([BUSY] appears when you shoot the last exposure
in a set)
•
Focus bracketing
Setting this feature to [On] locks [ : Display simulation] to [Exposure+DOF]
and [ : OVF sim. view assist] to [Off].
Blackout stills occur in flash photography or with [ : Anti-flicker shoot.] set to
[Enable].
312
Shooting Information Display
Customizing Information on the Screen
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
Viewfinder Vertical Display
Grid
Histogram
Electronic Level Size
Card Free Space (%) Display
Lens Information Display
Vertical Exposure Level Indicator
Clearing Settings
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the
viewfinder when you shoot.
313
Customizing Information on the Screen
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [Screen info. settings].
3.
Select screens.
Turn the < > dial to select screens of information to show on the
camera.
For information you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the
checkmark [ ].
To edit the screen, press the < > button.
314
4.
Edit the screen.
Turn the < > dial to select options to show on the screen of
information.
For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark
[ ].
Select [OK] to register the setting.
315
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [VF info/toggle settings].
3.
Select screens.
Turn the < > dial to select information screens to show in the
viewfinder.
For information you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the
checkmark [ ].
To edit the screen, press the < > button.
316
4.
Edit the screen.
Turn the < > dial to select options to show in the viewfinder.
For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark
[ ].
Select [OK] to register the setting.
317
Viewfinder Vertical Display
You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are shooting still photos
vertically.
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [VF vertical display].
On
Information is automatically rotated, making it easier to read.
Off
Information is not automatically rotated.
318
Lens Information Display
You can display information about the lens in use.
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [Lens info display].
3.
Select an option.
Focus distance disp
You can display focus distance when using RF or RF-S lenses. In
focus distance display, you can select the timing and unit of
measurement.
Focal length disp
You can display the focal length of the lens in use.
SA variable amount
You can display the amount of correction set when using lenses
featuring spherical aberration control.
* SA: spherical aberration
323
Vertical Exposure Level Indicator
You can show or hide the vertical exposure level indicator displayed on the right side of the
screen.
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [Vertical exp level].
3.
Select an option.
When set to [On], the metering value is shown in real time on the
vertical exposure level indicator in all shooting modes except [BULB].
Set to [Off] if you prefer not to display the indicator.
Note
The vertical exposure level indicator is shown while the metering timer is active.
324
Display Frame Rate
You can set the display frame rate for the shooting screen in still photo shooting. Choose
whether to conserve battery power or use a high frame rate for display.
1.
Select [ : Display frame rate set.] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
When set to [Smooth]
By pressing the < > button to add a checkmark, you can include
low-light locations in the scenarios for suppressing lower display frame
rates.
327
Caution
Shooting under low light with [Suppress lower frame rate] set for shooting screen
display may affect performance as follows.
• Faster battery consumption
• Fewer shots available
•
Lower image display brightness
• Difficulty in autofocusing
• Lower metering precision
• Lower flicker detection precision
• Lower subject detection precision
328
Auto Power Off Temperature
You can set the maximum camera body temperature at which the camera automatically
turns off. Setting this level higher than the standard temperature can extend the available
shooting time by removing some operating restrictions.
1.
Select [ : Auto pwr off temp.] ( , ).
2.
Select [High].
[High] sets the maximum temperature higher than the standard setting.
3.
Select [OK].
330
Caution
The camera and memory cards may become hotter when [ : Auto pwr off
temp.] is set to [High].
• Once the camera body becomes hot, [ ] appears on the screen as a
warning.
• We recommend using a tripod or the like to avoid handheld shooting, which
may cause problems such as low-temperature contact burns.
•
Do not touch CFexpress cards immediately after shooting. Cards may be hot,
which may cause burns. Wait until the card has cooled down before removing
it.
331
Metering Mode Selection
You can select how the camera determines subject brightness.
In [ ] mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
Setting from the Quick Control screen
1.
Press the < > button ( ).
With an image displayed on the screen, press the < > button.
2.
Select the metering mode.
To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down.
To select the metering mode, turn the < > or < > dial, or press
< > left or right.
332
Setting from the menu
1.
Select [ : Metering mode] ( ).
2.
Select the metering mode.
Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due to backlight, etc.
Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject. The spot metering area is indicated on
the screen.
333
Center-weighted average
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen weighted more
heavily.
Note
By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.
With [ ], holding down the shutter button halfway locks the exposure value (AE
lock) after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF. With [ / / ], the exposure
value is set at the moment the picture is taken (without locking the exposure value
when the shutter button is pressed halfway).
With [ : AE lock meter. mode after focus] ( ), you can set whether or not to
lock the exposure (AE lock) once subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF.
334
AE for Priority Subjects During AF
Performs metering for subjects detected based on the [ : Subject to detect] setting.
1.
Select [ : Detect priority AE while AF] ( , ).
2.
Select an option.
[Enable]: Metering is based on the AF point or AF area where the
subject was detected.
[Disable]: Metering is based on the entire screen.
Caution
In still photo shooting, [Enable] is available only with [ : Metering mode] set to
[Evaluative metering].
Has no effect during manual focusing (MF).
Note
Metering is also based on the entire screen when [ : Subject to detect] is set to
[None].
335
Manual Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure)
the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], and [M] shooting modes.
For details on exposure compensation when [M] mode and ISO Auto are both set, see
M:
Manual Exposure, and for details on [Fv] mode, see Fv: Flexible-Priority AE.
1.
Check the exposure.
Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.
2.
Set the compensation amount.
Increased exposure, to brighten images
Decreased exposure, to darken images
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
A [ ] icon is displayed to indicate exposure compensation.
3.
Take the picture.
To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level [ ] to the
standard exposure index ([ ]).
Caution
If [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the
image may still look bright even if decreased exposure compensation is set to
darken images.
336
Note
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the
power switch to < >.
337
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
Effect of AE Lock
To keep shooting at the same exposure, such as when you will set the focus and exposure
separately, you can press the < > button for AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit
subjects, etc.
1.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The exposure value will be displayed.
2.
Press the < > button ( ).
A [ ] icon is displayed in the lower left of the screen to indicate that
exposure is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the < > button, the current exposure setting is
locked.
338
3.
Recompose and take the picture.
When you are to take more pictures while maintaining the AE lock,
keep holding down the < > button and press the shutter button to
take another picture.
Note
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
Effect of AE Lock
Metering Mode
Selection
AF Point Selection
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
Exposure centered on the AF point in
focus is locked.
Exposure centered on the selected AF
point is locked.
Center-weighted exposure is locked.
* When [ ] is set with the lens's focus mode switch set to < >, center-weighted exposure is
locked.
339
General Still Photo Shooting
Information Display
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see Information Display.
Note
White display of the [ ] icon indicates that your shots will be about as bright
as the image displayed.
If the [ ] icon is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a
brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light
conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.
Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
Display simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings. The
[ ] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed
on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
No histogram is displayed when [ : Display simulation] ( ) is set to [Disable]
or [Exposure only during
DOF].
340
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Image quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may
become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.
Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause high internal temperatures
and affect image quality. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera's internal temperature is high, image
quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again.
White [
] internal temperature warning icon
A white [ ] icon indicates high internal camera temperature, caused by factors
such as extended shooting or use in hot environments.
The white [ ] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline. Stop
shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
Shooting at low ISO speeds instead of high speeds is recommended when the
white [ ] icon is displayed.
Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [ ] or
red [ ] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off the
camera.
If the camera's internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a high
ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [ ] icon is
displayed.
Camera overheating indicator
A temperature indicator [ ] is displayed when the camera begins to become
hot.
For details on how indicator display corresponds to camera operation, see Warning
Indicator Display During Shooting or Recording.
Shooting results
In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in orange.
If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as
desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with the
image area of the normal view.
341
Images and display
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the
brightness of the captured image.
Although noise may be noticeable in images under low light (even at low ISO
speeds), there will be less noise in your shots, due to differences in image quality
between displayed and captured images.
The screen may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes. In this case, stop
shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you will use.
Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct display
of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show the bright
area.
Under low light, bright [ : Screen brightness] settings may cause noise or
irregular colors in images. However, the noise or irregular colors will not be
recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual setting.
Lens
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to < >, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press
the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may
decrease the number of available shots depending on the shooting conditions.
When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to < >.
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using (super)
telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of
2011.
Note
The field of view is approx. 100% (with image quality set to JPEG ).
If the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn off automatically
after the time set in [Screen off] or [Viewfinder off] under [
: Power saving]. The
camera then turns off automatically after the time set in [Auto power off] ( ).
Using a commercially available HDMI cable, you can display images on a television
( ). Note that no sound will be output.
342
Movie Recording
To prepare for movie recording, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
<
>, then press the < > button and choose a recording mode.
to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode.
Caution
When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera
settings again before recording movies.
Note
You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo
shooting. It may take a moment before recording begins.
Sizes of movies recorded in [ ] mode correspond to [ ] recording sizes.
Sizes of movies recorded in modes other than [
] correspond to [ ] recording
sizes.
•
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
• Movie Recording
• Movie Recording Size
•
High Frame Rate
• Main Recording Format
• Movie Cropping
•
Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies)
343
• Sound Recording
• Audio Format
• Audio Settings
•
Audio Status
• Custom Pictures
• HDR Movie Mode
• Time-Lapse Movies
• Movie Self-Timer
• Tally Lamp
• Pre-Recording Setting
• Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
• Movie Auto Level
• False Color Settings
•
Zebra Settings
•
Shooting Information Display
•
Quick Control Screen
•
Standby: Low Resolution
•
Canon Log HDMI Output Range
•
Metadata
•
Time Code
•
Other Menu Functions
•
General Movie Recording Precautions
344
Exposure
(1) Exposure comp.
(2) ISO speed settings
(3) HF anti-flicker shooting
(4) Av 1/8-stop incr.
(5) Auto slow shutter
(6) Detect priority AE while AF
Color/tone/Dynamic range
(1) Custom Picture
(2) Picture Style
• Picture Style Selection
•
Picture Style Customization
• Picture Style Registration
(3) Clarity
(4) HDR shooting (PQ)
(5) HDR Movie Mode
(6) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(7) Highlight tone priority
346
Movie Recording
/ Autoexposure Recording
Shutter-Priority AE
Aperture-Priority AE
Scene Icons
ISO Speed in [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] Mode
Manual Exposure Recording
ISO Speed in [ ] Mode
Shutter Speed
Still Photo Shooting
Information Display (Movie Recording)
/ Autoexposure Recording
Exposure is controlled automatically to suit the brightness.
1.
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ]
or [ ].
350
2.
Focus on the subject.
Before recording a movie, focus with AF ( ) or manual focus ( ).
The camera focuses continuously under default settings, with [Movie
Servo AF] in [
: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable] ( ).
By default, pressing the < > button focuses using your
specified AF area.
By default, pressing the shutter button halfway starts metering.
351
3.
Record the movie.
Press the movie shooting button to start recording a movie. You can
also start recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen.
While the movie is being recorded, [ REC] (1) is displayed, the
screen is outlined in red, and the tally lamp is lit.
Sound is recorded by the microphone (2).
To stop recording the movie, press the movie shooting button again.
You can also stop recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen.
352
Shutter-Priority AE
[ ] recording mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies. ISO
speed and aperture values are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard
exposure.
1.
Set the recording mode to [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[ ].
2.
Set the shutter speed (1).
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate ( ).
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for / Autoexposure Recording.
353
Caution
Avoid adjusting shutter speed while recording movies, which will record changes in
exposure.
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the
subject's movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting,
image flicker may be recorded.
354
Aperture-Priority AE
[ ] recording mode enables you to set your preferred aperture value for movies. ISO
speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard
exposure.
1.
Set the recording mode to [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Set the aperture value (1).
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for / Autoexposure Recording.
355
Caution
Avoid adjusting the aperture value while recording movies, which will record
changes in exposure caused by aperture adjustment.
Note
Notes for [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the < > button (except in [ ]
mode). After applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by
pressing the < > button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the < >
button.)
Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops by turning the
< > dial (except in [ ] mode).
In [ ] and [ ] mode, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not
recorded in movie Exif information.
The camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED light
automatically under low light when recording movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]
modes. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the EX series Speedlite
equipped with an LED light.
356
Manual Exposure Recording
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording.
1.
Set the recording mode to [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
359
2.
Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.
Turn the < > dial to set the shutter speed (1), the < > dial to set
the aperture value (2), and the <
> dial to set the ISO speed (3).
Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate ( ).
360
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for / Autoexposure Recording.
Caution
ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50) in movie recording.
During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO
speed, which may record changes in the exposure or create more noise at high
ISO speeds.
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the
subject's movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting,
image flicker may be recorded.
Note
Exposure compensation with ISO Auto can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed. After
locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the
<
> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the < > button.)
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator ( ) compared to when the < >
button was pressed.
361
Shutter Speed
Available shutter speeds in [ ] and [ ] mode vary depending on the frame rate of your
specified movie recording quality.
Frame Rate
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Normal Movie Recording High Frame Rate Movie Recording
–
1/250–1/8000
1/200–1/8000
1/125–1/8000
1/100–1/8000
1/8–1/8000 –
363
Still Photo Shooting
If you will shoot still photos while recording movies, set up [ : Dual shooting
(still&movie)]. After this, shoot still photos as you would normally do.
364
Information Display (Movie Recording)
For details on the icons on the movie recording screen, see Information Display.
Caution
The remaining time displayed for movie recording is only a guideline.
Movie recording may stop before the initially displayed recording time elapses if the
red [ ] icon appears due to high internal camera temperature during
recording (
).
365
Movie Recording Size
8K/4K Movie Recording
Image Area
Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
Compression Method
Cards That Can Record Movies
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
You can set the resolution, frame rate, and compression method in [ : Movie rec. size].
Note that the frame rate is updated automatically to match the [ : System frequency]
setting ( ).
1.
Select [ : Movie rec. size] ( ).
2.
Set the item.
Turn the < > dial to select a tab (1).
Press < > vertically or horizontally to change the setting (2).
When finished, press < >.
366
Available resolutions
Resolution Image Size Aspect Ratio Restrictions
8192×4320 Approx. 17:9
• Available when [ : Main rec. format] is set to
[XF-HEVC S].
• 8K recording is not available when [ : High Frame
Rate] or [ : Movie cropping] is set to [Enable], or
with RF-S or EF-S lenses.
7680×4320 16:9
/
4096×2160 Approx. 17:9
• Fine options are less compressed than standard
options.
• Fine recording is not available when [ : High Frame
Rate] or [
: Movie cropping] is set to [Enable], or
with RF-S or EF-S lenses.
/
3840×2160 16:9
/
2048×1080 Approx. 17:9
/
1920×1080 16:9
367
With [ : Main rec. format] set to [RAW] ( )
You can set the resolution, frame rate, and type of RAW for RAW movie output.
The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.
System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate Type of RAW
59.94Hz: NTSC
8192×4320
50.00 Hz: PAL
59.94Hz: NTSC
4096×2160
50.00 Hz: PAL
Caution
If you change the [ : System frequency] setting, also set [ : Movie rec. size]
again.
Other devices may not play movies such as 8K/4K, / , or High Frame
Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
Apparent resolution and noise vary slightly depending on the movie recording size,
cropped recording setting, and lens used.
Note
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
Movies cannot be recorded in HD or VGA quality.
368
With [ : HDMI RAW output] set to [On] ( )
You can set the resolution, frame rate, and type of RAW for HDMI RAW movie output.
The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.
System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate Type of RAW
59.94Hz: NTSC
8192×4320
50.00 Hz: PAL
59.94Hz: NTSC
4096×2160
50.00 Hz: PAL
You can set the compression method of movies recorded to card at the same time.
The movie recording format is [XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit], and the frame rate
corresponds to the frame rate setting for HDMI RAW movie output.
The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.
System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate
Compression
Method
59.94Hz: NTSC
2048×1080
50.00 Hz: PAL
Caution
If you change the [ : System frequency] setting, also set [ : Movie rec. size]
again.
Other devices may not play movies such as 8K/4K/2K, / , or High
Frame Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
Apparent resolution and noise vary slightly depending on the movie recording size,
cropped recording setting, and lens used.
369
Note
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
Movies cannot be recorded in HD or VGA quality.
8K/4K Movie Recording
Recording 8K or 4K movies requires a stable card with a fast writing speed. For details,
see
Cards That Can Record Movies.
8K/4K movie recording greatly increases the processing load, which may increase the
internal camera temperature faster or higher than for regular movies. Display of [ ],
white [ ], or red [ ] icons during movie recording warns that cards
may be hot, so if you need to remove them, stop recording for a while before
removal, and do not remove them immediately.
From a 8K or 4K movie, you can select any frame to save to the card as a JPEG still
image ( ).
HDMI video output of 8K movies results in 4K movies.
370
Image Area
The movie image area varies depending on factors such as movie recording quality and
cropped shooting settings and the lens used.
RF or EF lenses: With [ : Movie cropping] set to [Disable]
(1) (8K RAW) (8192×4320) / (4K RAW) (4096×2160) /
(2048×1080)
(2) (7680×4320) / (3840×2160) / (1920×1080)
RF or EF lenses: With [ : Movie cropping] set to [Enable]
RF-S or EF-S lenses
(3) (4096×2160) / (2048×1080)
(4) (3840×2160) / (1920×1080)
Caution
Recording with Movie digital IS ( ) further crops the image around the center of
the screen.
371
Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
: 239.76 fps / : 119.88 fps / : 59.94 fps / : 29.97 fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico,
etc.).
: 200.00 fps / : 100.00 fps / : 50.00 fps / : 25.00 fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
: 24.00 fps / : 23.98 fps
Mainly for cinematic purposes. (23.98 fps) is available when [
: System frequency] is
set to [59.94Hz:NTSC].
372
Compression Method
: High (Intra-frame)
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although file sizes are larger than
with Long GOP, movies are more suitable for editing. Available when [ : Main rec.
format] is set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit].
: Standard (Intra-frame)
Because file sizes are smaller than with [ ], movie recording over longer periods is
possible with a card of the same capacity. Available when the resolution is set to /
or when [ : Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit].
: Light (Intra-frame)
Enables smaller file sizes than with [ ] because movies are recorded at lower bit
rates, and these movies can be played on more devices. This offers a longer available
recording time than [
] with a card of the same capacity. Available when the
resolution is set to / or when [ : Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422
10bit].
: Standard (Long GOP) / : Light (Long GOP)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Because file sizes are
smaller than with intra-frame, movie recording over longer periods is possible with a
card of the same capacity.
373
Cards That Can Record Movies
For details on cards that can record movies, see Cards That Can Record Movies.
See Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size, and card performance requirements
for details on SD cards.
Test cards by recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specified size ( ).
Caution
Before recording 8K or 4K movies, format cards by selecting [Low level format] in
[ : Format card] ( ).
If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
When movies cannot be recorded properly, format the card and try again. If
formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card manufacturer's
website, etc.
Recording to SD cards may not be possible, depending on the movie recording
size. Pressing the movie shooting button will not start recording. For details, see
Specifications.
Note
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
To check the card's writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website,
etc.
374
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Individual movie files exceeding 4 GB cannot be recorded to SD cards.
With SDHC cards, once the movie file size reaches 4 GB, a new movie file is created
automatically. During playback, these files are automatically played consecutively.
With CFexpress or SDXC cards, individual movies are recorded as a single file, even if
they exceed 4 GB.
Caution
When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS Utility
or a card reader (
). It may not be possible to save movie files exceeding 4 GB if
you attempt this using standard features of the computer's operating system.
Multiple files are displayed for any single movie file exceeding 4 GB that you
transfer from an SDHC card to a computer. Deleting the first file will prevent
playback of the remaining movie files.
When connecting to a computer with an interface cable, do not use the computer to
delete movie files on the camera. Movie files may not be recognized correctly.
375
High Frame Rate
When set to [Enable], the camera can capture 239.76/200.00 fps or 119.88/100.00 fps to
record movie files with a frame rate of 29.97/25.00 fps.
The maximum recording time per movie is 89 min. 29 sec.
Sound is not recorded. Note that playback is in slow motion.
/ is available at resolutions of / .
The compression method is .
Count-up of time code display during movie recording is based on 29.97/25.00 fps.
Caution
Time codes are not recorded when [Count up] is set to [Free run] in [ : Time
code] ( ).
Check the [ : Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
The screen may flicker if you record High Frame Rate movies under fluorescent or
LED lighting.
For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the
movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies do
not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
Headphones cannot be used (no sound is audible).
The frame rate of HDMI video output is 59.94 fps or 50.00 fps.
The camera's internal temperature may rise and less recording time may be
available after extended movie playback or image display.
Movie digital IS may not provide sufficient stabilization when a macro lens is used
to shoot subjects near the closest focusing distance.
377
XF-HEVC S and XF-AVC S Movies
XF-HEVC S and XF-AVC S movies are in original Canon video formats that are extensions
of H.265/HEVC and MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, respectively. These formats maintain image
quality while offering high data compression.
Main
Recording
Format
Codec
Brightness,
Hue,
Saturation
(YCbCr)/Color
Depth
Description Restrictions
XF-HEVC S
YCC422 10bit
H.265/
HEVC
4:2:2/10-bit
XF-HEVC S can be used to
record 10-bit YCC 4:2:2
signals.
It is assumed that this material
will be edited on a computer.
May not be played
back correctly by
some software.
XF-HEVC S
YCC420 10bit
H.265/
HEVC
4:2:0/10-bit
XF-HEVC S can be used to
record 10-bit YCC 4:2:0
signals.
–
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
MPEG-4
AVC/H.264
4:2:0/8-bit
XF-AVC S can be used to
record 8-bit YCC 4:2:0 signals.
A recording format with wide
playback compatibility in
software.
Not available with
[ : HDR
shooting (PQ)] set
to [HDR PQ].
XF-AVC S
YCC422 10bit
MPEG-4
AVC/H.264
4:2:2/10-bit
XF-AVC S can be used to
record 10-bit YCC 4:2:2
signals.
It is assumed that this material
will be edited on a computer.
May not be played
back correctly by
some software.
Note
Consider selecting a 10-bit recording format for custom picture files with a color
space set to [C.Gamut] or [BT.2020] ( ).
379
RAW Movies
RAW movies consist of raw data from the image sensor in a digital form.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to view and process RAW movies.
For details, refer to the Digital Photo Professional instruction manual.
Caution
RAW movies cannot be processed with [ : RAW image processing].
[RAW] is not available in these cases.
•
[ Digital IS] in [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to an option other
than [Off]
•
[ : Movie cropping] is set to [Enable]
•
[ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] is set to [On]
•
The camera is connected by USB after you have selected [Video calls/
streaming] in [ : Choose USB connection app]
•
With RF-S or EF-S lenses attached
RAW movie playback may cause the camera to become hot internally, which may
cause movie playback to stop automatically.
Consider using two cards when you record RAW movies, so that you can also
record a proxy movie and use it for playback.
Set [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] to [ Main Proxy]
and [
Play] to [ ].
Note
To display RAW movies on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, hereafter DPP) is recommended.
RAW images from this camera cannot be used with older versions of DPP.
Download the latest version of DPP from the Canon website and install it, which will
overwrite the previous version ( ).
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW movies recorded
by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.
To prioritize gradation in highlights, consider setting [ function] in [ : Custom
Picture] to [On].
380
Recording Proxy Movies
To record one version of movies to card in the main recording format while recording
another version to card
in a lighter format, set [ Rec options] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.] to [ Main Proxy]. This is referred to as “proxy movie recording.”
[
: Main rec. format] settings apply to card , where main movies are recorded. For the
recording settings used to record proxy movies to card , the following items are set
automatically based on card settings.
Recording Format
Resolution
Frame Rate
Main movie settings correspond to the following, automatically configured proxy movie
settings.
Main Movie Settings Proxy Movie Settings (Set Automatically)
Recording Format Image Size Recording Format Image Size
XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit
4096×2160
2048×1080
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit
2048×1080
3840×2160
1920×1080
1920×1080
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit
XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit
4096×2160
2048×1080
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit
2048×1080
3840×2160
1920×1080
1920×1080
RAW
8192×4320
4096×2160
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit 2048×1080
*Proxy movie frame rates match main movie frame rates.
*Frame rates cannot be set higher than 100 fps.
*Among proxy movie compression methods, only for bit rate, you can choose a [Compression] option
([
: Standard (Long GOP) 16 Mbps] or [ : Light (Long GOP) 9 Mbps]) for [ ] below [ :
Movie rec. size].
Caution
Recording proxy movies takes as much time as recording main movies. When
recording stops for a main movie, recording also stops for the proxy movie.
However, main movie recording continues even if errors stop proxy movie
recording.
Icons on the movie recording screen indicate whether recording is possible for
main and proxy movies.
Main movie:
(recording possible), (recording not possible)
Proxy movie: (recording possible), (recording not possible)
Gradation of the sky, white walls, or similar image areas may not be reproduced
smoothly in proxy movies under some shooting conditions.
381
Note
On the movie recording screen, the amount of time remaining for movie recording
refers to the time for main movies. If card (for main movies) is not in the camera,
the amount of time remaining for movie recording refers to the time for card
(proxy movies).
382
Movie Cropping
With RF or EF lenses, you can record movies cropped around the center of the image area,
as if captured with a telephoto lens.
Recording movies with RF-S/EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie cropping
feature.
1.
Select [ : Movie cropping] ( ).
2.
Select [Enable].
Caution
The center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the recording area, when [
Digital IS] in [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to [On] or [Enhanced].
Note
The recording area available with movie cropping is the same as when recording
movies with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
For details on the recording area, see Image Area.
383
Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies)
Without interrupting movie recording, you can shoot still photos (single shooting or
continuous shooting) by pressing the shutter button completely. This enables still photo
shooting with higher image quality than extracting frames from movies.
Caution
When using this feature, make sure two cards are in the camera before turning it
on. Having only one card in the camera when you turn it on will prevent both movie
recording and still photo shooting.
To record movies with only one card inserted, switch to still photo shooting mode
and press the movie shooting button. [ ] settings are applied in movie recording.
Note
Movies are recorded in Full HD image quality (1920×1080). Still photos are
captured as JPEGs with an aspect ratio of 16:9 (7680×4320).
Movies are recorded to card and still photos to card .
1.
Select [ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] ( ).
2.
Select [Dual shooting (still&movie)].
384
3.
Select [On].
4.
Set other options as needed.
Drive mode
Specify the amount of still photo shooting performed by pressing the
shutter button completely. Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
High speed
•
With [ : System frequency] set to [59.94Hz:NTSC]: Continuous
shooting at up to approx. 7.5 shots/sec. while pressed
• With [ : System frequency] set to [50.00Hz:PAL]: Continuous
shooting at up to approx. 6.2 shots/sec. while pressed
Low speed
• With [ : System frequency] set to [59.94Hz:NTSC]: Continuous
shooting at up to approx. 5 shots/sec. while pressed
• With [ : System frequency] set to [50.00Hz:PAL]: Continuous
shooting at up to approx. 4.1 shots/sec. while pressed
Single shooting
Single-image shooting
385
JPEG quality
Set the level of image quality (1–10) in still photo shooting. Turn the
<
> dial to make a selection.
Higher numbers offer higher quality (lower compression).
Caution
Still photos cannot be captured during movie recording when RF-S or EF-S lenses
are attached.
Faces in still photos may appear dark, or colors may look different from those in
normal still photo shooting, because settings for movie recording are used for
autofocus, exposure, and white balance.
The shutter-release time lag for single shooting of still photos may be longer under
the following shooting conditions. Continuous shooting is also slower.
•
Shooting under low light with [ : Auto slow shutter] set to [Enable]
•
Using a slow shutter speed in [Tv] or [M] mode
•
Setting [ : Standby: Low res.] to [On] and only shooting still photos
Still photos cannot be transferred during movie recording.
Some features are not available with [ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] set to
[On]. Some limitations also apply to movie recording sizes and anti-flicker shooting.
Magnification from the point in focus is not available for still photos captured with
this feature. Similarly, in-camera resizing, cropping, and upscaling are not
available.
Note
You can extend the time available for movie recording by setting [ : Standby:
Low res.] to [On].
As the Picture Style for still photos, the setting of [ : Picture Style] during movie
recording is applied.
386
Sound Recording
Select [On] for sound recording during movie recording. The built-in microphone is used
unless an external microphone is connected.
1.
Select [ : Sound recording] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Set the recording level and other settings as needed in [ : Audio
settings] ( ).
[ : Audio settings] is not available in [ ] mode. Here, the sound-
recording level is adjusted automatically.
Caution
Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external
microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function
is not recommended.
Make sure any output plugs of external microphones or any headphone jacks are
fully inserted in the camera.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens
or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera
or lens is operated during movie recording. If so, it may help reduce these sounds if
you use an external microphone equipped with an output plug and position it away
from the camera and lens.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera's
external microphone IN terminal.
Sound that is recorded using four-channel recording may not be played correctly by
some software.
387
Note
Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI, except
when set to [Disable]. In case of feedback from television audio output, move the
camera away from the television or turn down the volume.
The volume balance between L/R (left/right) cannot be adjusted.
Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz sampling rate.
388
Four-channel recording
The camera supports four-channel sound recording.
Four-channel recording can include combinations of the following sources.
Microphone designed for a multi-function shoe (2 channels) + external microphone (2
channels)
Microphone designed for a multi-function shoe (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2
channels)
External microphone (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2 channels)
Built-in microphone (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2 channels)
When multiple microphones are connected, the one with higher priority is assigned to
channels 1 and 2, and the lower-priority one is assigned to channels 3 and 4. Microphones
have the following priority, from highest to lowest.
Microphones designed for a multi-function shoe
External microphones
Built-in microphone
Caution
Four-channel sound recording (with multiple microphones) is available with [ :
Audio format] set to [LPCM/24bit/4CH]. Setting [ : Audio format] to [AAC/
16bit/2CH] restricts sound recording to two channels (with a single microphone).
Movie files recorded with [LPCM/24bit/4CH] selected may not be played correctly
by some software.
Note
To check which microphone input is currently enabled, access [ : Audio Status]
( ).
389
Audio Format
You can choose the audio format used for sound in movie recording.
1.
Select [ : Audio format] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
When set to [ Main Proxy]
When [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to
[
Main Proxy], select the audio format for each card.
Caution
The audio format of HDMI output when [HDMI RAW output] is set to [On] is locked
to [LPCM/16bit/2CH].
The setting on card cannot be changed when card is set to [AAC/16bit/2CH].
Selecting [LPCM/24bit/4CH] enables four-channel sound recording (with multiple
microphones). Selecting [AAC/16bit/2CH] restricts recording to two channels (with
a single microphone).
Sound that is recorded using four-channel recording may not be played correctly by
some software.
390
Audio Settings
Recording Mode
Recording Level
Wind Filter
Attenuator
Microphone Directionality
Configure microphones for sound recording in these settings. When using microphones that
are external or designed for a multi-function shoe, also refer to the microphone instruction
manual.
1.
Select [ : Audio settings] ( ).
2.
Select the device to use.
Built-in microphone
For configuring settings for the built-in microphone.
External microphone
For configuring settings for external microphones that use the external
microphone IN terminal.
Hot shoe input
For configuring settings for microphones designed for a multi-function
shoe.
391
3.
Set the item.
When set to [Built-in microphone]
When set to [External microphone]
When set to [Hot shoe input]
Available setting items vary depending on the microphone used.
392
Recording Mode
Auto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will take effect
automatically in response to the sound level.
Manual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Adjust the level in [Rec. level].
Caution
Do not change the [Recording mode] settings when listening with headphones.
This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your ears.
Note
Recording levels are shown in the level meter at the bottom of the screen.
393
Recording Level
Available when [Recording mode] is set to [Manual].
To adjust the sound-recording level, turn the < > dial while watching the level meter. Look
at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the right
of the “12” (–12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be
distorted.
394
Wind Filter
Available when using the built-in microphone or multi-function shoe microphones that are
compatible with wind filters.
Set to [Enable] to reduce wind noise when there is wind outdoors. When the wind filter
function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.
395
Attenuator
As a function that suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises during recording, the
attenuator can be enabled or disabled when using microphones designed for a multi-
function shoe. For details, refer to the microphone instruction manual.
396
Microphone Directionality
Available when using multi-function shoe microphones for which directivity can be switched.
For details, refer to the microphone instruction manual.
397
Custom Pictures
Selecting Custom Picture Files
Editing Custom Pictures
Custom Picture Setting Items
Checking Custom Picture Settings
Saving and Loading Custom Picture Files
Using Look Files
Canon Log Image Quality
Custom picture files on the camera enable you to adjust color tones in movie recording by
applying a combination of settings (gamma/color space, color matrix, and look files), mainly
in preparation for post-production processing.
You can select a custom picture file to record movies with your preferred image
characteristics.
Preset custom picture files can be edited to create new ones.
To adjust movie color tones, you can register look files.
Caution
Applying custom pictures may change the metering level.
399
5.
Select a custom picture file.
Custom
Picture File
Gamma/Color
Space
Look
File
Color
Matrix
Summary
C1: Canon
709
Canon 709 /
BT.709
Off Neutral
Wider dynamic range than BT.709
Standard
Suitable for display on BT.709
compliant-monitors
Also suitable without post-
processing
C2: Canon
Log 2
Canon Log 2 /
C.Gamut
Off Neutral
Uses Canon Log 2 gamma; post-
processing required
Superior tonality in dark image
areas than Canon Log 3
C3: Canon
Log 3
Canon Log 3 /
C.Gamut
Off Neutral
Uses Canon Log 3 gamma; post-
processing required
Retains Canon Log characteristics
while expanding the dynamic range
C4: PQ PQ / BT.2020 Off Neutral
Uses an HDR gamma curve
compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100
(PQ) standard (in 8-bit recording,
equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100
(PQ) standard)
C5: HLG HLG / BT.2020 Off Neutral
Uses an HDR gamma curve
compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100
(HLG) standard (in 8-bit recording,
equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100
(HLG) standard)
C6: BT.709
Standard
BT.709
Standard /
BT.709
Off Video
Suitable for display on BT.709
compliant-monitors
Uses a gamma curve compliant with
the ITU-R BT.709 standard
C7 to C20
(User07 to
User20)
Canon 709 /
BT.709
Off Neutral
Wider dynamic range than BT.709
Standard
Suitable for display on BT.709
compliant-monitors
Also suitable without post-
processing
401
Editing Custom Pictures
You can edit settings of the selected custom picture file.
1.
Select [Edit File].
To edit a protected ([ ]) custom picture file, select [Unprotect] by
[Protect] to enable editing.
2.
Edit the settings as needed.
Select a setting to edit, then adjust it on the screen displayed ( ).
To save an edited custom picture file with a new name, select
[Rename] and enter a name.
To reset editing, select [Reset], then select the custom picture file to
reset.
For instructions on look files, see Using Look Files.
402
3.
Protect the image.
When you are finished editing, select [Protect].
403
Custom Picture Setting Items
The following items can be set by using [Edit File].
Setting Item Description
Gamma/Color Space
Set the combination of gamma curve and color space
Gamma
(1) Output
(2) Input
Canon Log 2
Gamma with richer gradation in dark image areas
than Canon Log 3
Requires image processing in post-production
Canon Log 3
Gamma that retains Canon Log characteristics but
with expanded dynamic range
Requires image processing in post-production
PQ
HDR gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100
(PQ) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to the
ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ) standard)
HLG
HDR gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100
(HLG) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to
the ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG) standard)
BT.709 Standard
Gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.709 standard
Suitable for display on BT.709 compliant-monitors
Canon 709
Gamma with a wide dynamic range that is also
suitable without post-processing
Suitable for viewing on BT.709 compliant-monitors
Color space
C.Gamut
Color space developed by Canon based on image
sensor characteristics, covering a wider color
gamut than that of BT.2020
Also recommended when converting to the
ACES2065-1 color space
BT.2020
Color space compliant with the ITU-R BT.2020
standard for UHDTV (4K/8K)
BT.709
Standard color space compliant with sRGB
standards
404
Color Matrix
Color reproduction setting
Neutral Faithful color reproduction
Production Camera Cinematic color reproduction
Video Color reproduction with a contrast for broadcast TV
Look File
Use of look files
On Enables color adjustment based on look files
Off Disables color adjustment based on look files
Look File Setup
Look file registration/removal
Register
Registers look files (.cube format) to custom
pictures
Delete Removes look files registered to custom pictures
HLG Color
Hybrid log-gamma (HLG) color setting
Available when the [Gamma/Color Space] gamma is set to [HLG] and color space is [BT.2020]
BT.2100 Color equivalent to ITU-R BT.2100
Vivid
Color equivalent to “traditional color” in ITU-R
BT.2390
Black
Black level adjustment
Not available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [Canon Log 2] or [Canon Log 3]
Master
Pedestal
–50 to +50
Increases or decreases the black level. Higher
values brighten dark image areas but decrease
contrast. Negative values darken blacks.
Master
Black Red
Master
Black
Green
Master
Black Blue
–50 to +50 Corrects red, green, or blue color cast in blacks
405
Black Gamma
Lower gamma curve correction, for dark image areas
Raises or lowers the black part of the gamma curve in the following ranges
Available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
(1) Output
(2) Input
(3) Point
(4) Level
(5) Range
Level –50 to +50 Sets the height of the lower gamma curve
Range
–20 to +50
Sets the adjustment range, relative to [Point]
Point Sets the vertex position
Low Key Saturation
Color saturation adjustment in dark image areas
Activate On, Off Adjustment is enabled when set to [On]
Level –50 to +50 Sets the amount of adjustment
406
Knee
Compression of bright image areas to prevent clipped highlights
Available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
(1) Output
(2) Input
Slope
Point
Activate On, Off
Adjustment with each setting is enabled when set
to [On]
Slope –35 to +50 Adjusts the slope above the knee point
Point 50 to 109 Adjusts the knee point
Saturation –10 to +10 Adjusts color saturation in bright image areas
407
Sharpness
Sharpness adjustment
Level –10 to +50
Increases or decreases the level of edge
sharpness
Detail
Frequency
–8 to +8
Sets the center frequency for edge enhancement
Higher values increase the frequency, sharpening
images
Coring
Level
–30 to +50
Sets the contrast threshold between edges and
surrounding image areas, which determines edge
enhancement
Higher values prevent emphasizing subtle details,
reducing noise
Limit –50 to +50 Restricts the amount of edge enhancement
Noise Reduction
Reduction of image noise
Automatic On, Off Automatically adjusted when set to [On]
Spatial
Filter
Off, 1 to 12
Reduces noise by applying a soft focus-like effect
to the entire image
Although no artifacts are produced, the image as a
whole is softened when set to an option other than
[Off]
Frame
Correlation
Off, 1 to 3
Reduces noise by comparing current and previous
images (fields) when set to a value other than off
Although apparent resolution is not affected,
moving subjects may result in artifacts
Skin Detail
Skin-softening settings
Controls skin tone detection and noise reduction
Detected skin tone areas are displayed with a zebra pattern
Effect Level Off, Low, Middle, High
Sets the level of the skin-softening filter, with
[High] as the highest level
Hue –16 to +16 Sets the hue of skin tone to detect
Chroma
0 to 31
Sets the saturation of skin tone to detect
Area Sets the color range of skin tone to detect
Y Level Sets the brightness of skin tone to detect
Color Matrix Tuning
Fine-tuning of image color tones
Gain –50 to +50 Adjusts color intensity
Phase –18 to +18 Adjusts hue
R-G
–50 to +50
Adjusts tint between cyan to green and between
red to magenta
R-B
Adjusts tint between cyan to blue and between red
to yellow
G-R
Adjusts tint between magenta to red and between
green to cyan
G-B
Adjusts tint between magenta to blue and between
green to yellow
B-R
Adjusts tint between yellow to red and between
blue to cyan
B-G
Adjusts tint between yellow to green and between
blue to magenta
408
Color Correction
Settings to correct image areas with certain color characteristics
Areas for correction are detected accordingly
With the settings configured, areas not detected are displayed in neutral colors (except when adjusting
[Area A Revision Level], [Area B Revision Level], [Area A Revision Phase], and [Area B Revision Phase])
Select Area Off, Area A, Area B, Area A&B
Specifies areas (A or B) for color correction
Area A is corrected when set to [Area A]
Area B is corrected when set to [Area B]
Both areas are corrected when set to [Area A&B]
Area A
Setting
Phase
0 to 31
Sets the color phase of Area A
Area B
Setting
Phase
Sets the color phase of Area B
Area A
Setting
Chroma
Sets the saturation of Area A
Area B
Setting
Chroma
Sets the saturation of Area B
Area A
Setting
Area
Sets the color range of Area A
Area B
Setting
Area
Sets the color range of Area B
Area A
Setting Y
Level
Sets the brightness of Area A
Area B
Setting Y
Level
Sets the brightness of Area B
Area A
Revision
Level
–50 to +50
Sets the amount of correction applied to saturation
in Area A
Area B
Revision
Level
Sets the amount of correction applied to saturation
in Area B
Area A
Revision
Phase
–18 to +18
Sets the amount of correction applied to the color
phase of Area A
Area B
Revision
Phase
Sets the amount of correction applied to the color
phase of Area B
Other Functions
[Over 100%] determines how the camera handles signals exceeding 100%
Available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
Over 100%
Through Unmodified output
Press
Compresses signals that are up to 108% so that
they are at 100% levels
Clip Discards portions of signals exceeding 100%
409
Saving and Loading Custom Picture Files
Edited custom picture files can be saved to a card and used with other cameras of the same
model.
1.
Select a custom picture file to save ( ).
2.
On the [Custom Picture] screen, select [Save File].
3.
Select an option.
Save to card
Saves the edited custom picture file. Select a destination, then select
[OK].
Up to 20 files can be saved. [New File] is displayed when you save the
file, unless more than 20 files have already been saved. If 20 files have
been saved, the files are overwritten with new files you save.
Load from card
Loads a custom picture file from a card. Select the file to load, then
select [OK].
411
Using Look Files
You can register 17- or 33-grid 3D LUT files in .cube format from the Blackmagic Design
application DaVinci Resolve as look files in custom picture files to adjust the color tone of
movies you record.
Registering look files
Before you begin, the look file to register should be copied to a card.
1.
Load the card in the camera.
2.
Select a custom picture file ( ).
3.
Select [Edit File].
To edit a protected ([ ]) custom picture file, select [Unprotect] by
[Protect] to enable editing.
If you will edit a custom picture file and register a look file at the same
time, do the look file registration last.
4.
Select [Look File Setup].
412
5.
Select [Register].
Look files on the card are listed.
6.
Select a look file.
7.
After applying the look file, select the gamma/color space.
8.
Select [OK].
Caution
The following look files are not compatible.
•
Input range outside a range of 0–1 in the header (“LUT_3D_INPUT_RANGE”)
•
2 MB or larger, or with names exceeding 65 characters (including file
extension)
•
With file names that include unsupported characters
Supported characters: 0–9, a–z, A–Z, underscore (_), hyphen (-), period (.), or
single-byte space
Data section includes values outside a range of 0–1
Color tones will not be converted correctly unless a suitable gamma/color space is
used for input and output.
A registered look file cannot be used if you change [Gamma/Color Space], [HLG
Color], or [Over 100%] settings after registration.
Signals above 100% or below 0% are not be used with [Gamma/Color Space] set
to [BT.709 Standard]. Before registering look files for any signals above 100% that
you will use, select [Press] in [Over 100%].
Registered look files are applied to RAW movie thumbnails but not applied during
playback.
413
Using look files for color adjustment
You can use registered look files for color adjustment.
1.
On the [Edit File] screen, select [Look File].
2.
Select [On].
To disable color adjustment based on look files, select [Off].
Removing look files
1.
Select a custom picture file ( ).
2.
Select [Edit File].
3.
Select [Look File Setup].
4.
Select [Delete].
414
5.
Select [OK].
415
Canon Log Image Quality
With Canon Log, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected by noise or
uneven gradation, exposure, or colors, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
Banding or noise may also be noticeable in dark image areas.
Noise may become more noticeable if you enhance the contrast or edit images in similar
ways.
Record a few test movies and check the results in advance.
Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or, in post-production, perform
color grading.
Caution
With Canon Log, autofocusing may be more difficult for subjects under low light, or
for low-contrast subjects.
Difficulty in autofocusing can be reduced by shooting near maximum aperture or
using a bright lens.
Noise may appear at image edges if [Peripheral illum corr] in [ : Lens
aberration correction] is set to [Enable] when Canon Log is set.
Histograms with [ : HDR/C.Log View Assist.] set to [On] are not
based on conversion for View Assist display. Image areas shown in gray in the
histogram roughly indicate signal values that are not used.
416
HDR Movie Mode
Shadow Compensation
Saturation
Limiting Maximum Brightness
You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast
scenes.
1.
Select [ : HDR Movie Mode] ( ).
2.
Set [HDR Movie Record.] to [Enable].
Caution
The ISO speed range is ISO 800–12800.
With HDR movie recording, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected
by noise or uneven gradation, exposure, or colors, depending on the subject or
shooting conditions. Banding or noise may also be noticeable in dark image areas.
Record a few test movies and check the results in advance.
Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or the [ : High ISO
speed NR] or [Shadow comp.] settings.
Autofocusing in HDR movie recording may be more difficult for subjects under low
light, or for low-contrast subjects.
Difficulty in autofocusing can be reduced by shooting near maximum aperture or
using a bright lens.
417
Shadow Compensation
You can brighten shadows and other dark image areas by using [Shadow comp.].
On the screen shown next, select an option while previewing the results.
Caution
Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting
conditions. Subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with
smooth gradation, and colors may look irregular.
Banding noise may be noticeable in dark image areas. This noise may also occur
at low ISO speeds, but changing the ISO speed or the [ : High ISO speed NR]
or [Shadow comp.] settings may make it less noticeable.
419
Saturation
You can adjust overall color intensity by using [Saturation].
To select an adjustment value, use the < > or < > dial.
Press < > when finished.
420
Limiting Maximum Brightness
This setting is available when [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ].
With [Disable], maximum brightness is not limited. Recommended when you will review
images on a monitor supporting display at brightnesses exceeding 1000 nits.
With [1000 nits], maximum brightness is limited to approx. 1000 nits.
421
Time-Lapse Movies
Still photos captured at a set interval are combined to create a time-lapse movie. This
provides an accelerated view of processes that normally happen slowly, such as changes in
a landscape, plant growth, or celestial motion.
1.
Select [ : Time-lapse movie] ( ).
2.
Select [Time-lapse].
Select [Enable].
422
3.
Set [Interval].
As you set the number, refer to the [ ] time required (1) and [ ]
playback time (2).
Turn the < > dial to select an option (hours : minutes : seconds).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
Can be set in a range of [00:00:02]–[99:59:59]. (An interval of once per
second is not available.)
Select [OK] to register the setting.
423
4.
Set [No. of shots].
As you set the number, refer to the time required ([ ]) and playback
time ([ ]).
Turn the < > dial to select an option (digit).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
Can be set in a range of [0002]–[3600].
Make sure the playback time ([ ]) is not displayed in red.
Select [OK] to register the setting.
The playback time ([ ]) is displayed in red if the card does not have
enough free space to record the specified number of shots. Although
the camera can continue recording, the recording will stop when the
card becomes full.
Playback time ([ ]) is displayed in red if the [No. of shots] setting
results in a file size exceeding 4 GB for a card not formatted in exFAT
( ). If you keep recording in this condition and the movie file size
reaches 4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.
Note
If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be
approx. 2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
424
5.
Select [Movie rec. size].
Available movie recording sizes (a combination of resolution, frame
rate, and compression) are displayed. Options vary depending on the
[Main rec. format] setting.
For details on main recording formats, resolutions, frame rates, and
compression, see
Main Recording Format and Movie Recording Size.
With [Main rec. format] set to [XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit]
•
NTSC: , PAL:
•
NTSC: , PAL:
With [Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit] or [XF-AVC
S YCC420 8bit]
•
NTSC: , PAL:
•
NTSC: , PAL:
•
NTSC: , PAL:
•
NTSC: , PAL:
Caution
is not available when [ : Movie cropping] is set to
[Enable], or with RF-S/EF-S lenses attached.
425
6.
Select [Main rec. format].
The available main recording formats are listed.
For details on these options, see Main Recording Format.
7.
Set [Auto exposure].
Fixed 1st frame
When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related
settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
Each frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the
exposure automatically to match the brightness. Note that any
functions such as Picture Style and white balance that are set to [Auto]
will be set automatically for each subsequent shot.
Caution
Significant changes in brightness between shots may prevent the
camera from shooting at the specified interval when [Interval] is
set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] is set to [Each
frame].
426
8.
Set [Screen auto off].
Disable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed.
(The screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen
will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.
Enable
The screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the shooting
started.
Caution
Even if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the screen turns off
during exposure. Also note that images may not be displayed if
the interval between shots is too brief.
Note
During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the < >
button to turn on/off the screen.
427
9.
Set [Beep per taken].
Set to [0] to prevent the camera from beeping for each shot.
10.
Check the settings.
Time required (1)
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
Playback time (2)
Length of the time-lapse movie.
11.
Close the menu.
Press the < > button to turn off the menu screen.
428
12.
Read the message.
Read the message and select [OK].
429
13.
Take a test shot.
Press the < > button and double-check the time required (1) and
interval (2) shown on the screen.
Set the exposure and shooting functions, then focus.
Press the shutter button completely to take a test shot, which is
recorded to the card as a still photo.
If there are no problems with the test shot, go to the next step.
To take more test shots, repeat this step.
Note
Test shots are captured in JPEG quality.
In [ ] mode, you can set the shutter speed in a range of 1/4000
to 30 sec.
You can set the maximum limit for Auto ISO in [ ] mode or in
[ ] mode with ISO Auto, in the [ Max for Auto] option of
[ : ISO speed settings] ( ).
If you have set [Half-press] in [ : Shutter btn function for
movies] to [Meter.+
Servo AF], it is automatically changed to
[Meter.+One-Shot AF] when you set up time-lapse movie
recording.
430
14.
Press the movie shooting button.
The camera is now ready to start recording a time-lapse movie.
To return to step 13, press the movie shooting button again.
15.
Record the time-lapse movie.
Press the shutter button completely to start recording the time-
lapse movie.
AF will not work during time-lapse movie recording.
A recording icon “●” is displayed on the screen as the time-lapse movie
is recorded.
When the set number of shots are taken, the time-lapse movie
recording ends.
To cancel recording time-lapse movies, set [Time-lapse] to
[Disable].
431
Note
Using a tripod is recommended.
Taking test shots as in step 13 or even recording test time-lapse movies
beforehand is recommended.
The movie's field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse movie
recording is approx. 100%.
To cancel time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter button
completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie shot so far
will be recorded on the card.
If the time required for recording is more than 24 hours but not more than 48 hours,
“2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the number of days
will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
Even if the time-lapse movie's playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie file will still
be created. In this case, [ 00'00"] is indicated as the playback time.
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the BT.709 color space are used for 4K/Full
HD time-lapse movies.
432
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a
computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.
Movie Servo AF will not function.
If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not be
displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens may
cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens aberration
correction not to function properly.
Recording time-lapse movies under flickering light may cause noticeable screen
flickering, and images may be captured with horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular
exposure.
Images displayed as time-lapse movies are recorded may look different from the
resulting movie (in details such as inconsistent brightness from flickering light
sources, or noise from a high ISO speed).
When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during
shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the movie. In such
cases, the [ ] icon will blink.
If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject during
time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
During time-lapse movie recording, auto power off will not take effect. Also, you
cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back images,
etc.
Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
To start or stop time-lapse movie recording, you can press the shutter button
completely, regardless of the [ : Shutter btn function for movies] setting.
Significant changes in brightness between shots may prevent the camera from
shooting at the specified interval when [Interval] is set to less than 3 sec. and
[Auto exposure] is set to [Each frame].
If the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long exposures), or if
a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at
the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by shooting intervals nearly the
same as the shutter speed.
If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten the
recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the
shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken
with the set intervals.
The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the time-
lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a movie
file.
433
Set [ : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] if you will connect the camera to a
computer with the interface cable and use an application such as Camera Connect.
Options other than [Disable] will prevent the camera from communicating with the
computer.
Image stabilization is not applied in time-lapse movie recording.
Time-lapse movie shooting ends if the power switch is set to < >, for
example, and the setting is changed to [Disable].
Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and switch
the setting to [Disable].
•
Selecting either [Clean now ] in [ : Sensor cleaning] or [Basic settings]
in [Reset camera]
•
Switching the shooting mode to [ ], [ ], or [ ]
If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white [ ] ( ) icon is displayed,
the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is recommended that
you start time-lapse movie recording after the white [ ] icon disappears (camera's
internal temperature decreases).
With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], the ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in
some shooting modes.
Note
You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop
time-lapse movie recording.
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
First, pair Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera ( ).
After you take some test shots and the camera is ready to shoot (as in step
14, ), set the release timing/movie shooting switch on the BR-E1 to <●>
(immediate release) or <2> (2-sec. delay).
If the remote control's switch has been set to < >, the time-lapse movie
recording cannot start.
Camera Status/Remote Control
Setting
<●> Immediate Release
<2> 2-sec. Delay
< > Movie Recording
Test-recording screen Test recording To recording standby
Recording standby Starts recording To test-recording screen
During time-lapse movie
recording
Ends recording Ends recording
434
Movie Self-Timer
Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.
1.
Select [ : Movie self-timer] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
3.
Record the movie.
After you press the movie shooting button or tap [ ], the camera
beeps and displays the number of seconds left before recording.
Note
To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press < >.
435
Tally Lamp
The tally lamp lights up or blinks to indicate camera status.
1.
Select [ : Tally lamp] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
When set to [On], the tally lamp lights up or blinks as follows.
Lit Movie recording in progress
Blinking rapidly
• Cannot record movies, due to a low battery level or
insufficient card free space
• High internal camera temperature, due to hot
shooting conditions or extended movie recording
Blinking slowly Movie recording is now possible for up to 6 min.
436
Pre-Recording Setting
With pre-recording, automatic movie recording is already in progress a specified amount of
time before you manually start recording.
This preliminary recording is referred to as pre-recording. The camera pre-records
automatically during movie recording standby.
1.
Select [ : Pre-recording set.] ( ).
2.
Select [Pre-recording].
Select [On].
3.
Select [Recording time].
Select the amount of time for pre-recording, before recording is started
manually.
437
4.
Record the movie.
Record the movie in the same way as normal movie recording.
Movies are recorded with the pre-recorded part added.
Caution
Restrictions during pre-recording
The following items are not displayed on the movie recording
screen.
• Electronic level
•
Histogram
•
Some Quick Control settings (functionality is limited during
pre-recording)
Touch sounds are not played.
The following operations and camera status pauses pre-recording.
While pre-recording is paused, [
/ ] blinks in the
upper right of the movie recording screen.
•
Attaching or detaching a lens
•
Connecting via HDMI
•
Turning the camera off/on
•
Opening/closing the card slot cover
•
Low remaining battery level
• High camera temperature
[ : Standby: Low res.] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed
( ).
Note
Current information when recording begins is applied to movie Exif
information.
438
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
Movie Digital IS
The camera's IS mode and movie digital IS features reduce camera shake as movies are
recorded.
They can provide effective stabilization even when non-IS lenses are used.
With IS-equipped lenses, setting the lens Image Stabilizer switch to < > combines
stabilization by the lens and camera.
1.
Select [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] ( ).
2.
Select [IS mode].
Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.
Caution
[IS mode] is not available when lenses with an IS switch are used. Use the IS
switch on the lens instead.
439
Movie Digital IS
1.
Select [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] ( ).
2.
Select [ Digital IS].
3.
Select an option.
Off ( )
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
On ( )
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
Enhanced ( )
Compared to when [On] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnified.
440
Caution
Movie digital IS will not function when the lens's optical Image Stabilizer switch is
set to < >.
With non-IS lenses, setting [ Digital IS] to [On] or [Enhanced] also sets [IS
mode] to [On].
Although movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using RF-S or
EF-S lenses or movie cropping, the image area is further reduced.
Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording
sizes.
The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image stabilization
will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less effective the image
stabilization will be.
When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Off] is recommended.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur noticeably
(the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital
IS.
Consider setting to [Off] when using a TS-E lens or fish-eye lens.
Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy. Noise,
dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
With the frame rate set to 239.76, 200.00, 119.88, or 100.00 fps, Movie digital IS
may not provide sufficient stabilization when shooting with a macro lens near the
closest focusing distance.
Note
For details on configuring image stabilization for still photo shooting, see Image
Stabilizer (IS Mode).
With some lenses, even more effective stabilization (indicated by “+” next to the IS
icon) is possible when the lens's IS is used in conjunction with [IS mode] and
[Movie digital IS] on the camera. For details on lenses compatible with this feature,
visit the Canon website (
).
441
False Color Settings
False Color Display
Color-coded display in six colors based on the brightness level is shown on the screen
during movie recording. This can help you adjust the exposure.
1.
Select [ : False color set.] ( ).
2.
Select [False color].
Select [On].
3.
Adjust the exposure as needed ( ).
Adjust the exposure, referring to false color descriptions in False Color
Display if necessary.
443
False Color Display
False color display is applied to images on the camera screen and viewfinder. You can also
check false color display details in [False color index].
Color Meaning
Red White clipping
Yellow Just below white clipping
Pink One stop over 18% gray
Green 18% gray
Blue Just above black clipping
Purple Black clipping
Neutral color Brightness other than above
Caution
Colors indicating the brightness level may change when the screen switches
between recording standby and movie recording, and under some shooting
settings.
The following features are not available when the camera is set to use false colors.
•
Auto Lighting Optimizer
•
Zebra display
•
MF peaking
•
Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies)
Note
With [ : HDMI display] set to [ ], false color display applies to external
monitors connected via HDMI, and no image is displayed on the camera screen.
With [ : HDMI display] set to [ + ], false color display applies to the camera
screen, and external monitors connected via HDMI show the actual image.
444
Zebra Settings
To simplify exposure adjustment before or during movie recording, you can display a striped
pattern over or around image areas of a specified brightness.
1.
Select [ : Zebra settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Zebra].
Select [On].
3.
Select [Zebra pattern].
[Zebra 1]: Displays left-slanting stripes around areas of the specified
brightness.
[Zebra 2]: Displays right-slanting stripes over areas that exceed the
specified brightness.
[Zebra 1+2]: Displays both [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2].
[Zebra 1] display takes precedence where [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2]
display areas overlap.
445
4.
Set the level.
Zebra 1 level
Zebra 2 level
Turn the < > dial to set it.
Note
The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when HDR-PQ is set. Note
that the maximum brightness value varies depending on [ : Highlight tone
priority] and [ : Picture Style] settings.
The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when the [ : Custom
Picture] gamma is set to [Canon Log 2] or [Canon Log 3].
Checking the zebra display level in advance is recommended when you will set
[Zebra pattern].
446
Shooting Information Display
Waveform Setting
Recording Emphasis
Aspect Marker
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the
viewfinder during movie recording.
Note
For details on the following topics, see Shooting Information Display for still photo
shooting.
•
Customizing Information on the Screen
•
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
•
Grid
•
Histogram
•
Electronic Level Size
•
Card Free Space (%) Display
•
Lens Information Display
•
Clearing Settings
447
4.
In [Type], select a waveform monitor option.
Line
Displays a waveform of the entire image, with horizontal coordinates of
the image on the horizontal axis and brightness values on the vertical
axis.
RGB
RGB parade display, with horizontal coordinates of the image on the
horizontal axis and RGB brightness values on the vertical axis.
Caution
The waveform monitor is not displayed in [ ] shooting mode.
Note
The waveform monitor is also shown on the screen for adjusting custom picture
image quality.
449
Aspect Marker
If you will change the image aspect ratio when editing the recorded movie, you can display
aspect markers on the movie recording screen (during standby and recording) to be aware
of the final angle of view after editing.
1.
Select [ : Shooting info. disp.] ( ).
2.
Select [Aspect marker].
3.
Select an option.
Select a display option.
Note
Markers are not shown during movie playback (recorded movies are not tagged
with aspect marker information).
451
Quick Control Screen
You can change the Quick Control (
) views available during movie recording.
1.
Select [ : Quick Ctrl screen] ( ).
2.
Select the view to display.
Turn the < > dial to select Quick Control display options.
For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark
[ ]. The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.
Select [OK] to register the setting.
452
Standby: Low Resolution
Set to [On] to conserve battery power and control the rise of internal camera temperature
during standby.
1.
Select [ : Standby: Low res.] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Caution
Image appearance during standby may differ from the appearance during movie
recording, but this setting does not affect recording quality.
Briefly when you start or stop recording movies, image display may remain on the
current frame instead of being updated.
453
Canon Log HDMI Output Range
You can select the output range of video signals output via an HDMI connection.
1.
Select [ : HDMI output range for C. Log] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Prioritize Full Range
Full-range output is used whenever possible. Note that the output
range will be automatically adjusted to suit display specifications.
Narrow Range
Narrow-range (video range) output is used.
Caution
This setting is disabled when [ : HDMI RAW output] is set to [On].
454
Metadata
Preparing to Embed XML Files
Embedding XML Files
Clearing Metadata Settings
Checking Metadata Status
Embedding Custom Picture Files
Movie files can be embedded with metadata that conforms to the NewsML-G2 specification.
Before you begin, the metadata to embed should be saved to a card.
Note
Metadata can also be embedded using the Content Transfer Professional mobile
app.
Settings in [ : Metadata] are disabled when metadata is embedded with Content
Transfer Professional.
Preparing to Embed XML Files
1.
Save the XML file in the [XMLTAG] folder at the root level of the card.
Create and save an XML file conforming to the NewsML-G2
specification.
When selecting an XML file to embed, you can select from up to 100
files.
2.
Load a card in card slot 2 ( ).
455
Embedding XML Files
1.
Select [ : Metadata] ( ).
2.
Set [Add News Metadata] to [On].
3.
Select [News Metadata].
This option is not available unless a card is loaded.
4.
Select the metadata.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
The first 8 characters of the XML file name are shown on the screen,
along with a preview of the data itself.
5.
Select [OK].
The metadata is registered in the camera.
456
Clearing Metadata Settings
You can clear (delete) metadata registered to the camera.
1.
Select [Clear Metadata settings].
2.
Select [OK].
Metadata registered to the camera is cleared.
457
Checking Metadata Status
You can review details of the metadata registered to the camera.
1.
Select [News Metadata status].
2.
Check the details as needed.
458
Embedding Custom Picture Files
Custom picture files can be embedded in movie files by setting [Add File] to [On] when
[ function] in [ : Custom Picture] is set to [On].
Caution
Custom picture files are not embedded in RAW movies.
When you are recording both main and proxy movies, custom picture files are
embedded in proxy movies if the main movies are RAW movies (
). If the main
movies are XF-HEVC S or XF-AVC S movies ( ), custom picture files are
embedded in the main and proxy movie.
459
Time Code
Count Up
Start Time Setting
Movie Recording Count
Movie Play Count
HDMI
Drop Frame
Time codes record the time automatically as movies are recorded. Time codes always
record elapsed hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. They are mainly used when movies
are edited.
To set up the time code, use [ : Time code].
Caution
Time codes may not be displayed correctly if your movies are played back on
devices other than the camera.
460
Count Up
Rec run
The time code advances only during movie recording. Time codes in each movie file
recorded continue from the last time code in the previous file.
Free run
The time code keeps advancing, even when you are not recording.
Caution
When set to [Free run], time codes are not added to High Frame Rate movies that
you record.
When set to [Free run], time codes will be affected by any changes to settings for
time, zone, or daylight saving time ( ).
461
Start Time Setting
You can set the initial time of the time code.
Manual input setting
Enables you to set any starting hour, minute, second, and frame.
Reset
Resets the time set with [Manual input setting] or [Set to camera time] to “00:00:00.”
or “00:00:00:” ( ).
Set to camera time
Matches the hour, minute, and second set as the time on the camera. Sets the frame
value to “00.”
462
Movie Recording Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie recording screen.
Rec time
During recording standby, displays the available recording time. During recording,
displays the time that has elapsed since recording began (1).
Time code
Displays the time code during movie recording (2).
463
Movie Play Count
You can select how time is shown in basic information display on the movie playback
screen.
Rec time
Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.
Time code
Displays the time code during movie playback.
Note
Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate
movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting.
The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie
play count], so that these settings always match.
The “frame” count is not displayed during recording.
464
HDMI
Time code
Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an external device via HDMI.
Off
No time code is added to HDMI video output.
On
Time codes are added to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec Command] is
displayed.
Rec Command
For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can synchronize recording to
when you start and stop recording movies on the camera.
Off
Recording is started and stopped by the external device.
On
Recording by an external device is synchronized to starting/stopping recording on the
camera.
465
Caution
Time codes are not added to HDMI video output when you record High Frame Rate
movies with [Count up] in [Time code] set to [Free run].
To determine compatibility of external recording devices with [Time code] and [Rec
Command] functions, check with the device manufacturer.
Even with [Time code] set to [Off], external recording devices may add time codes
to movies, depending on their specifications. For details on device specifications
relevant to adding time code to HDMI input, check with the device manufacturer.
466
Drop Frame
The time code's frame count will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and the time
code if the frame rate is set to (239.76 fps), (119.88 fps), (59.94 fps), or
(29.97 fps). You can choose whether to automatically compensate for this
discrepancy.
Enable
Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: drop
frame).
Disable
The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: non-drop frame).
Time codes are displayed as follows.
Enable 00:00:00. (Playback: 00:00:00.00)
Disable 00:00:00: (Playback: 00:00:00:00)
Note
The [Drop frame] setting item is not displayed when the frame rate is set to
(24.00 fps) or (23.98 fps), and when [ : System frequency] is set to
[50.00Hz:PAL].
467
Other Menu Functions
[ 3 Exposure]
[ 10 Assist shooting/HDMI]
[ 3 Exposure]
Exposure compensation
Exposure compensation is available in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes. For details on
exposure compensation, see
Manual Exposure Compensation.
ISO speed settings
ISO speed
In [ ] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto.
ISO speed range
You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum). ISO
expansion can also be configured.
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in movie recording in [ ], [ ], or [ ]
mode or in [ ] mode with ISO Auto.
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K time-lapse/Full HD time-lapse movie
recording in [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode or in [ ] mode with ISO Auto.
468
Av 1/8-stop incr.
You can set aperture values on a finer scale when recording movies with RF or RF-S
lenses.
This feature is available in [ ] or [ ] recording mode.
Select [Enable] to change the aperture increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to 1/8 stop.
Caution
[ Av 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses are
used.
When set to [Enable], setting options in [ : Exposure level increments] are
disabled and have no effect.
469
Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to record movies that are brighter and less affected by image noise
than when set to [Disable] by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light.
Available in [ ] or [ ] recording mode. Applies when the frame rate of the movie
recording size is or .
Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected by
subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may be
darker than when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable] by automatically
reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
Note
Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under low
light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
470
[ 10 Assist shooting/HDMI]
Shutdown warning guidance
Shutdown warning guidance (about auto shutdown during movie recording due to high
internal temperature under certain movie recording settings) can be displayed on startup. If
you prefer not to display shutdown warning guidance, set [
: Shutdown warning
guidance] to [Off].
471
HDMI display
You can specify how movies are displayed as they are recorded via HDMI to an external
device. Movie output itself corresponds to the [ : Movie rec. size] setting.
The default setting is [ + ].
+
Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other device, via HDMI
output.
Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are shown on the other
device via HDMI, not on the camera screen.
Deactivates the camera screen during output via HDMI, so that the screen is blank.
Shooting information, AF points, and other information is included in HDMI output and
shown on any monitors connected to the external recording device, but you can stop
output of this information by pressing the < > button.
Before recording movies externally, confirm that no information is being sent by the
camera by making sure no shooting information, AF points, and so on is displayed on
external monitors or other devices.
Settings such as time codes may not be recorded correctly in external movie recording
with [ : Standby: Low res.] set to [On].
For longer HDMI output
To continue HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [ + ], then set [Auto power
off] in [ : Power saving] to [Disable] ( ). HDMI output will continue after the camera
screen turns off when the time set in [Screen off] elapses.
472
Caution
HDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about the card
space, battery level, or high internal temperature ( ) via HDMI.
During HDMI output, display of the next image may take some time if you switch
between movies of different recording qualities or frame rates.
Avoid operating the camera when recording movies to external devices, which may
cause information to be displayed in the HDMI video output.
Brightness and color of movies recorded with the camera may look different from
that of HDMI video output recorded by external devices, depending on the viewing
environment.
Note
By pressing the < > button, you can change the information displayed.
Time codes can be added to HDMI video output ( ).
Audio is also output via HDMI, except when [Sound recording] is set to [Disable].
473
HDMI RAW output
Set to [On] for RAW movie output at resolutions up to 8K from the HDMI terminal to
compatible devices.
As recording begins, movies are also recorded to card
(if it is in the camera) in XF-AVC
format.
You can restrict recording to external recording devices when card is not inserted by
setting [Rec Command] to [On] ( ).
Set the movie recording quality in [
: Movie rec. size] ( ).
474
Caution
Movies will not be displayed correctly unless the connected device is compatible
with the camera's HDMI RAW output.
[HDMI RAW output] is not available in [ ] mode.
When HDMI RAW output is set, [ function] in [ : Custom Picture] is locked to
[On].
Image display on external recording devices conforms to the device settings and
differs from display on the camera.
Movies recorded to card conform to the image settings configured on the
camera.
Some restrictions apply to the following features when the camera is set to HDMI
RAW output.
• [ ISO speed settings] on the [ ] tab
•
[Record func+card/folder sel.] on the [ ] tab
The following features are not available when the camera is set to HDMI RAW
output.
•
High Frame Rate movies
•
HDR shooting (PQ)
•
Auto Lighting Optimizer
•
Highlight Tone Priority
•
Picture Style
•
Clarity
•
Pre-recording setting
•
Movie digital IS
•
HDMI display
•
HDMI resolution
•
Canon Log HDMI Output Range
•
Magnified image display
Note
You can include time code in output to devices compatible with RAW movies by
setting [Time code] in the [ : Time code] [HDMI] setting to [On]. With [Rec
Command] set to [On], you can also control starting and stopping of movie
recording on devices compatible with RAW movies by starting and stopping movie
recording on the camera (
).
475
General Movie Recording Precautions
Guidance Display Before Recording
Warning Indicator Display During Shooting or Recording
Guidance Display Before Recording
Shutdown warning guidance may be displayed when the camera starts up, after settings are
adjusted, or in other situations ( ).
The guidance warns that the camera may become hot internally if movies are recorded
under the current settings, and that if you continue recording, the camera may turn off
automatically.
If you will record over an extended period, consider changing the setting indicated by the
guidance (movie recording size), so that you can record without the camera displaying
guidance.
If you prefer to record without changing the settings, note any warning indicators displayed
as you record.
476
Warning Indicator Display During Shooting or
Recording
A 10-level indicator (1) is displayed during still photo shooting or movie recording in case of
excessive internal camera temperature.
As the internal temperature rises, the level on the indicator extends to the right. How fast the
level increases will depend on shooting conditions. Levels 1–7 are marked in white, but once
the temperature reaches level 8, the color changes.
[ ] flashes in red if you continue recording after the indicator reaches level 9, marked in
orange. A flashing icon indicates that the camera will soon turn off automatically.
A message is displayed if you continue to record while the icon is flashing, and the camera
automatically turns off.
477
Subsequent recording
To keep recording under the same settings, leave the camera off and let it cool down a
while. Note that the camera may overheat again after you resume recording.
Caution
Precautions for movie recording
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
If you record something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
If [ ] or [ ] is set and the ISO speed or aperture value changes during
movie recording, the white balance may also change.
If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
flicker.
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light, horizontal
banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise may occur if
you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic focusing ring.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, inaccurate lens
aberration correction, or loss of focus.
Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
Performing AF during movie recording may cause the following kinds of issues:
significant temporary loss of focus, recording of changes in movie brightness,
temporary stopping of movie recording, or recording of mechanical lens sounds.
Avoid covering the built-in microphones with your fingers or other objects.
Connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable during movie recording will end
recording.
If necessary, also see General Still Photo Shooting Precautions.
The camera may become hot in movie recording while connected via Wi-Fi. Use a
tripod or take other measures to avoid handheld recording.
Image quality may be lower when recording movies under a combination of
conditions such as high ISO speeds, high temperatures, low shutter speeds, and
low light.
Recording movies over an extended period may cause the camera's internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. Turn off the camera when possible if
you are not recording movies.
478
Recording and image quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to < >, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the
shutter button halfway. This will consume battery power, and it may reduce the total
movie recording time. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when
using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to
< >.
If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the screen.
Image noise or irregular colors may occur when recording at high ISO speeds, high
temperatures, slow shutter speeds, or under low light.
Video and audio quality of recorded movies may be worse on other devices, and
playback may not be possible, even if the devices support XF-HEVC/XF-AVC
formats.
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator may appear on the right
of the screen during movie recording. The indicator shows how much data has
not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory), and it increases more quickly the slower the card is. If the indicator (2)
becomes full, movie recording will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will not appear or the level (if
displayed) will not increase much. First, record a few test movies to see if the card
can write fast enough.
If the indicator shows that the card is full, and movie recording stops automatically,
the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly.
If the card's writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator appears,
formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Banding or noise may be noticeable in dark image areas, depending on [ :
Custom Picture], [ : HDR shooting (PQ)], [ : Highlight tone priority], or
[
: HDMI RAW output] settings, due to the effect of settings that determine the
dynamic range, gamma curve, and similar details. Record a few test movies and
check the results in advance.
Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or the [ : High ISO
speed NR] or [Shadow comp.] settings, or, in post-production, perform color
grading.
Audio restrictions
The following restrictions apply in [ ] mode.
• Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
• When you play back movies in Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
479
Note
Notes for movie recording
Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
Field of view (coverage) is approx. 100%.
Focusing is also possible by pressing the < > button.
To enable starting/stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [ : Shutter btn function for movies] to [Start/
stop mov rec] ( ).
Focus preset during movie recording is available when using (super) telephoto
lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of 2011.
For details on using built-in or external microphones, see Sound Recording.
480
AF/Drive
This chapter describes autofocus operation and drive modes and introduces menu settings
on the AF [ ] tab.
to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB]
mode.
Note
< > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus.
•
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
•
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording)
•
AF Operation
•
Movie Servo AF
•
Selecting the AF Area
•
Manual Focus
•
Registering People to Prioritize
•
Servo AF Characteristics
•
Customizing AF Functions
•
Focus Preset
•
Selecting the Drive Mode
•
Using the Self-Timer
•
Remote Control Shooting
481
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
AF operation/area
(1)
AF operation
(2) AF area
(3) Whole area tracking Servo AF
(4) Focus mode
Note
When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is
displayed on the [ 1] tab.
Subject detection
(1) Subject to detect
(2) Eye detection
(3) Register people priority
(4) Action Priority
482
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording)
AF operation/area
(1)
Movie Servo AF
(2)
AF area
(3) Focus mode
Note
When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is
displayed on the [ 1] tab.
Subject detection
(1) Subject to detect
(2) Eye detection
(3) Register people priority
(4) Switching tracked subjects
486
AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
AI Focus AF for Automatic AF Mode Switching
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
1.
Set the focus mode to AF.
For RF lenses with a focus mode switch
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.
For RF lenses without a focus mode switch
Set [ : Focus mode] to [AF].
2.
Select [ : AF operation] ( ).
488
3.
Select an option.
Note
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. With One-Shot AF, shooting
is not possible even by pressing the shutter button completely. Recompose the
shot and try to focus again. Or, see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing
Difficult.
With Servo AF, the camera shoots even when subjects are not in focus.
489
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.
The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you
to recompose the image before taking the picture.
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the
Drive Mode.
Note
If [ : Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.
See Lens electronic MF when using a lens that supports electronic manual
focusing.
Shooting with the focus locked
When shooting with the focus locked, you can focus with One-Shot AF before recomposing
the shot and shooting.
1.
Aim the AF point over a subject to focus on, then press the shutter
button halfway.
490
2.
After the subject is in focus, keep the shutter button pressed halfway
and recompose the shot.
3.
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
491
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will not sound even
when focus is achieved.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the
Drive Mode.
In [ ] mode, by default, the camera automatically switches to Servo AF in response to
subject movement.
Caution
Accurate focusing may not be possible at high aperture values or depending on the
lens, the distance to the subject, and how fast the subject is moving.
Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first, then
recompose and shoot.
Consider shooting with One-Shot AF if Servo AF operation is unsteady for still
subjects.
492
AI Focus AF for Automatic AF Mode Switching
The AF mode is automatically switched from [One-Shot AF] to [Servo AF] based on subject
status while you are pressing the shutter button halfway or shooting continuously.
493
4.
Select an option.
Enable
• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
•
To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to
record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop
Movie Servo AF by tapping [Movie Servo AF paused] (1) in the
lower left of the screen.
•
Movie Servo AF will resume if you return to movie recording after
operations such as pressing the < > or < > button or
changing the AF area.
Disable
Pressing the <
> button focuses using your specified AF area.
495
Caution
Precautions when set to [Movie Servo AF: Enable]
Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult
•
A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher aperture value.
• Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult.
Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time (
) will be shortened.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens
or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera
or lens is operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external
microphone may reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an
external microphone, it may be more effective to remove the external microphone
from the camera and position it away from the camera and lens.
Movie Servo AF pauses during magnified view.
During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is
moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded image may momentarily
expand or contract (change in image magnification).
496
Subject Detection AF
You can specify whether to use Movie Servo AF if the subject set in [ : Subject to
detect] ( ) is not detected.
Detect. priority
Movie Servo AF is used for automatically selected subjects within the area set in [ :
AF area] ( ).
Subjects set in [ : Subject to detect] are prioritized for automatic selection.
Detect. only
Movie Servo AF is only used for subjects set in [ : Subject to detect]. Movie Servo
AF stops if no subject is detected.
497
Selecting the AF Area
AF Area
Selecting the AF Area
Whole Area Tracking Servo AF
Subject to Detect
Eye Detection
Action Priority
Tracking with a Button
Manually Setting AF Points or Zone AF Frames
Adjusting the Zone AF Frame Size
Registering AF Points (Home Position)
Magnified View
AF Shooting Tips
Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult
AF Range
498
AF Area
This section describes AF area operation with [ : Whole area tracking Servo AF] set to
[Off].
Select the AF area by pressing the < > button.
You can switch [ : Whole area tracking Servo AF] [On] or [Off] by pressing the
< > button.
Servo AF for [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] tracks subjects with [ : Whole area tracking
Servo AF] set to [Off] and [ : Subject to detect] set to [None].
: Spot AF / : Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area than 1-point AF.
499
: 1-point AF / : 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF point [
].
500
: Expand AF area: / : Expand AF area:
Focuses using one AF point [
] and the AF area outlined here in blue. Effective for moving
subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF.
Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Flexible Zone AF.
When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [ ].
501
: Expand AF area: Around / : Expand AF area: Around
Focuses using one AF point [
] and the surrounding AF area outlined here in blue, which
makes it easier to focus on moving subjects than with Expand AF area: .
When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [ ].
502
: Flexible Zone AF 1 (default)
With Flexible Zone AF 1, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a square Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
: Flexible Zone AF 2
With Flexible Zone AF 2, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a vertical rectangular Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
503
: Flexible Zone AF 3
With Flexible Zone AF 3, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a horizontal rectangular Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
: Whole area AF
Uses auto selection AF in a whole-area AF frame to cover a larger area than Flexible Zone
AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area/Flexible Zone AF
and effective for moving subjects.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
504
Selecting the AF Area
You can select the AF area to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see Manual Focus.
1.
Select [ : AF area] ( , ).
2.
Select the AF area.
The screen above is displayed when [ : Orientation linked AF
point] ( ) is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt]. Set separate AF
areas after choosing vertical and horizontal orientations.
Note
To set the AF area, you can also press the < > button and then the < >
button.
The following descriptions apply to the camera with AF operation set to [Servo AF]
( ). Once a subject is in focus with [One-Shot AF] ( ), the AF point turns green.
505
Whole Area Tracking Servo AF
You can set whether to switch to whole-area subject tracking during Servo AF (while the
shutter button is pressed halfway with [ : AF operation] set to [Servo AF]).
1.
Select [ : Whole area tracking Servo AF] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
On
The AF area switches to whole-area AF to track subjects across the
entire screen area while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Off
Subjects are tracked only within AF points when the shutter button is
pressed halfway or completely.
506
Subject to Detect
You can specify conditions for automatic selection of the main subject to track.
Selecting an option other than [None] will display a tracking frame [ ] for the main subject
detected. The tracking frame will move to track subjects that start moving.
You can shoot with the subject's eyes in focus by setting [
: Eye detection] to an option
other than [Disable] ( ).
Auto
Automatic selection of the main subject to track from any people, animals, or vehicles in
the scene.
People
Detects people and prioritizes detection results for people as the main subjects to track.
Detection targets human faces, heads, or bodies, and tracking frames are shown over
any face or head detected.
When human faces, heads, or bodies cannot be detected, the camera may track other
parts of their body.
Animals
Detects animals (dogs, cats, birds, or horses) and people, with animal detection results
given priority to determine main subjects to track.
For animals, the camera attempts to detect faces or bodies, and a tracking frame is
shown over any face detected.
When an animal's face or entire body cannot be detected, the camera may track part of
their body.
Vehicles
Detects vehicles (sports cars and motorcycles, aircraft, and trains) and people, with
vehicle detection results given priority to determine main subjects to track.
For vehicles, the camera attempts to detect key details or the entire vehicle (or for trains,
the front part), and a tracking frame is shown over any of these details detected.
When key details or the entire vehicle cannot be detected, the camera may track other
parts of the vehicle.
Press the <
> button to enable or disable Spot detection for key details of vehicles.
507
None
The camera determines the main subject automatically from how you compose shots,
without detecting subjects.
Tracking frames are not displayed.
Caution
The following kinds of subjects may not be detected.
•
Extremely small or large
• Too bright or dark
• Partially hidden
• Difficult to distinguish from the background
• Obscured by rain, snow, or dust clouds
People's posture or the color or shape of what they are wearing may prevent
detection. Tracking frames may also appear for subjects other than people.
The camera may not detect dogs, cats, birds, or horses, depending on the breed,
color, shape, or posture. Tracking frames may also appear for similar-looking
animals or non-animal subjects.
The camera may not detect two- or four-wheeled vehicles, aircraft, or trains,
depending on the type, color, shape, or orientation. Tracking frames may also
appear for similar-looking vehicles or subjects that are not vehicles.
Note
When pressing the shutter button halfway for subject selection, you can choose the
following subjects. In scenes without relevant subjects, the camera tracks other
objects regardless of the [ : Subject to detect] setting.
•
Auto
People, animals, vehicles
•
People
People
•
Animals
Animals, people
•
Vehicles
Vehicles, people
In [ : Limit subject to detect], you can limit the available detection setting
options to your preferred options.
If it seems difficult for the camera to detect your preferred subject when you are
shooting people, animals, or vehicles with [Auto], it may be easier if you switch to
the setting option specifically for that subject.
To restrict AF to your specified AF area, set [ : Whole area tracking Servo AF]
to [Off] and [
: Subject to detect] to [None].
508
Manually selecting a subject for focus
1.
Check the tracking frame.
Aim the camera at the subject. An AF point (or Zone AF frame)
appears on the screen if you have set [ : AF area] to an option
other than [Whole area AF]. In this case, aim the AF point over the
subject.
A tracking frame [ ] appears over any subjects detected.
Tracking frames [ ] away from AF points are displayed in gray, except
in some cases.
Once the tracked subject is near an AF point, even if it is outside the
AF point, the tracking frame turns white (distinguishing it as an active
frame), which enables selection as the main subject.
Gray display of tracking frames [ ] does not apply in movie recording.
509
2.
Focus and shoot/record.
A tracking frame is displayed (in green for One-Shot AF or blue for
Servo AF) when you press the shutter button halfway, and the camera
beeps (only for One-Shot AF).
An orange tracking frame indicates that the camera could not focus on
subjects.
Note
Selecting a subject by touch with [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF] changes
the tracking frame to [ ] and locks on to that subject for tracking across the entire
screen.
To release locked tracking, tap [ ].
Pressing the shutter button halfway when the AF point does not overlap the
tracking frame [ ] will focus using the AF point.
The active [ ] may cover part of the subject instead of the entire subject.
The size of tracking frames varies depending on the subject.
Even if you have manually selected an AF area, you can switch the AF area to
[Whole area AF] and start AF with subject detection by pressing the button
assigned to [AF on detected subject] in [
: Customize buttons for shooting].
510
Caution
In still photo shooting, tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF],
regardless of the AF operation setting.
If the subject's face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible.
Adjust the focus manually ( ) so that the face can be detected, then perform AF.
AF may not detect subjects or people's faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the center.
511
Eye Detection
You can shoot with the eyes of people or animals in focus.
1.
Select [ : Eye detection] ( , ).
2.
Select an option.
Disable
Eye detection is not performed.
Auto
The eye for AF operation is selected automatically after eye detection.
Right eye/Left eye
Gives priority to the selected eye for AF, after eye detection. If the eye
on the side with priority is not detected, the other eye is used for AF.
512
3.
Aim the camera at the subject.
A tracking frame is displayed around their eye.
To choose an eye to focus on when [ : AF area] is set to [Whole
area AF], either tap the screen or use < >. As you use < >, the
tracking frame changes again to [ ].
You can also tap the screen to choose an eye, when [ : AF area] is
set to [Whole area AF] or during tracking in progress.
If your selected eye is not detected, an eye to focus on is selected
automatically.
4.
Take the picture.
Caution
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, subject eyes may not be
detected correctly, or a subject's left or right eye may not be prioritized correctly.
Eyes are not detected when [ : Subject to detect] is set to [None].
Note
In [ : L/R eye detection], you can limit the available detection setting options to
your preferred options.
513
Action Priority
Soccer, volleyball, or basketball players you are shooting can be treated as priority subjects
for detection and AF tracking, based on typical movements (actions) in each sport.
Caution
Unintended tracking may occur if this feature is used for other sports or general
photography.
Note
Available under the following conditions.
•
Still photo shooting
• [ : Subject to detect]: [People]
•
[ : Shutter mode]: [Electronic ]
1.
Select [ : Action Priority] ( ).
2.
Configure [Action Priority].
Select [Enable], then press < >.
514
3.
Select [Sport events].
4.
Select an option.
Select a sport, then press < >.
515
Caution
The following kinds of subjects may not be recognized as priority subjects based on
their movement.
• Small subjects
• Too bright or dark
•
Partially hidden or outside the angle of view
• Facing away from the camera
• Difficult to distinguish from the background
• Obscured by rain, snow, or dust clouds
• Wearing uniforms that make it difficult to determine their posture
• Crowded together, in front of/behind each other
•
In scenes where the ball is not visible or only partly visible
•
Greatly out of focus
•
Under flickering light
The camera may switch subjects to track players moving similarly to the actions
targeted by Action Priority (such feinting a kick in soccer).
When several subjects are moving in typical ways at once, Action Priority may
cause the camera to switch subjects repeatedly.
Action Priority may cause the camera to switch subjects repeatedly when several
players are near the ball.
The camera may switch to other subjects near a ball, even if they are not moving in
typical ways.
Note
For details on actions that can be recognized, refer to the AF Setting Guide. ( )
Operation is as follows with [ : Action Priority] set to [Enable].
•
Tracking switches to subjects moving in typical ways once they are recognized,
even if a different subject was being tracked. However, Action Priority does not
switch subjects if you start tracking with touch or button operations.
•
Even with [ : Register people priority] set to [Enable], the camera
prioritizes switching based on Action Priority.
You can assign [Enable] or [Off] in [ : Action Priority] to any button in [ :
Customize buttons for shooting] ( ).
With [ : Whole area tracking Servo AF] set to [Off], the camera only switches
subjects within the AF area.
516
Tracking with a Button
You can press a button assigned to [Start/stop whole area AF tracking] in [ : Customize
buttons for shooting] to track subjects with a tracking frame [
]. This example is based
on assigning the < > button ( ).
1.
Check the AF point.
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF
points are also displayed.
With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.
517
2.
Press the < > button.
The AF point changes to a tracking frame [ ], which locks on to that
subject for tracking and follows the subject within the screen if it moves.
To cancel tracking, press the < > button again.
The tracking frame changes to [ ] when multiple subjects can be
detected, and you can use < > to choose a subject to focus on.
Once tracking begins, the subject is tracked across the entire screen,
regardless of the specified AF area.
The position of AF areas and points when tracking stops after you
press the shutter button halfway or completely corresponds to the
position of the tracking frame during tracking. The position of AF areas
and points when tracking stops during shooting standby corresponds to
the position before tracking.
3.
Take the picture.
518
Manually Setting AF Points or Zone AF Frames
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, Flexible Zone AF 1 screens are
used as an example.
1.
Check the AF point.
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF
points are also displayed.
With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.
2.
Move the AF point.
Use < > to move the AF point into position for focusing (but note that
with some lenses, it may not move to the edge of the screen).
You can also focus by tapping a position on the screen.
To center the AF point or Zone AF frame, press < > straight in or tap
[
].
You can resize Zone AF frames used for Flexible Zone AF ( ).
519
3.
Focus and take the picture.
Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point turns blue.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.
Caution
The camera will keep moving the AF point [ ] to track subjects when set to
Flexible Zone AF and Servo AF, but under some shooting conditions (such as
when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select an
AF point in the center.
Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF
operation setting.
Note
You can set separate AF areas and AF points for vertical and horizontal
orientations when [ : Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] (
).
520
Adjusting the Zone AF Frame Size
You can resize the Zone AF frame displayed for Flexible Zone AF 1–3.
1.
Press the < > button during shooting screen display.
2.
Press the < > button.
3.
Adjust the Zone AF frame size.
Use the < > or < > dial to adjust the Zone AF frame size, then
press < >.
To restore the default setting, press the < > button.
521
Registering AF Points (Home Position)
You can register the position of a frequently used AF point. To switch from the current AF
point to your registered AF point, you can use a button you assign to recalling the home
position on advanced setting screens for [Direct AF point selection], [Metering and AF
start], [Switch to registered AF point], or [Register/recall shooting func] in [ :
Customize buttons for shooting] (
).
1.
Select your preferred AF area.
Press the < > button to select an AF area.
Move the AF point or Zone AF frame to the position to register.
2.
Register the AF point or Zone AF frame.
Hold down the < > button and press the < > button, or press and
hold the < > button, so that the camera beeps and registers the AF
point.
The registered AF point blinks in gray.
Registration when the camera is set to Whole area AF will register the
entire AF area as the home position.
522
Note
To clear registered AF points, hold down the < > button and press the
< > button, or press and hold the < > button.
You can also clear registered AF points by clearing all camera settings.
You can register separate home positions for each camera orientation when the
orientation-linked AF point setting ( ) is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt] or
[Separate AF pts: Pt only].
Although it has no effect if you attempt to register a home position while a subject is
being tracked with a tracking frame, you can clear registered positions at this time.
523
Magnified View
To check the focus, you can magnify display by approx. 6× or 15× by pressing the < >
button (or tapping [
]).
Magnification is centered on the tracking frame when the tracking frame is white (as an
active frame) after subject detection.
Magnification is centered on the AF point (in the center of the screen) when subjects are
detected and the tracking frame is gray, or when subjects cannot be detected.
Autofocusing is performed in magnified view if you press the shutter button halfway.
When set to Servo AF or AI Focus AF, pressing the shutter button halfway in magnified
view reverts to the normal view for focusing.
Caution
If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform
AF.
If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
AF speed differs between the normal view and magnified view.
Preview AF and Movie Servo AF are not available in magnified view.
With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
524
AF Shooting Tips
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again.
Image brightness may change before and after autofocusing.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the
continuous shooting speed may decrease.
If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be
difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light
source you will use.
If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually ( ).
For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try centering the
subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus, then recompose the
shot before shooting.
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or accurate
focusing may not be achieved.
525
Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult
Subjects with low contrast, such as a blue sky or flat surfaces in solid colors, or other
cases when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards,
etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under light sources with constantly changing brightness, colors, or patterns.
Night scenes or points of light.
The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the screen.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly reflective surfaces,
etc.).
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage, etc.).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to camera shake
or subject blur.
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
526
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and settings such as
aspect ratio, movie recording size, and Movie digital IS.
527
Manual Focus
Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Focus Guide
You can magnify display to check the focus when you are focusing manually.
1.
Set the focus mode to MF.
For RF lenses with a focus mode switch
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >.
For RF lenses without a focus mode switch
Set [ : Focus mode] to [MF].
2.
Focus manually.
Turn the lens focusing ring to set the approximate focus.
528
3.
Magnify the image.
Each press of the < > button changes the magnification ratio, as
follows.
4.
Move the magnified area.
Use < > to move the magnified area into position for focusing.
To center the magnified area, press < > straight in.
5.
Adjust the focus position.
While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to
focus.
After focusing, press the < > button to return to the normal view.
Note
In magnified view, the exposure is locked.
Even when focusing manually, you can use Touch Shutter to shoot.
529
Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing easier. You can set
the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection.
1.
Select [ : MF peaking settings] ( , ).
2.
Select [Peaking].
Select [On].
3.
Set [Level] and [Color].
Set as necessary.
Caution
In magnified view, peaking display is not shown.
During HDMI output, peaking display is not shown on equipment connected via
HDMI. Note that peaking display is shown on the camera screen when [
: HDMI
display] is set to [ + ].
MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO
expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off].
530
Note
Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
MF peaking may be hard to discern under the following settings. Set [ :
HDR/C.Log View Assist.] as needed.
• With [ : Custom Picture] gamma set to [Canon Log 2], [Canon Log 3], or
[PQ]
•
With [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ]
531
Focus Guide
Setting [ : Focus guide] to [On] provides a guide frame that shows which direction to
adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. You can also use eye control to display
the focus guide at your preferred position. For details, see Using Eye Control for AF.
1.
Select [ : Focus guide] ( , ).
2.
Select [On].
The guide frame is displayed on the face of any person detected as the
main subject.
To display the guide frame on the face of the person detected as the
main subject, set [
: Subject to detect] to an option other than
[None]. You can also display the guide frame near the eyes of the
person detected as the main subject by setting [ : Eye detection] to
an option other than [Disable].
After pressing the < > button, you can use < > to move the guide
frame in the direction you press (except in [ ] mode).
To set the guide frame after moving it with < >, press < >.
You can also move and set the guide frame by tapping the screen.
To center the guide frame, tap [ ] or press < > straight in.
532
The guide frame indicates the current position in focus and adjustment amount as follows.
Toward infinity
Much adjustment needed
Toward infinity
Slight adjustment needed
In focus
Toward close range
Slight adjustment needed
Toward close range
Much adjustment needed
533
Adjustment information
not detected
Caution
Under difficult shooting conditions for AF ( ), the guide frame may not be
displayed correctly.
Higher aperture values are more likely to prevent correct guide frame display.
No AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed.
The guide frame is not displayed in these situations.
• When the focus mode is set to AF ( )
•
When display is magnified
The guide frame is not displayed correctly during shifting or tilting of TS-E lenses.
Note
The camera's auto power off counter does not count time spent adjusting the focus
with a lens's electronic focusing ring.
534
Registering People to Prioritize
Registering Faces
Changing or Removing the Priority of Registered People
Enabling Detection of Registered People's Faces
Clearing All Registered People
Saving and Loading Registered Data
You can register people on the camera to have the camera attempt to detect their faces and
prioritize focusing, brightness, and color tone for them when you shoot. To register a face,
you can take a picture of someone, or you can use an image on the card.
Caution
The camera stores face images and related information registered using this
feature. Delete all registered information before disposing of the camera or
transferring ownership.
When using this feature, be aware of the need to protect personal information and
comply with privacy regulations, as by asking people for their consent before
registering their information. Canon cannot be held liable for any personal
information issues arising from use of this feature.
535
3.
Aim the frame over the face of a person to register, then take their
picture.
Shoot under ample light with the subject facing you.
Ask subjects to pose with a natural facial expression before you shoot.
For best results, ask subjects to take off any hats, masks, sunglasses,
or other coverings before you take their picture.
It may improve detection accuracy to register faces immediately before
you will shoot.
Under these shooting conditions, detection may be less accurate, and it
may not be possible to register faces.
•
Faces are too small, relative to the frame
•
Faces are partially shaded
•
Faces are partially hidden
•
Faces are displayed on a computer or smartphone screen
4.
Select [OK].
The image displayed may look different from how you composed the
shot in step 3, but this will not affect detection accuracy.
537
Registering people from images on the card
JPEG or HEIF images can be used. Process any RAW images you will use into JPEGs or
HEIFs before saving them to the card.
Caution
With the following images, detection may be less accurate, and it may not be
possible to register faces.
• Faces are partially hidden
• Faces are partially shaded
• Faces are displayed on a computer or smartphone screen
Note
For best results, make sure that faces in the images meet these guidelines.
•
Well lit and facing you
•
Not wearing any hats, masks, sunglasses, or other coverings
•
Natural facial expression
•
Faces are not too small or large relative to the screen
1.
Select [Reg. people from image on card].
538
2.
Switch to playback.
Press < >.
3.
Select a face.
For pictures that show more than one person, you can use the < >
< > dials or < > to move the orange frame over the face to
register.
Press < >.
539
4.
Select [OK].
After the following screen appears, you can register another person's
face.
Display when registered faces are detected
A white frame with [
] appears on any registered faces that are detected on the shooting
screen. Note that [ ] is not displayed when One-Shot AF or Servo AF is used.
Caution
Detection may be less accurate under these conditions.
•
Subjects are not directly facing you
• Faces are too light or dark
•
Faces are too small or large relative to the screen
• Subjects have a much different facial expression from the one in registered
images
• Subjects are moving too much
• Faces are covered by a hat, mask, sunglasses, or other objects
•
Subject faces look much different from how they look in registered images
Unregistered people may be mistakenly detected as registered people whom they
resemble.
If faces of registered people are not detected, or if detection is not accurate, try
clearing the registered information and registering it again.
540
Note
When [ : Subject to detect] is set to an option other than [People], priority is
given to the subject specified in that setting.
541
Changing or Removing the Priority of Registered
People
You can change detection priority by rearranging registered people. You can also remove
registered people.
Changing detection priority
1.
Select [Change/del. priority of reg. people].
2.
Select the face of a registered person.
Select with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.
542
3.
Change the priority.
Move with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.
When finished changing priority, press the < > button.
Removing registered people
1.
Select the face of a registered person.
Select with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.
2.
Press the < > button.
543
3.
Select [OK].
Press the < > button to exit.
544
Enabling Detection of Registered People's Faces
1.
Select [Register people priority].
2.
Select [Enable].
545
Clearing All Registered People
Delete all registered information before disposing of the camera or transferring ownership.
1.
Select [Delete all registered people].
2.
Press < >.
546
3.
Select [OK].
Press < >.
Note
Performing [Factory reset] in [ : Reset camera] also clears the information for all
registered people.
547
Saving and Loading Registered Data
Registered face data can be saved to a card. Registered data on a card can be used with
other EOS R5 Mark II or EOS R1 cameras. You can also use registered data from other
EOS R5 Mark II or EOS R1 cameras.
1.
Select [Save/load registered data on card].
548
2.
Select [Save registration data on card].
Select [Save registration data on card] to save the camera's
registered data to the card.
To rename the registered data file before saving it, press the < >
button on the following screen.
To load registered data from the card and overwrite existing data on
the camera, select [Load from card (overwrite)]. Any existing
registered data on the camera is deleted.
To add registered data from the card to the camera, select [Load from
card (add)]. No existing registered data on the camera is deleted.
•
Registered data is loaded starting from the person with the highest
priority.
•
Once the camera is full of registered data, no more data is loaded.
549
Servo AF Characteristics
Case Auto
Case Manual
Case Special
Shooting with optimal Servo AF for your subject or shooting situation is easy.
Case Auto
You can set Servo AF tracking parameters (subject tracking sensitivity and acceleration/
deceleration tracking) for the subject and shooting situation.
1.
Select [ : Case Auto].
Turn the < > dial to select [AUTO], then press < >.
The case is set to auto and [AUTO] is displayed in blue.
550
2.
Adjust [Case Auto character.].
Press the < / > button. The selected parameter is outlined in
purple.
Press < > to select [Case Auto character.].
To select an adjustment value, use the < > or < > dial.
Default settings are indicated by a light gray [ ] icon.
Press < > when finished.
Press the < / > button to return to the screen in step 1.
551
Case Auto tracking parameters
It may be easier to focus if you modify the default Case Auto setting.
0
Standard setting. Generally recommended, as an option that is useful in many
situations.
Locked on: –1
Keeps the tracked subject in focus as much as possible, even if objects are momentarily
in front of it, or if it strays from AF points after moving suddenly.
Responsive: +1
Makes it easier for the camera to switch tracked subjects if you want to capture several
subjects in succession, for example.
552
Case Manual
You can set Servo AF tracking parameters as needed for shooting conditions.
1.
Select [ : Case Manual].
Turn the < > dial to select [M], then press < >.
The case is set to manual and [M] is displayed in blue.
553
2.
Adjust [Case Manual] tracking parameters.
Press the < / > button. The selected parameter is outlined in
purple.
Use the < > or < > dial to select a setting to adjust, then press
< >.
To select an adjustment value, use the < > or < > dial.
Default settings are indicated by a light gray [ ] icon.
Press < > when finished.
Press the < / > button to return to the screen in step 1.
554
Tracking sensitivity
Setting for Servo AF subject-tracking sensitivity in response to non-subjects moving across
AF points or subjects straying from AF points.
0
Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: –2 / –1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move
across AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The –2 setting makes the
camera keep tracking the target subject longer than the –1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take slightly longer to switch
and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances that are covered
by the AF points. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.
The +2 setting is more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next
subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended subject.
555
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
Setting for subject-tracking sensitivity in response to sudden, significant changes in speed,
as when subjects suddenly start or stop moving.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
–2 / –1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due to slight subject movement or
an obstruction in front of the subject.
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or
sudden stops. Even if the moving subject's speed suddenly changes significantly, the
camera continues to focus on the target subject. For example, the camera is less likely
to focus behind a subject that suddenly starts approaching you, or in front of an
approaching subject that suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes
in the moving subject's speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the subject,
focusing may become unstable for short periods.
556
Case Special
Useful for difficult-to-track subjects, such as those behind a net in sports such as badminton
or volleyball.
1.
Select [ : Case Special].
Turn the < > dial to select [SP], then press < >.
The case is set to special and [SP] is displayed in blue.
Caution
The camera may focus more toward the background than usual. Especially with
subjects that are small or not behind a net, the camera may focus further back than
the subject.
Dense nets in front of subjects may make focusing more difficult.
The effect of this setting may vary by lens.
557
[Customize AF operation]
Servo 1st image priority
You can set AF operating characteristics and shutter-release timing for the first shot with
Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter-release timing.
: Release
Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has not been
achieved. Useful when you want to give priority to capturing the decisive moment rather
than achieving focus.
: Focus
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved. Useful
when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image.
Note
The second and subsequent shots in continuous shooting prioritize the release
timing.
559
One-Shot AF release priority
You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for One-Shot AF (except when
shooting with Touch Shutter).
: Focus
The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve
focus before capturing the image.
: Release
Prioritizes shutter release over focus. Useful when capturing the decisive moment is
most important.
Note that the camera shoots whether or not the subject is in focus.
560
Preview AF
Keeps subjects generally in focus before you start shooting. When set to [Enable], the
camera is ready to focus immediately after you press the shutter button halfway.
Caution
Fewer shots are available when set to [Enable], because the lens is driven
continuously and battery power is consumed.
561
Lens operation when AF is not available
You can specify lens operation that applies when autofocusing on a subject is not possible.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise
focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the lens drive
will not be performed. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to
the focus search drive.
Caution
[Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses or other lenses
that are driven over a large focus area, to avoid significant delay from focus search
drive if the lens becomes greatly out of focus.
562
AF-assist beam firing
You can enable or disable AF-assist beam firing of the camera or a Speedlite for EOS
cameras.
ON: Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
OFF: Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the AF-assist beam.
LED: LED AF assist beam only
Enables LED AF-assist beam firing by Speedlites equipped with this feature, when these
flash units are attached. If your Speedlite is not LED-equipped, the camera's AF-assist
beam is fired instead.
Caution
Speedlite AF-assist beam firing is disabled when the Speedlite's [ : AF-assist
beam firing] Custom Function is set to [Disable].
563
[Customized controls]
Limit AF areas
You can limit the AF areas available to the areas that you normally use. Select available AF
areas and press < > to add a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting. For
details on AF areas, see AF Area.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.
Note
An asterisk to the right of [ : Limit AF areas] indicates that the default setting
has been modified.
564
Orientation-linked AF points
You can set separate types of AF areas or positions of AF points for vertical and horizontal
shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF points or Zone AF frames in the same AF areas are used in both vertical
and horizontal shooting.
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
Separate types of AF areas or separate AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for
each camera orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical
with the camera grip down ( )).
Useful when switching to other types of AF areas or positions of AF points or Zone AF
frames automatically based on camera orientation.
AF areas and AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three camera
orientations are retained.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
Separate AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for each camera orientation ((1)
Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical with the camera grip down).
Useful when switching to other positions of AF points or Zone AF frames automatically
based on camera orientation.
Positions of AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three camera
orientations are retained.
Caution
The default setting of [Same for both vert/horiz] is restored if you select [Basic
settings] in [ : Reset camera] ( ). Settings for orientations (1)–(3) are cleared,
and the camera is set to use the center Zone AF frame in Flexible Zone AF 1.
The setting may be cleared if you switch lenses.
565
Limit subject to detect
You can limit the available setting options in [ : Subject to detect] to your preferred
options. Select an option to exclude and press < > to clear [ ]. Select [OK] to register
the setting.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.
Note
An asterisk to the right of [ : Limit subject to detect] indicates that the default
setting has been modified.
566
Left/right eye detection
You can limit the available setting options in [ : Eye detection] to your preferred options.
Select an option to exclude and press < > to clear [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.
Note
An asterisk to the right of [ : L/R eye detection] indicates that the default
setting has been modified.
567
[MF related]
Lens electronic MF
For attached lenses that support electronic manual focusing, you can specify the operation
of manual focus adjustment.
OFF: Disable
Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens's focus mode switch is set to
< >.
: Disable after One-Shot
After One-Shot AF, manual focusing adjustment is disabled.
: One-Shot→enabled
You can manually adjust the focus after the One-Shot AF if you keep holding down the
shutter button halfway.
: One-Shot→enabled (magnify)
You can manually adjust the focus after the One-Shot AF if you keep holding down the
shutter button halfway. You can magnify the area in focus and adjust the focus manually
by turning the lens focusing ring.
ON: Enable (actual size)
Manual focus adjustment is always available when the camera is on with certain
lenses*
1
attached.
With other lenses, operation is the same as [One-Shot→enabled].
: Enable (One-Shot→magnify)
Manual focus adjustment is always available when the camera is on with certain
lenses*
1
attached.
Turning the lens focusing ring after One-Shot AF magnifies the area in focus.
With other lenses, operation is the same as [One-Shot→enabled].
* 1: For details on lenses compatible with this feature, check the Canon website (
).
568
Caution
With [One-Shot→enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even if you
turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway immediately
after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the shutter button,
waiting for [
] display, then pressing the shutter button halfway as you turn the
lens focusing ring.
Note
For details on your lens's manual focus specifications, refer to the Lens Instruction
Manual.
569
[Various settings/Various settings]
Register/recall AF-related settings
You can save current AF settings and apply them all at once.
Caution
Current camera settings are listed on the screen in step 4, which is used to register
settings. The items listed on this screen cannot be changed.
The following [ ] tab items are not available for this feature.
•
One-Shot AF release priority
•
Preview AF
•
AF-assist beam firing
•
MF peaking settings
•
Focus guide
Register
1.
Select [ : Register/recall AF-related settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Register settings].
570
3.
Select a name for the settings.
[ ] is displayed by names for which AF settings have not been
registered yet.
To rename the settings, press the < > button.
4.
Select the AF settings to register.
All selected AF settings will be registered. To clear or reselect settings,
turn the < > dial to select the setting, then press < >.
When you are finished choosing settings, select [OK].
571
Recall
1.
Select [ : Register/recall AF-related settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Recall].
3.
Select a name for the settings.
Turn the < > dial to select a name, then press < > to confirm your
selection.
4.
Review the registered details and select [OK].
You can use < > to scroll the screen when reviewing registered
details.
572
[Subject detection] (in movie recording)
Switching tracked subjects
You can set how easily the camera switches tracked subjects.
Standard
After determining the main subject from how your shot is composed, the camera tracks
subjects or switches to others accordingly.
Locked on
Switches tracked subjects later than with [Standard].
Responsive
Switches tracked subjects sooner than with [Standard].
Caution
Subjects selected by touch operations are tracked to the extent possible,
regardless of the [
: Switching tracked subjects] setting.
574
[Servo AF character.] (in movie recording)
Movie Servo AF speed
You can set the AF speed for Movie Servo AF. This function is enabled with [Movie Servo
AF] in [ : Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable] when you are using lenses compatible with
slow focus transition during movie recording.*
You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed) from the standard speed (0) to slow
(one of seven levels) or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the desired effect for the movie
creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie recording
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For details, refer to the
Canon website ( ).
Caution
With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not change.
Note
Operation when inactive is equivalent to when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)].
An AF speed value to the right of [ : Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the
default setting has been modified.
575
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects responsiveness
if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects
move across AF points or when you pan.
This function is available when [Movie Servo AF] in [
: Movie Servo AF] is set to
[Enable].
Locked on: –3/–2/–1
With this setting, the camera is less likely to track a different subject if the subject strays
from the AF point. The closer the setting is to the minus (–) symbol, the less the camera
is inclined to track a different subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF
points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or
when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF
point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the more responsive the camera
is. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from
the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.
Note
Operation when inactive is equivalent to when set to [0].
576
Focus Preset
You can set your preferred focus positions in advance on the camera when using RF or
RF-S lenses. Saved focus preset positions can be applied by pressing a button during
standby.
Registering a focus position on the camera
Focus at the focusing distance to register as a preset, then press the button assigned to
[Register focus preset].
Recalling preset focus positions
Press the button assigned to [Recall focus preset].
Caution
Before using focus presetting, you must assign [Register focus preset] and
[Recall focus preset] to buttons of your choice in [ : Customize buttons for
shooting].
Note
Focus presetting is available in AF and MF focus mode.
Registered focus positions are cleared when you switch lenses or change camera
batteries.
577
Selecting the Drive Mode
Switching Continuous Shooting Modes
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the
scene or subject.
1.
Press the < > button ( ).
With an image displayed on the screen, press the < > button.
2.
Select the drive mode item.
Press the < > button to select the drive mode item.
578
3.
Select the drive mode.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
: Single shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
: High-speed continuous shooting +
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as
described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [ : Shutter mode]
setting.
•
[Mechanical]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec.
•
[Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec.
•
[Electronic ]: max. approx. 30 shots/sec.
: High-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as
described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [ : Shutter mode]
setting.
•
[Mechanical]: max. approx. 6 shots/sec.
•
[Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 8.2 shots/sec.
• [Electronic ]: max. approx. 15 shots/sec.
: Low-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as
described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [
: Shutter mode]
setting.
• [Mechanical]: max. approx. 3 shots/sec.
• [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 3 shots/sec.
•
[Electronic ]: max. approx. 5 shots/sec.
: Self-timer: 10 sec. / : Self-timer: 2 sec. / : Self-timer: Continuous
shooting
For details on [ ]/[ ]/[ ], see Using the Self-Timer.
579
Caution
[ ] enables approx. 30 shots/sec. continuous shooting speed when set to
[Electronic ] under these conditions.
• Shutter speed: 1/250 sec. or faster
•
Flicker reduction: None
Note that the continuous shooting speed may be slower than 30 shots/sec. if any of
the following occurs, or after certain operations in continuous shooting.
• Switching to [P] or [Tv] shooting mode, or applying settings that cause the
aperture value to change in [Fv] mode
•
Zooming is performed
•
Manual focusing is performed
• Servo AF changes the position in focus
• A power source other than Battery Pack LP-E6P or DC Coupler DR-E6P is
used
Various factors may lower the continuous shooting speed, such as battery level,
temperature, shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions, brightness, AF
operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting settings.
Visit the Canon website for details on lenses supporting the maximum continuous
shooting speed (
).
Continuous shooting speed with Servo AF may be slower depending on subject
conditions or the lens used.
The continuous shooting speed will be slower when shooting under flickering light.
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily disabled ( ).
Continuous shooting speed may be slower and image display in the viewfinder or
on the screen may stop under some shooting conditions.
Note
Continuous shooting speed indicated for each drive mode is the speed under
default camera settings. When using the electronic shutter, you can set the
continuous shooting speed for each drive mode in [
: Continuous shooting
speed] ( ).
580
Switching Continuous Shooting Modes
In electronic shutter mode, you can temporarily change the continuous shooting mode by
pressing the button assigned to [Switch cont. shooting modes] in [ : Customize
buttons for shooting]. This example is based on assigning [ ] to the < > button
( ).
1.
Assign [ ] to the < > button.
Select [Switch cont. shooting modes], then press the < >
button.
Select the continuous shooting mode to assign to the button, then
press < >.
2.
During standby, press the < > button.
In [ ] or [ ] drive mode, you can switch to [ ] continuous
shooting for as long as you press the button.
581
Using the Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph.
1.
Press the < > button ( ).
With an image displayed on the screen, press the < > button.
2.
Select the drive mode item.
Press the < > button to select the drive mode item.
582
3.
Select the self-timer.
Turn the < > dial to select the self-timer.
: Shoot in 10 sec.
: Shoot in 2 sec.
: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for the specified number of
shots*
* Set the number of shots taken continuously (2–10), either in [ : Drive
mode] or on the Quick Control screen.
4.
Take the picture.
Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely.
To check operation, look at the self-timer lamp, listen for beeps, or
watch the countdown in seconds on the screen.
Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and the camera beeps quickly
approx. 2 sec. before the picture is taken.
583
Note
[ ] is used to start shooting without touching the camera (to avoid camera shake)
when it is mounted on a tripod for shots such as still lifes or long exposures, for
example.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image ( ) to check focus and
exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock ( ) on an object at the
same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press < >.
Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
584
Remote Control Shooting
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
For remote control shooting, you can use an optional Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(Bluetooth) or an optional Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
(both wired).
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. First, pair the
camera and BR-E1 (
).
For operating instructions, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
Note
Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
BR-E1 can also be used for movie recording.
585
Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller
TC-80N3
Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely over a wired
connection.
For operating instructions, refer to the accessory instruction manual.
1.
Open the terminal cover.
2.
Connect the plug to the remote control terminal.
586
Playback
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and
movies—and introduces menu settings on the playback [ ] tab.
Caution
Normal display or configuration on this camera may not be possible for images
captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or
renamed on a computer.
Images that cannot be used with playback functions may be displayed.
• Tab Menus: Playback
• Image Playback
•
Magnified Image Display
•
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
•
Voice Memo Recording and Playback
•
Movie Playback
•
4K/8K Movie Frame Grab
•
Playback on a TV Set
•
Protecting Images
•
Erasing Images
•
Rotating Still Photos
•
Changing Movie Orientation Information
•
Rating Images
•
Protecting Images When Setting a Rating
•
Copying Still Photos
•
Print Ordering (DPOF)
• RAW Image Processing
•
In-Camera Upscaling
• Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images
• Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images
•
Converting HEIF to JPEG
• Slide Show
• VR Preview
•
Setting Image Search Conditions
• Resuming from Previous Playback
• Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection
•
Customizing Playback Information Display
• Displaying the Highlight Alert
587
Image processing
(1) RAW image processing
(2)
In-Camera Upscaling
(3) Resize
(4) Cropping
(5) HEIF→JPEG conversion
Caution
[ : RAW image processing] and [ : HEIF→JPEG conversion] are not
displayed in [ ] or [ ] mode.
Playback method
(1) Slide show
(2) VR preview
(3) Set image search conditions
(4)
View from last seen
(5) Magnification
(6) Blur/Out-of-Focus image detection
590
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
Shooting Information Display
Touch Playback
Single-Image Display
1.
Switch to playback.
Press the < > button.
The last image captured or played back is displayed.
2.
Browse images.
Turn the < > dial to browse images. Movies and still photos are
displayed one after another regardless of which was captured first.
Press the < > button to play the most recent movie, or to
display the still photo numbered with the highest file number and stored
in the folder with the highest folder number.
592
No information Basic information display
Shooting information display
Each time you press the < > button, the display will change.
3.
Exit image playback.
Press the < > button to exit image playback and return to shooting
standby.
Note
Lines indicating the image area are shown on RAW images captured with [ :
Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9
(aspect ratio)] ( ).
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), only
the filtered images will be displayed.
When played back, images captured with [ : Add cropping information] set to
an option other than [Disable] ( ) are displayed with lines indicating the image
area.
593
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback.
Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First,
press the <
> button to prepare for touch playback.
Browse images
Jump display
Index display
595
Magnified view
Note
You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
596
Magnified Image Display
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio
Setting the Initial Magnification Position
Magnification for Subsequent Images
You can magnify display of your captured images.
1.
Magnify the image.
Turn the < > dial clockwise.
The magnified view will appear. The position of the magnified area (1)
is displayed in the lower right of the screen, along with [ ].
To magnify images, turn the < > dial clockwise.
To reduce magnification, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. For
index display ( ), keep turning the dial.
597
2.
Scroll the image.
Use <
> to scroll around the magnified image.
Press the < > or < > button to exit magnified view.
Note
To switch to other images while maintaining magnified view, turn the < > dial.
Magnification is not available for movies.
You can also magnify images by pressing < > straight in, which has the same
effect as the < > button.
598
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio
You can set the initial magnification ratio.
1.
Select [ : Magnification] ( ).
2.
Select [Magnificatn (apx)].
3.
Select an option.
2x, 4x, 8x, 10x
Magnified view starts at the selected magnification ratio.
Actual size
Displays images essentially full-size, based on their pixels.
Same as last
Magnified view resumes from the same ratio as the last time you exited
magnified view with the < > or < > button.
599
Setting the Initial Magnification Position
You can set the initial magnification position.
1.
Select [ : Magnification] ( ).
2.
Select [Magnified position].
3.
Select an option.
From center
Magnified view starts from the center of the screen.
From focus pt
Magnified view starts from the AF point in focus. If the photo is taken
with manual focus, the magnified view starts from the center of the
screen.
600
Magnification for Subsequent Images
You can specify whether to maintain the same position for magnified view or to use the
position set in [Magnified position] when displaying subsequent images.
1.
Select [ : Magnification] ( ).
2.
Select [Maintain position].
3.
Select an option.
Enable
The current magnified position is maintained when displaying
subsequent images in magnified view.
Disable
The position set in [Magnified position] is used when displaying
subsequent images in magnified view.
601
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
1.
Press the < > button.
During image playback, press the < > button.
[ ] will be displayed in the lower right of the screen.
2.
Switch to the index display.
Turn the < > dial counterclockwise.
The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
Turning the < > dial further counterclockwise will switch the display
from 9 to 36 to 100 images. Turning the dial clockwise cycles through
100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
602
603
3.
Browse images.
Use < > or the < > dial to move the orange frame for image
selection.
Press < > in the index display to display the selected image in the
single-image display.
604
Voice Memo Recording and Playback
Recording Voice Memos
Memo Audio Quality
Playing Voice Memos
You can add (record) voice memos to your shots. Voice memos are recorded as WAV audio
files with the same file number as the image. They can be played back by the camera or a
computer.
Recording Voice Memos
1.
Switch to playback.
2.
Select an image to add a voice memo to.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to add a voice memo to.
605
3.
Record a voice memo.
Hold down the < > button for approx. 2 sec.
Keep holding down the button after [Recording memo...] appears, and
speak into the microphone (1). Each recording can be up to approx. 30
sec.
To end the voice memo, release the button.
A [ ] icon is displayed at the top of the screen.
606
Caution
Voice memos cannot be added to movies.
Voice memos cannot be recorded with an external microphone.
Voice memos cannot be added to images during transfer to an FTP server.
Note
Audio quality of voice memo recording can be changed in [ : Memo audio
quality].
To record voice memos longer than 30 sec., repeat step 3.
You can record a single voice memo during image review (immediately after
shooting) by following step 3.
607
Memo Audio Quality
You can set the audio quality for recording voice memos.
1.
Select [ : Memo audio quality] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
High quality (48 kHz)
Enables voice memo recording at the same level of audio quality as
movies.
Low quality (8 kHz)
Enables smaller voice memo file sizes than with [High quality (48
kHz)].
Caution
Additional voice memo recording for images with existing voice memos is
performed at the same level of audio quality as the first recording, regardless of this
setting.
608
Playing Voice Memos
This example is based on assigning voice memo playback to the < > button ( ).
1.
Assign [ / ] to the < > button.
Select [Play memo(Hold:Rec. memo)], then press < >.
2.
Select an image for voice memo playback.
Press the < > button to switch to image playback.
Turn the < > dial to select an image labeled with a [ ] icon at the
top of the screen.
609
3.
Play back the voice memo.
Press the < > button to play back the voice memo through the
speaker (2).
You can adjust the sound volume by turning the < > dial.
To stop playback, press the < > button.
Note
Multiple voice memos added to an image are played back consecutively.
Erasing images ( ) also erases any voice memos added to the images.
A voice memo added to an image can be erased without erasing the image ( ).
610
Movie Playback
1.
Switch to playback.
Press the < > button.
2.
Select a movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a movie to play.
In single-image display, the [ ] icon displayed in the upper left of
the screen indicates a movie.
In index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. Movies cannot be played back from index display, so press
<
> to switch to single-image display.
611
3.
In the single-image display, press < >.
4.
Play the movie.
Press < > or tap [ ].
The movie will start playing back. Sound is played through the speaker
(1).
You can pause playback and display the movie playback panel by
pressing < >. Press it again to resume playback.
Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume (even during playback).
612
Movie playback panel
Item Playback Operations
Skip backward
Skips backward approx. 1 sec. each time you turn the < > dial left.
Holding < > to the left rewinds the movie.
Previous frame Displays the previous frame each time you turn the < > dial left.
Play Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.
Next frame Displays the next frame each time you turn the < > dial right.
Skip forward
Skips forward approx. 1 sec. each time you turn the < > dial right.
Holding < > to the right fast-forwards the movie.
Playback position
hh:mm:ss
Playback time (hours:minutes:seconds, when [Movie play count] is
set to [Rec time])
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames, when [Movie play count]
is set to [Time code])
Volume
Turn the < > dial to adjust the speaker volume ( ).
You can also adjust the volume by pressing < > vertically.
Press the < > button to go to the next screen ( ).
Press the < > button to return to single-image display.
613
Controls not on the previous screen are as follows.
Item Playback Operations
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < > dial. The slow
motion speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K or 8K movies. Enables you to extract the
current frame and save it as a JPEG or HEIF still image ( ).
Press the < > button to return to the previous screen.
Caution
Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback ( ), because volume cannot be adjusted by pressing
< > up or down.
Movie playback may stop if the card's read speed is too slow or movie files have
corrupted frames.
614
4K/8K Movie Frame Grab
From 4K or 8K movies, you can select individual frames to save as JPEG or HEIF still
images. This is referred to as “frame grabbing.”
1.
Select a 4K or 8K movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a movie in 4K or 8K quality.
In index display, press < > to switch to single-image display.
2.
In the single-image display, press < >.
The movie playback panel will appear.
3.
Select a frame to grab.
Use the movie playback panel to select the frame to grab as a still
image.
For movie playback panel instructions, see Movie playback panel.
615
4.
Press the < > button.
5.
Select [ ].
6.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image.
HEIF images are saved if you grab frames from movies recorded with
[ : HDR shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ].
Check the destination folder and image file number.
7.
Select the image to display.
Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image].
616
Caution
Frame grabbing is not possible from the following 4K movies, or from 8K movies.
• RAW movies
• Movies recorded with [ : Custom Picture] set
• Movies recorded with other cameras
Frame grabbing is not possible while the camera is connected to a computer.
617
Playback on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a television with a commercially available HDMI cable, you can
play back the captured still photos and movies on the television.
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, confirm that [
: System frequency] is
correctly set to [59.94Hz:NTSC] or [50.00Hz:PAL] (depending on the video system of
your television).
1.
Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.
Use the cable protector ( ) and insert the HDMI cable in the camera's
< > terminal.
2.
Connect the HDMI cable to the television.
Connect the HDMI cable to the television's HDMI IN port.
3.
Turn on the television and switch the television's video input to select
the connected port.
4.
Set the camera's power switch to < >.
618
5.
Press the < > button.
Images are now displayed on the television, with nothing displayed on
the camera screen.
The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
Caution
Adjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television,
turn off the camera and television.
Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Do not connect any other device's output to the camera's < >
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
It may take some time before images are displayed if the card contains movies
recorded with different settings, even if you change the [
: HDMI resolution]
setting.
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a
television.
Note
It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [ : HDMI
resolution] to an option other than [Auto] ( ). Note that if the card contains
movies recorded with different settings, it may take some time before images are
displayed.
619
Protecting Images
Protecting Individual Images via the Menu
Specifying the Range of Images to Protect
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Caution
If you format the card ( ), the protected images will also be erased.
Note
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To
erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
If you erase all the images ( ), only the protected images will remain. This is
convenient when you want to erase all unneeded images at once.
Voice memos can be added to protected images. For images with existing voice
memos, additional voice memo recording is also possible.
Protecting Individual Images via the Menu
1.
Select [ : Protect images] ( ).
2.
Select [Select images].
620
3.
Select the image to protect.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to protect.
4.
Protect the image.
Press < > to protect the selected image, after which it will be labeled
with a [ ] icon (1) at the top of the screen.
To cancel protection and clear the [ ] icon, press < > again.
To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
621
Specifying the Range of Images to Protect
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to protect all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Protect images].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). The images in the specified
range will be protected and the [ ] icon will appear.
To select another image to protect, repeat step 2.
622
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ : Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel protection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images
on card].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all found].
•
If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
protected.
•
If you select [Unprotect all found], the protection of all the filtered images will be
canceled.
Note
Protecting or unprotecting images by selecting [All images on card] or [Unprotect
all images on card] applies to the card selected in [
: Record func+card/folder
sel.] (in either [ Record/play]/[ Record/play] or [ Play]/[ Play]).
623
Erasing Images
Erasing Images Individually
Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together
Specifying the Range of Images to Erase
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can either select and erase unnecessary images individually or erase them in one
batch. Protected images ( ) will not be erased.
Caution
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer
need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing Images Individually
1.
Press the < > button.
2.
Select the image to be erased.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to erase.
3.
Press the < > button.
624
4.
Erase the images.
JPEG/HEIF/RAW images or movies
Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG/RAW+HEIF images
Select an option.
For images with voice memos, you can also erase just the voice memo
during image playback by selecting [Erase voice memo].
Series of images captured in [ ], [ ], or [ ] drive mode are
erased when you select [Erase scene including image] during
playback.
625
Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once.
1.
Select [ : Erase images] ( ).
2.
Select [Select and erase images].
3.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to erase, then press < >.
To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3.
4.
Press the < > button.
626
5.
Erase the images.
Select [OK].
627
Specifying the Range of Images to Erase
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to erase all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Erase images].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select another image to be erased, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the < > button.
628
4.
Erase the images.
Select [OK].
629
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ : Erase images],
all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].
•
If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
erased.
Note
To erase all the images including protected images, format the card ( ).
Erasing images by selecting [All images on card] applies to the card selected in
[
: Record func+card/folder sel.] (in either [ Record/play]/[ Record/play]
or [ Play]/[ Play]).
630
Rotating Still Photos
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1.
Select [ : Rotate stills] ( ).
2.
Select an image to rotate.
Turn the < > dial to select the image.
3.
Rotate the image.
Each time you press < >, the image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90°→270°→0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.
631
Changing Movie Orientation Information
You can manually edit movie playback orientation information (which determines which side
is up).
1.
Select [ : Change mov rotate info] ( ).
2.
Select a movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a movie with orientation information to
change.
3.
Change the orientation information.
As you watch the camera and icon in the upper left of the screen,
press < > to specify which side is up. Each press of < > edits the
movie rotation information as follows: [ ] → [ ] → [ ].
633
Rating Images
Rating Individual Images with the < > Button
Rating Individual Images via the Menu
Rating by Specifying the Range
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 ( / / / / ). This function is called
rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.
Rating Individual Images with the <
> Button
1.
Select the image to be rated.
Press the < > button to switch to image playback.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to rate.
2.
Rate the image.
Press the < > button to rate the image.
To rate another image, repeat steps 1 and 2.
635
4.
Rate the image.
Press < >, and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the
screen shown above.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then press < >.
When you append a rating mark to the image, the number beside the
set rating will increase by one.
To rate another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
637
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to rate all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Rating].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select other images, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the < > button.
638
4.
Rate the image.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK].
All the images in the specified range will be rated (same rating) at
once.
639
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [ : Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all
the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating, then select [OK].
When you are not rating images or canceling the rating, select [ ].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
rated as specified.
640
Note
Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have that
rating.
With [ : Set image search conditions] and [ : Image jump w/ ], you can
display only the images given a specific rating.
641
Protecting Images When Setting a Rating
Images you rate at certain levels can be automatically protected after you rate them.
1.
Select [ : Protect when setting the rating] ( ).
2.
Select [On], then press the < > button.
3.
Select the rating levels to protect.
Use the < > dial to select rating levels to protect.
Each press of < > clears or applies a checkmark [ ].
Repeat this step to add a checkmark [ ] to all rating levels to protect,
then select [OK].
Note
These images remain protected even if you clear their rating.
642
Copying Still Photos
Copying Individual Images
Copying a Range of Images
Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy the images on one card to the other card to save duplicates.
All images in a folder or on a card can also be copied at the same time.
Caution
Movies recorded by this camera cannot be copied.
For extensive copying, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
If the target folder or card already has an image with the same file number, [Skip
image and continue], [Replace existing image], and [Cancel copy] are
displayed. Select a copying method, then press < >.
•
[Skip image and continue]: Any images with the same file number are
skipped and not copied.
•
[Replace existing image]: Any images with the same file number (including
protected images) are overwritten.
Overwriting images that had print order information (
) will require you to set the
print order information again.
Print order and image transfer information is not included in copies of images.
Shooting is not possible during the copying process. Select [Cancel] before
shooting.
Note
Images are copied from the card selected in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] (in
either [ Record/play]/[ Record/play] or [ Play]/[ Play]).
Copies of images have the same file name as the original image.
With [Sel.Image], images in multiple folders cannot be copied at the same time.
Select images to copy from one folder at a time.
Any voice memos added to images are also copied.
643
Copying Individual Images
1.
Select [ : Image copy] ( ).
2.
Select [Sel.Image].
Check the source and target card numbers and the free space on the
target card.
Select [Sel.Image], then press < >.
3.
Select the folder.
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest file number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest file number
Select the source folder, then press < >.
When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the
screen.
644
4.
Select an image to copy.
(1) Total images selected
Turn the < > dial to select an image to copy, then press < >.
To select another image to copy, repeat step 4.
5.
Press the < > button.
6.
Select [OK].
Check the target card, then select [OK].
645
7.
Select the target folder.
Select the folder to copy the image to, then press < >.
To create a new folder, select [Create folder].
8.
Select [OK].
Check the information about the source and target card, then select
[OK].
Results are displayed after copying is finished. Select [OK] to return to
the screen in step 2.
646
Copying a Range of Images
You can copy all specified images at once by selecting the first and last images in a range
as you look at images in the index display.
1.
Select [Range].
2.
Select the folder.
Select the source folder, then press < >.
When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the
screen.
647
3.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select another image to copy, repeat step 3.
4.
Press the < > button.
Images in the specified range are now copied.
648
Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Selecting [Sel. ] or [All images] in [ : Image copy] copies all the images it
contains.
649
Print Ordering (DPOF)
Setting Print Options
Selecting Images for Printing
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card
according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You
can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc.
The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing. (They cannot be set
individually for each image.)
Setting Print Options
1.
Select [ : Print order] ( ).
2.
Select [Set up].
650
3.
Set the options as desired.
Set [Print type], [Date], and [File No.] options.
Print type
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed
on one sheet.
Both
Prints both the standard and index
prints.
Date
On
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured
image.
Off
File No.
On
[On] imprints the file number.
Off
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button.
Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to specify the images to be
printed.
651
Caution
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
( ), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case, resize the
image ( ), then print the index print.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not be
imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the same
time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are set.
You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images from the
card for printing.
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the
images as you specified. When using a printer, refer to the printer's instruction
manual. When requesting service from a photofinisher, ask in advance.
Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF settings
set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten inadvertently.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.
652
Selecting Images for Printing
Selecting images
Select and specify the images individually.
Press the <
> button to save the print order to the card.
Standard/Both
(1) Quantity
(2) Total images selected
Press < > to print a copy of the displayed image. By turning the < > dial, you can
set a print quantity of up to 99 copies.
Index
(3) Checkmark
(4) Index icon
Press <
> to add a checkmark [ ] to the box. The image will be included in the index
print.
653
Selecting multiple images
Select range
Select [Select range] in [Multiple]. Selecting the first and last images of the range
marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [ ], and one copy of each image
will be specified for printing.
All images in a folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the
images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images
in the folder will be canceled.
All images on a card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the card will be specified
for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images on the
card.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ) and you
select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found
images].
All found images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images filtered by the search
conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered images will be
cleared.
Caution
RAW/HEIF images and movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW/
HEIF images and movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
654
RAW Image Processing
Magnified View
Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios
RAW Image Processing Options
You can process or images with the camera to create JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW images are not affected, so different conditions can be applied to create JPEG or HEIF
images.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.
Caution
Processing into HEIF is not available for or images captured with
expanded ISO speed (L or H).
1.
Select [ : RAW image processing] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
You can select multiple images to process at once.
655
Select images
Turn the < > dial to select images to process, then press < >.
Press the < > button.
Select range
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To process other images, repeat this step.
Press the < > button.
656
3.
Set the desired processing conditions.
Use shot settings
Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture.
Images captured with [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ]
are processed to create HEIFs, and images captured with this function
set to [Disable] are processed to create JPEGs.
Set up processing→JPEG/Set up processing→HEIF
Use < > to select an item.
Turn the < > or < > dial to switch the setting.
Press < > to access the function setting screen.
To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the < >
button.
Comparison screen
You can switch between the [After change] and [Shot settings]
screens by pressing the < > button and turning the < > dial.
Items in orange on the [After change] screen have been modified
since the time of capture.
Press the < > button to return to the processing conditions
screen.
657
4.
Save.
When using [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing→
HEIF], select [ ] (Save).
Read the message and select [OK].
If there are other images for processing, select [Yes].
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
658
Magnified View
You can magnify images displayed for [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing
→HEIF] by pressing the < > button. The magnification ratio varies depending on the
[Image quality] setting. With < >, you can scroll around the magnified image.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <
> button again.
Caution
Results of processing under the following settings are only applied in magnified
view. Results are not applied in normal display.
• [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High]
• [Neural network Noise Reduction] set to [Enable]
659
RAW Image Processing Options
: Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.
: White balance ( )
You can select the white balance. Selecting [ ] enables you to select [Auto:
Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [ ], you can set the color
temperature.
: Picture Style ( )
You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other
parameters.
* [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] are not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
: Clarity ( )
You can adjust clarity in a range of –4 to +4.
* Not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
: Auto Lighting Optimizer ( )
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.
: Adj face lighting
With automatic, optimal adjustment of lighting on faces, you can effectively correct
images captured with oblique lighting or illuminated by flash.
* Adjustment of face lighting is not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
Caution
When adjustment of face lighting is set
Suitable adjustment may not be possible in some shooting situations unless faces
can be detected in detail and are not too dark.
Noise may increase.
Adjustment may be less effective at high ISO speeds.
661
: High ISO speed NR ( )
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the effect is difficult
to discern, magnify the image ( ).
: Neural network Noise Reduction
You can obtain clearer images with less noise through noise reduction processing that
applies deep learning.
Caution
Processing with Neural network Noise Reduction may take some time.
: Image quality ( )
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG or HEIF image.
: Color space ( )
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible
with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color
space is set.
* [ ] is displayed when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set but is not an option for
selection.
: Lens aberr correction
: Peripheral illum corr ( )
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics
can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is
difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ) and check the four corners. Less correction is
applied than for maximum correction with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, ).
If the effects of correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the
peripheral illumination correction.
: Distortion correction ( )
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. The image periphery will be trimmed in the corrected
image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the sharpness with the Picture
Style's sharpness parameter setting as necessary.
662
: Digital Lens Optimizer ( )
Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution by
applying optical design values. To check the effect of setting this option to [High] or
[Standard], use magnified view (
). Without magnification, the effect when Digital Lens
Optimizer is set to [High] is not applied. Selecting [High] or [Standard] processes
images as if both chromatic aberration and diffraction were set to [Enable], although
these options are not displayed.
: Chromatic aberr corr ( )
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject's outline) due to the lens
characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ).
: Diffraction correction ( )
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (
).
Caution
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be intensified
with the effects of adjustment.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, image edges may be emphasized, under
some shooting conditions. Adjust sharpness of the Picture Style as needed.
Processing with [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] may take some time.
Note
Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the
effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions,
etc.
RAW movies cannot be processed. Process them with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
663
In-Camera Upscaling
Converting Individual Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Convert
This deep-learning processing can double the vertical and horizontal pixel counts and
quadruple the total pixel count of your JPEG or HEIF images. Upscaling is available for
images captured as JPEGs or HEIFs with an image size of .
Caution
Image processing may take some time.
Shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
These images cannot be upscaled.
•
Images captured with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] set to an option other
than [Full-frame]
•
RAW images
•
Images from cameras other than an EOS R5 Mark II
•
Images already upscaled
•
Images processed on a camera or in editing software (resized, cropped, or
extracted)
The effect may not look as expected for images from some shooting situations.
Note
Upscaled images are labeled [ ].
Upscaled images are saved in the same format (JPEG or HEIF) as the original
image.
664
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the upscaled image.
If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
666
Specifying the Range of Images to Convert
1.
Select [Select range].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select other images, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the < > button.
667
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the upscaled image.
If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
668
Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images
You can resize a JPEG or HEIF image to reduce the pixel count and save it as a new image.
Resizing is available for , , or JPEGs or HEIFs (in sizes except ), including those
captured in RAW+JPEG and RAW+HEIF shooting. images and RAW images or movies
cannot be resized.
1.
Select [ : Resize] ( ).
2.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to resize.
3.
Select the desired image size.
Press < > to display the image sizes.
Select the desired image size (1).
669
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the resized image.
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.
670
Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images
You can crop a captured JPEG/HEIF image and save it as a new image. Cropping is
available for JPEG or HEIF images. RAW images and frame-grab images from 4K or 8K
movies cannot be cropped.
1.
Select [ : Cropping] ( ).
2.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to crop.
Press < > to display the cropping frame.
671
3.
Set the cropping frame.
The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped.
Resizing the cropping frame size
Turn the < > dial to resize the cropping frame size. The smaller the
cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Correcting tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the < > dial to select [ ],
then press < >. While checking tilt relative to the grid, turn the < >
dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right arrow (in 0.5°
increments) in the upper left of the screen to correct tilt. After
completing the tilt correction, press < >.
Changing the cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation
Turn the < > dial and select [ ]. Each press of < > changes the
cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation.
Moving the cropping frame
Use < > to move the cropping frame vertically or horizontally.
4.
Check the image area to be cropped.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. The image area
to crop is displayed.
672
5.
Save.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >.
Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
To upscale images that will be cropped, so that they will be saved at a
higher resolution, press the < > button, then set [ ] to [Enable]
(
).
•
The current [ ] setting (enable/disable) is retained even after
cropping, when you select other images. To change the setting,
press the <
> button again.
•
The resulting image size after upscaling is shown to the right of
[
].
•
Image processing may take some time.
•
Shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Caution
The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the angle
set for tilt correction.
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
AF point display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended
to the cropped images.
Available aspect ratios vary depending on whether you use [ : Cropping] or
[
: Add cropping information].
673
Converting HEIF to JPEG
Converting Individual Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Convert
You can convert HEIF images captured in HDR shooting and save them as JPEG images.
Caution
Some scenes may look different after conversion if the original and converted
images are compared.
Conversion is not available for upscaled or cropped images, or for frame-grab
images from 4K or 8K movies.
Note
HEIF images that have been converted to JPEGs are labeled [ ].
Converting Individual Images
1.
Select [ : HEIF→JPEG conversion] ( ).
2.
Select [Select images].
674
3.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select an HEIF image to convert to JPEG, then
press < >.
To select another image to convert, repeat step 3.
Press the < > button to convert to JPEG.
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the JPEG image.
If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].
675
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
676
Specifying the Range of Images to Convert
1.
Select [Select range].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select another image to convert, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the < > button.
677
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the JPEG image.
If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
678
3.
Set the playback as desired.
Select [Set up].
Display time
Repeat
Set the [Display time] and [Repeat] (repeated playback) settings for
the still photos.
After completing the settings, press the < > button.
680
4.
Start the slide show.
Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start.
All movies are played first, followed by all still photos.
5.
Exit the slide show.
To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the
< > button.
Note
To pause the slide show, press < >. During pause, [ ] will be displayed in the
upper left of the screen. Press < > again to resume the slide show.
During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the < > button to
switch the display format ( ).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the < >
dial.
During auto playback or when playback is paused, you can turn the < > dial to
view another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may differ depending on the image.
681
VR Preview
You can check a simulated display on the camera screen of how VR content captured with
lenses in the EOS VR System will appear on VR display devices.
Note
For details on recording VR content, refer to the VR Recording Guide.
1.
Select [ : VR preview] ( ).
2.
Choose a VR image.
3.
Check the simulated VR display.
To switch between left and right viewpoints of the VR content, press
< > straight in.
To move the viewpoint, press < > in other directions.
To center the viewpoint again, press and hold the < > button and
press < > straight in.
To magnify/reduce images, turn the < > dial.
682
Movie playback controls
Item Playback Operations
Skip backward Skips backward approx. 1 sec. each time you turn the < > dial left.
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you turn the < > dial left
while holding down the < > button.
Play Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.
Next frame
Displays the next frame each time you turn the < > dial right while
holding down the < > button.
Skip forward Skips forward approx. 1 sec. each time you turn the < > dial right.
683
Setting Image Search Conditions
Clearing the Search Conditions
You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image
search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. You can also
protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other operations to filtered images.
1.
Select [ : Set image search conditions] ( ).
2.
Set the search conditions.
Turn the < > dial to select an option.
Turn the < > dial to set the option.
A checkmark [ ] (1) is appended to the left of the option. (Specified as
the search condition.)
If you select the option and press the < > button, the checkmark
[
] will be removed (which cancels the search condition).
After completing the settings, press < >.
Option Description
Rating
Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
Date
Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
Folder
Displays images in the selected folder.
Protect
Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
Type of file (1)
Displays images of the selected file type.
Type of file (2)
684
3.
Apply the search conditions.
Read the message displayed, then select [OK].
The search condition is applied.
4.
Display the found images.
Press the < > button.
Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played
back.
When the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer
yellow frame (2).
Caution
If no images match the search conditions, < > cannot be pressed in step 2.
For movies, searches apply to files in the XFVC or CRM folder.
Searching does not apply to movie files in the DCIM folder.
685
Note
Search conditions may be cleared after operations involving camera power or card
changes and editing, adding, or erasing images.
Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.
Clearing the Search Conditions
Access the screen in step 2, then press the <
> button to clear all the search conditions.
686
Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection
Configuring Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection
Playback Applying Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection
This feature can automatically determine how blurry or out-of focus images are, based
mainly on faces in JPEG/HEIF images of people. By setting a level of blurriness or lack of
focus, you can sort, protect, or rate all images at that level.
(1) : Much blurring/lack of focus, : Little blurring/lack of focus
(2) Frame indicating blur/out-of-focus detection
When shooting, set the JPEG/HEIF image size to or if you will use this feature.
You can check this image evaluation during playback on the basic information display or
shooting information display screen.
In index display, the (1) icon remains in the upper left of the playback screen regardless
of the current image.
688
Caution
Blur/out-of-focus detection is not performed for images captured under these
conditions.
• RAW images, or JPEG/HEIF images from RAW processing
• Without using the electronic shutter
•
Using manual focus
• [ : Subject to detect]: [None]
• Focus bracketing
• Multiple exposures
• Set to expanded ISO speed (H)
• Using lenses compatible with the EOS VR System
• [ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] still photo shooting
No icons or detection frames indicating the amount of blurring are shown in
playback of images captured in RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF shooting, because
RAW images are used for this playback. To check icons or detection frames
indicating the amount of blurring when [ Rec options] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec. separately], select the card containing the JPEGs
or HEIFs in [
Play].
Blur/out-of-focus detection results are not applied to images saved by using these
functions.
•
Resizing
•
Cropping
•
In-camera upscaling
•
HEIF→JPEG conversion
The following situations may prevent blur/out-of-focus detection or make the results
inaccurate.
•
Faces are covered by objects such as helmets, sunglasses, or fashion
accessories
•
Faces are partially hidden behind netting or water droplets
•
Subjects are not directly facing the camera
• Faces are very small or large relative to the screen
• Faces are at the edge of the screen
•
Faces are too dark or bright
• Several faces are close to each other
• A person shown is not recognized as the main subject
•
Shooting at high ISO speeds
• Shooting people shown in photo prints or displayed on a screen
Blur/out-of-focus detection may be applied to non-human subjects, people who are
not the main subject, or body parts other than faces. This is more likely to happen
after any significant changes in the main subject's posture.
689
Note
In DPP, you can sort and filter images based on the camera's blur/out-of-focus
detection results.
690
Show detect. frame
Detection level
Levels of blur/out-of-focus detection are based on these criteria.
Standard:
[
] (little blurring/lack of focus) is displayed for images that are fairly
clear and in focus when viewed with the naked eye at actual size.
High:
[ ] (little blurring/lack of focus) is displayed for images that are clearer
and more in focus than [Standard].
Low:
[ ] (little blurring/lack of focus) is also displayed for images that are
less clear and in focus than [Standard], excluding images that are
greatly blurred or out of focus.
After completing the settings, press the < > button.
Caution
Image evaluation by the camera may not match a subjective impression with the
naked eye. This discrepancy may be greater when the level is set to [High].
Ultimately, images should be evaluated visually to decide.
Consider changing the detection level if image evaluation by the camera does not
match your impression of images.
692
Playback Applying Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection
You can configure playback so that turning the < > dial displays images determined to
be only a little blurry or out of focus.
Quick Control
Press the < > button and set [Image jump w/ ] to [Display image with less blur/
Out-of-Focus].
Using <
> to set
Press < > horizontally to set to [Display img with less blur].
Note
You can also use the < > dial to configure image display in [ : Image jump
w/ ] ( ).
693
Customizing Playback Information Display
Histogram
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during image playback.
1.
Select [ : Playback information display] ( ).
2.
Add a checkmark [ ] next to the number of screens to display.
Select numbers with the < > dial.
Press < > to clear a checkmark [ ]. Press it again to add a
checkmark [ ].
Repeat these steps to add a checkmark [ ] to the number of each
screen to display, then select [OK].
Your selected information can be accessed by pressing the < >
button during playback, or by using < > when shooting information is
displayed.
694
Histogram
The histograms show signal levels across the tonal range. Brightness display (for checking
the general exposure level and overall gradation) and RGB display (for checking saturation
and gradation of red, green, and blue) are available. You can switch the histogram displayed
by pressing the < > button when [ ] is displayed in the lower left of the [ :
Playback information display] screen.
695
[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level, with
the horizontal axis indicating the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the
right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image, and the more pixels there are
toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left, detail in
shadows will be lost, and if there are too many pixels on the right, detail in highlights will
be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall
gradation.
Sample histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
696
[RGB] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color's brightness
level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue), with the horizontal axis indicating the
color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis
indicating the pixel count at each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color, and the more pixels there are
toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the corresponding color information will be lacking, and if there are too many pixels
on the right, the color will be too saturated, without gradation. By checking the image's
RGB histogram, you can see the color's saturation and gradation conditions, as well as
the white balance bias.
697
Displaying the Highlight Alert
You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback screen. To
obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be
faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again
for a better result.
1.
Select [ : Highlight alert] ( ).
2.
Select [Enable].
698
Note
Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate
movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting.
The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie
play count], so that these settings always match.
The “frame” count is not displayed during movie recording or playback.
702
Communication Functions
This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a smartphone or computer, send
images, and control the camera remotely.
Caution
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by erroneous
network settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable
for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
Take security measures that you deem necessary when using a network, at your
discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by
unauthorized access or other security breaches.
•
Tab Menus: Communication Functions
•
Available Network Features
•
Preparing to Use Communication Functions
•
Network-Specific Preparation
•
Transferring Images to an FTP Server
•
Connecting to EOS Utility
•
Uploading Images to image.canon
•
Syncing Time Between Cameras
•
Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet
•
Live Streaming
•
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
•
Using Camera Control API (CCAPI)
•
GPS Device Settings
•
Linked Shooting
•
EOS Multi Remote Settings
• Basic Communication Settings
•
Checking and Editing Network Settings
• Airplane Mode
• Bluetooth Settings
•
Renaming the Camera
• Reference
• Error Details
•
Responding to Error Messages
• Troubleshooting Guide
• Wireless Communication Precautions
703
Tab Menus: Communication Functions
Network settings
(1)
Network settings
(2)
Airplane mode
(3) Bluetooth settings
(4)
Camera name
(5) Error details
(6) MAC address
Network function
(1) Transfer images to FTP server
(2)
Connect to EOS Utility
(3) Upload to image.canon
(4)
Sync time between cameras
(5) Connect to smartphone(tablet)
(6) Live streaming
(7)
Connect to Wireless Remote
705
Network function
(1) Camera Control API
Various settings
(1) GPS device settings
(2)
Choose USB connection app
(3) Save/load comm. settings on card
(4) Reset communication settings
Caution
Some menu items cannot be configured while the camera is connected to
computers or other devices via an interface cable.
The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera's power to < >,
or open the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.
Auto power off is not activated while connected to a network.
706
Available Network Features
Features Available over a Network, and Connection Methods (Other than Wireless
Remote Control)
Transferring images to an FTP server ( )
By connecting to an FTP server, you can send images on the camera to a computer.
With FTP transfer, you can automatically transfer each image to the FTP server as you
shoot or transfer a set of images together.
Connecting to EOS Utility ( )
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera, control the
camera, and perform other operations.
Uploading images to image.canon ( )
Link the camera to image.canon to send images directly from the camera.
Syncing time between cameras ( )
You can set the sender camera time on up to 10 receiver cameras.
Connecting to a smartphone or tablet ( )
Using the Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (hereafter, collectively referred to
as “smartphones”), you can browse images on the camera, shoot remotely, and perform
other operations. After pairing the camera with a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone,* you
only need to use the smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi.
You can also use Content Transfer Professional to transfer images from the camera to FTP
servers over a mobile network connection.
* Smartphones supporting Bluetooth low energy technology.
Live streaming (
)
You can live-stream images from the camera.
Connecting to a wireless remote control ( )
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately,
)
via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
707
Using Camera Control API (CCAPI) ( )
Camera Control API is an HTTP-based application programming interface for controlling
Canon cameras over a network. You can connect the camera to a smartphone (or tablet) or
computer and control the camera from an application using CCAPI.
Linked shooting (
)
Linked shooting is possible by shooting from a sender camera linked via wireless LAN to
multiple receiver cameras.
EOS Multi Remote ( )
Enables use as a sender or receiver camera for EOS Multi Remote.
Features Available over a Network, and Connection
Methods (Other than Wireless Remote Control)
Available Features
Connection Method
Wired LAN Wi-Fi
Transferring images to an FTP server ○ ○
Connecting to EOS Utility ○ ○
Uploading images to image.canon ○
Syncing time between cameras ○ ○
Connecting to a smartphone or tablet ○
Live streaming ○
Camera Control API (CCAPI) ○ ○
Linked shooting ○
EOS Multi Remote ○ ○
Note
Use of wired LAN with the camera requires Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP (both sold separately).
708
Preparing to Use Communication Functions
Transferring images to an FTP server
A computer running one of the following OSes is required. The computer must also be set
up in advance to function as an FTP server.
Windows 11
Windows 10 (ver. 1607 or later)
For instructions on setting up the computer to function as an FTP server, refer to
documentation for your computer.
Connecting to EOS Utility
A computer with EOS Utility (EOS software) installed is required.
For EOS Utility installation instructions, see Installing Computer Software.
Uploading images to image.canon
A smartphone with a browser and internet connection is required.
For instructions on how to use image.canon services and details on countries and
regions where it is available, visit the image.canon site (https://image.canon/).
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
Syncing time between cameras
Prepare one sender camera and up to 10 receiver cameras.
Connecting to a smartphone or tablet
Install the app on an Android smartphone or an iPhone ( ).
The app can be installed from Google Play or App Store.
Live streaming
Check the streaming requirements and terms of service in advance on the streaming site.
709
Linked shooting
The following cameras or combinations of cameras and accessories can be used in linked
shooting.
EOS R1
EOS R5 Mark II
EOS-1D X Mark III with Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E9 connected
EOS R5 with Wireless File Transmitter WFT-R10 connected
710
Network-Specific Preparation
Wired LAN Connections
Wi-Fi Connections
Wired LAN Connections
Use of wired LAN with the camera requires Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP (both sold separately).
Connect a LAN cable to the Ethernet RJ-45 terminals of the battery grip and the
computer or access point.
Battery Grip BG-R20EP
Cooling Fan CF-R20EP
711
Caution
Use a highly shielded Category 6A or higher STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Gigabit
LAN cable.
712
Wi-Fi Connections
When using the camera in infrastructure mode, make sure the smartphone or computer you
will use can connect to the access point.
Caution
Transferring movies
Each movie file is large, and transferring large files over Wi-Fi may take some time.
Referring to Wireless Communication Precautions, arrange your network
environment for stable communication between devices and the access point.
713
Transferring Images to an FTP Server
Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings
Editing/Deleting Devices for Connections
Reconnecting Using Connection Information
Transferring Images Individually
Transferring Multiple Images at Once
Using the [ Image sel./transfer] Screen
Adding a Caption Before Transfer
Auto Retry If Transfer Fails
Using the Power Saving Function
Protecting Images after Transfer
Viewing Transferred Images
Transferring Image with Content Transfer Professional
By connecting to an FTP server, you can send images on the camera to a computer.
With FTP transfer, you can automatically transfer each image to the FTP server as you
shoot or transfer a set of images together.
714
Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings
For secure FTP transfer using a root certificate, import a root certificate ( ).
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
3.
Select [Add a device to connect to].
715
4.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Selecting [Configure offline] will keep the camera disconnected from
the network after configuration.
5.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when settings are already registered on
the camera, you can apply the registered settings.
716
6.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
7.
Save the settings.
Press < >.
After you finish the communication settings, configure FTP transfer.
8.
Select an option.
For secure FTP transfer using a root certificate, select [FTPS].
For secure FTP transfer over an SSH connection, select [SFTP].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
717
9.
Configure the FTP server settings.
Select [Address setting] or [Port number setting], then press < >
to display the setting screen.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
10.
Configure the SSH login authentication settings.
Displayed if you selected [SFTP] as the FTP mode.
Select [User name] or [Password], then press < > to display the
setting screen.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
718
11.
Select an option.
Displayed if you selected [FTP] or [FTPS] as the FTP mode.
Enable this setting in network environments protected by a firewall.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If an Error 41 (Cannot connect to FTP server) is displayed while you
are configuring the connection, setting [Passive mode] to [Enable]
may resolve it.
12.
Configure proxy server settings.
Displayed if you selected [FTP] as the FTP mode.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
719
13.
Select an option.
Displayed if you selected [FTP] or [FTPS] as the FTP mode.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Note
If you have selected [Login password], enter the name and
password.
720
14.
Specify a target folder.
Select [Root folder] to have images saved in the root folder, as
specified in FTP server settings (
).
Select [Select folder] to access the setting screen.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Note
When the following message appears, select [OK] to trust the
target server.
If you have selected [Select folder], enter the name of the
destination folder.
721
15.
Press < >.
The FTP settings are saved.
This screen is not displayed if you selected [Configure offline] as the
method of configuration.
Connection settings for FTP transfer are now complete.
Note
When images to transfer are selected, the following screen is displayed. Select
[OK] to transfer the images ( ).
722
[ Communicating] screen
Image sel./transfer
Images can be transferred to an FTP server ( ).
Transfer with caption
You can add a registered caption to individual images before transfer ( ).
FTP transfer settings
You can configure settings related to FTP transfer and power saving.
•
Automatic transfer
•
Images to transfer
•
Transfer with SET
•
Set root certif
•
Power saving
•
Protect images
Confirm settings
You can check setting details.
Error details
After any network connection errors, you can check the error details (
).
Disconnect
Terminates the network connection.
723
Importing a root certificate for FTPS
If you specified [FTPS] FTP mode when configuring connection settings, the root certificate
used by the FTP server must be imported to the camera.
Only the root certificate with a file name of “ROOT.CER,” “ROOT.CRT,” or “ROOT.PEM”
can be imported to the camera.
Only one root certificate file can be imported to the camera. Insert a card containing the
root certificate file in advance.
The priority card selected for [ Record/play], [ Record/play], [ Play], or [
Play] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is used to import a certificate.
It may not be possible to trust servers you try to connect to in FTPS connections with a
self-signed certificate.
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
3.
Select [FTP transfer settings].
724
4.
Select [Set root certif].
5.
Select [Load root certif from card].
6.
Select [OK].
The root certificate is imported.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to return to the [Set root certif]
screen.
Note
To delete the root certificate imported to the camera, select [Delete root
certificate] on the screen in step 5. To check who it was issued to and issued by,
the period of validity, and other information, select [View root certificate details].
725
Editing/Deleting Devices for Connections
Before editing or deleting connection settings for other devices, end the Wi-Fi connection.
This section covers items not described in Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings.
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [Edit/delete device].
3.
Select the device.
Select the device for the connection, then press < >.
4.
Select an option.
726
Changing device nicknames
You can change the nickname of devices the camera connects to.
FTP server
You can configure FTP server settings.
Directory structure
Default
The server root folder is used for image storage. If you have created a subfolder in the
root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, images are saved in that folder.
Camera
Automatically creates a folder structure matching that of the camera's (such as A/DCIM/
100EOSR1) in the server's root folder for image storage. If you have created a subfolder
in the root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, a folder structure such as A/
DCIM/100EOSR1 is automatically created in that folder for image storage.
Overwrite same file
Disable
If there is already a file with the same name in the target folder on the FTP server, the
new file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore and a number, as in
IMG_0003_1.JPG.
Enable
Any files with the same name in the target folder on the FTP server are overwritten by
transferred images.
727
Note
Even if [Enable] is selected when you resend images that could not be transferred
initially, existing images may not be overwritten in some cases.
If this happens, the new file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore,
a letter, and a numeral, as in IMG_0003_a1.JPG.
Trusting target servers
Set to [Enable] if you prefer to connect to FTP servers even when trust cannot be
established based on the root certificate used. In this case, take suitable security measures.
Communication settings
You can change communication settings as needed (
).
Deleting connection information
You can delete the connection information.
728
Transferring Images Individually
Automatic transfer after each shot
Specifying sizes or types of images to transfer
Transferring the current image
Automatic transfer after each shot
Each image can be immediately transferred to the FTP server automatically after your shot.
You can continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred.
Before shooting, make sure a card is in the camera. If you shoot without recording
images, they cannot be transferred.
Automatic transfer of movies during recording is not supported. After recording, transfer
movies as described in Transferring Multiple Images at Once or Adding a Caption
Before Transfer.
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [FTP transfer settings].
3.
Select [Automatic transfer].
730
4.
Select [Enable].
5.
Take the picture.
The captured image is transferred to the FTP server.
Caution
Images cannot be erased during image transfer.
Note
Captured images are also stored on the card.
Any images for which transfer fails or is interrupted will be transferred automatically
when the connection is recovered ( ). These images can also be transferred
together manually at a later time (
).
Repeated automatic transfer is not attempted if network settings (such as FTP
server settings) are changed before automatic FTP transfer begins.
731
Specifying sizes or types of images to transfer
You can specify which images to transfer when recording images of different sizes to both
cards, or when shooting RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images.
1.
Access the [FTP transfer settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–2 in Automatic transfer after each shot.
2.
Select [Images to transfer].
3.
Select the size of images to transfer.
Separate JPEGs
Choose [SmallerJPEG] or [Larger JPEG].
Separate HEIFs
Choose [SmallerHEIF] or [Larger HEIF].
732
4.
Select the type of images to transfer.
Shooting RAW+JPEG
Choose from [JPEG only], [RAW only] or [RAW+JPEG].
Shooting RAW+HEIF
Choose from [HEIF only], [RAW only] or [RAW+HEIF].
Note
[Separate JPEGs] or [Separate HEIFs] determines the image size transferred if
[
Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is selected with different
image quality set for each card ( ).
When the camera is set to record RAW images to one card and JPEGs or HEIFs to
the other, specify which images to transfer in the [Shooting RAW+JPEG] or
[Shooting RAW+HEIF] setting. Similarly, specify your transfer preference when
RAW+JPEG images or RAW+HEIF images are simultaneously recorded to a single
card.
Captured images are also stored on the card.
When images of the same size are recorded to both cards simultaneously, images
recorded to the card selected for [ Record/play] or [ Play] in [ : Record
func+card/folder sel.] are given priority for transfer.
733
Transferring the current image
Enables you to transfer the image you are viewing simply by pressing < >. You can
continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred.
1.
Access the [FTP transfer settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–2 in Automatic transfer after each shot.
2.
Select [Transfer with SET].
3.
Select [Enable].
4.
Select an image.
On the camera, press the < > button.
Select an image to transfer, then press < > to transfer the image.
Movies cannot be transferred this way. Selecting a movie and pressing
<
> will display the movie playback panel.
734
Transferring Multiple Images at Once
After shooting, you can select multiple images and transfer them all at once, or you can
transfer unsent images or images that could not be sent previously.
You can continue shooting still photos as usual during transfer.
Caution
Transfer is paused in the following cases.
• Movie recording in progress
• Pre-recording in progress
• [ : Standby: Low res.] is set to [Off]
If you will transfer many images, consider using a household power outlet
accessory (sold separately).
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [Image sel./transfer].
The [ Image sel./transfer] screen is displayed.
For details on the [ Image sel./transfer] screen, see Using the [
Image sel./transfer] Screen.
735
Using the [ Image sel./transfer] Screen
Selecting ([ ]) multiple images to transfer
Specifying a range of images to transfer
Transferring all images in a folder
Transferring all images on a card
From the [ Image sel./transfer] screen, you can select multiple images and transfer them
all at once.
Selecting ([
]) multiple images to transfer
By adding checkmarks to your selected images, you can transfer all of them at once.
1.
Select [Sel.Image].
736
2.
Select the image to transfer.
Use the < > dial to select an image to transfer, then press < >.
Use the < > dial to add a checkmark [ ] in the upper left of the
screen, then press < >.
For three-image display, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. To
return to single-image display, turn the < > dial clockwise.
To select other images to transfer, repeat step 2.
After image selection, press the < > button.
3.
Select [Transfer].
4.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
737
Specifying a range of images to transfer
You can transfer multiple images by specifying a range.
1.
Select [Range].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select other images, repeat step 2.
After image selection, press the < > button.
738
3.
Select [Transfer].
4.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
739
Transferring all images in a folder
You can transfer all the images in a folder at once.
1.
Select [Sel. ].
740
2.
Select a selection method.
Select transfer failed images
Selects all images in the selected folder for which transfer failed.
Select images not transferred
Selects all unsent images in the selected folder.
Sel transfer fail img ( only)
Selects all protected images in the selected folder for which transfer
failed.
Sel img not transfer. ( only)
Selects all unsent protected images in the selected folder.
Clear transfer history
Clears the transfer history of images in the selected folder.
Note
After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images
not transferred] and transfer all images in the folder again.
After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not
transfer. ( only)] and transfer all protected images in the folder
again.
741
3.
Select the folder.
4.
Select [OK].
Selected images are registered in [Images to transfer].
5.
Select [Transfer].
742
6.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
743
Transferring all images on a card
You can transfer all the images on a card at once.
1.
Select [All images].
744
2.
Select a selection method.
Select transfer failed images
Selects all images on the card for which transfer failed.
Select images not transferred
Selects all unsent images on the card.
Sel transfer fail img ( only)
Selects all protected images on the card for which transfer failed.
Sel img not transfer. ( only)
Selects all unsent protected images on the card.
Clear transfer history
Clears the transfer history of images on the card.
Note
After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images
not transferred] and transfer all images recorded on the card
again.
After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not
transfer. ( only)] and transfer all protected images recorded on
the card again.
745
3.
Select [OK].
Selected images are registered in [Images to transfer].
4.
Select [Transfer].
5.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
746
Adding a Caption Before Transfer
You can add a registered caption to each image before transfer. This is convenient if you
want to inform the recipient of the printing quantity, for example. Captions are also added to
images saved to the camera.
You can check captions added to images by examining the Exif information, in the user
comments.
Captions can be created and registered with EOS Utility ( ).
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [Transfer with caption].
The last image viewed is displayed.
747
3.
Specify the caption.
Select [Caption], and on the screen displayed, select the content of the
caption.
4.
Select [Transfer].
The image is transferred with the caption. After transfer, display returns
to the [Image transfer] screen.
Caution
Other images cannot be selected from the [Transfer with caption] screen. To
select another image for transfer with a caption, view that image before following
these steps.
748
Auto Retry If Transfer Fails
If transfer fails, the Wi-Fi icon blinks temporarily. In this case, the following screen is
displayed after you press the < > button and select [ : Transfer images to FTP
server].
To resolve the error displayed, see Responding to Error Messages.
Once you have resolved the issue, the images that could not be sent initially will be
transferred automatically. With this option activated, transfer is attempted again
automatically after failure, whether automatic transfer is used or captured images are
transferred via FTP. Note that if you cancel transfer or turn the camera off, auto retry is not
attempted.
See
Transferring Multiple Images at Once and transfer images as needed.
749
Using the Power Saving Function
When [Enable] is set and no image is transferred for a certain period, the camera will log off
from the FTP server and end the Wi-Fi connection. The connection is re-established
automatically when the camera is ready for image transfer again. If you prefer not to end the
Wi-Fi connection, set to [Disable].
1.
Select [ : Transfer images to FTP server] ( ).
2.
Select [FTP transfer settings].
3.
Select [Power saving].
750
Viewing Transferred Images
Images transferred to the FTP server are stored in the following folder as specified in the
FTP server settings.
Target folder of the FTP server
Under the default settings of the FTP server, images are stored in [C drive] → [Inetpub]
folder → [ftproot] folder, or in a subfolder of this folder.
If the root folder of the transfer destination has been changed in the FTP server settings,
ask the FTP server administrator where images are transferred.
752
Connecting to EOS Utility
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Editing/Deleting Devices for Connections
Reconnecting Using Connection Information
Transferring Multiple Images at Once (Direct Transfer)
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF Images
Creating and Registering Captions
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer and perform camera
operations using EOS software or other dedicated software. Install the latest version of
software on the computer before setting up a connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera, control the
camera, and perform other operations.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
Select [ : Connect to EOS Utility] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
754
3.
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when settings are already registered on
the camera, you can apply the registered settings.
5.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
755
6.
Save the settings.
Press < >.
The next screen is displayed after communication settings are
complete.
7.
Select [OK].
The following message is displayed. “******” represents the last six
digits of the MAC address of the camera to be connected.
756
Steps on the computer
8.
Start EOS Utility.
Connect the computer to the network and start EOS Utility.
9.
In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over Wi-Fi/LAN].
If a firewall-related message is displayed, select [Yes].
10.
Click [Connect].
Select the camera to connect to, then click [Connect].
757
[ Communicating] screen
Image sel./transfer
You can use the camera to transfer images to a computer ( ).
Set up direct transfer
You can specify the format of images to transfer to a computer ( ).
Confirm settings
You can check setting details.
Error details
You can check the details of any errors that occur ( ).
Disconnect
Terminates the connection.
Caution
The following will occur if you terminate the connection during remote movie
recording.
•
Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.
• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
You cannot use the camera to shoot in still photo shooting mode when it is set to
movie recording mode in EOS Utility.
With a connection established to EOS Utility, certain functions are unavailable.
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower compared
to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects cannot be
displayed smoothly.
759
Editing/Deleting Devices for Connections
Before editing or deleting connection settings for other devices, end the connection. This
section covers items not described in Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility.
1.
Select [ : Connect to EOS Utility] ( ).
2.
Select [Edit/delete device].
3.
Select the device.
Select the device for the connection, then press < >.
4.
Select an option.
760
Transferring Multiple Images at Once (Direct Transfer)
With the camera connected to a computer (via Wi-Fi or an interface cable) and the main
EOS Utility window displayed, you can use the camera to transfer images to a computer.
Caution
If you will transfer many images, consider using a household power outlet
accessory (sold separately).
Access the [ Image sel./transfer] screen.
1.
Select [ : Connect to EOS Utility] ( ).
2.
Select [Image sel./transfer].
The [ Image sel./transfer] screen is displayed.
For details on the [ Image sel./transfer] screen, see Using the [
Image sel./transfer] Screen.
763
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF Images
For RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images, you can specify which image to transfer.
1.
Select [ : Connect to EOS Utility] ( ).
2.
Select [Set up direct transfer].
3.
Select the type of images to transfer.
RAW+JPEG transfer
Choose from [JPEG only], [RAW only] or [RAW+JPEG].
RAW+HEIF transfer
Choose from [HEIF only], [RAW only] or [RAW+HEIF].
Caution
Some menu items are not available during image transfer.
764
3.
Enter the captions.
Enter up to 31 characters (in ASCII format).
To acquire caption data stored on the camera, select [Load settings].
4.
Set the captions on the camera.
Select [Apply to camera] to set your new captions on the camera.
766
Uploading Images to image.canon
Connecting the Camera to image.canon
Uploading Images to image.canon
This section describes how to send images to image.canon.
Connecting the Camera to image.canon
Link the camera to image.canon to send images directly from the camera.
A smartphone with a browser and internet connection is required.
For instructions on how to use image.canon services and details on countries and
regions where it is available, visit the image.canon site (
https://image.canon/).
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
1.
Select [ : Upload to image.canon] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
767
3.
Select [Connect].
If the app has not been installed, select [Install].
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Use the app to scan the QR code.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
768
6.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when settings are already registered on
the camera, you can apply the registered settings.
7.
Select [OK].
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
8.
Check the number shown in the app.
Select [OK].
769
9.
Complete the settings.
Press < >.
The setting menu is displayed on the camera screen.
Note
The [ ] icon changes to [ ].
10.
Check the app.
Confirm that the camera model name is registered in the app.
770
[Upload to image.canon] screen
Auto send ( )
You can choose whether to upload images automatically.
Movie(s) to send
You can select the type of movies uploaded.
Still image(s) to send
You can select the type of still photos uploaded.
Switch network
You can change the settings for network connections.
Clear camera web link settings
You can clear the camera web link settings.
771
Uploading Images to image.canon
Images are automatically uploaded to image.canon after the camera starts up (or recovers
from auto power off). Images uploaded to image.canon can be downloaded to a computer or
transferred to other web services.
Uploading is not possible during interval timer shooting.
1.
Select [ : Upload to image.canon] ( ).
2.
Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
3.
Configure [Still image(s) to send].
All
All still photos will be uploaded.
None
No still photos will be uploaded.
772
4.
Configure [Movie(s) to send].
All
All movies will be uploaded.
Only main
Only main movies ( ) will be uploaded.
Only proxy
Only proxy movies ( ) will be uploaded.
None
No movies will be uploaded.
5.
Restart the camera.
Note
Uploaded still photos and movies are stored at image.canon for 30
days at the original size, without storage limitations.
773
Syncing Time Between Cameras
Preparing for Time Syncing
Syncing the Time
You can set the sender camera time on up to 10 receiver cameras. Note that even after
synchronization, a slight margin of error applies between sender and receiver camera time
(of ±0.05 seconds, at most).
Caution
Not available for different camera models over a Wi-Fi connection. When using a
wired LAN connection, an EOS R5 with Wireless File Transmitter WFT-R10
connected can also be used.
This feature will not be available after 2038.
Note
Use of wired LAN with the camera requires Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP (both sold separately).
774
Preparing for Time Syncing
Wired LAN connections
With only one receiver camera
Connect a LAN cable to the Ethernet RJ-45 terminal of the sender and receiver
cameras.
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
(C) LAN cable
With multiple receiver cameras
Connect a LAN cable from the Ethernet terminal of the sender and receiver cameras to
a hub. Up to 10 receiver cameras can be connected.
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
(C) LAN cable
(D) Hub
775
Caution
Use a highly shielded Category 6A or higher STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Gigabit
LAN cable.
776
4.
Select an option.
Select [OK].
5.
Select [Sender].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
After the screen is displayed, the camera is ready.
778
Preparing receiver cameras
Set up cameras to use as receivers.
1.
Follow steps 1–4 in Preparing the sender camera.
2.
Select [Receiver].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
3.
Select [OK].
The following screen is displayed.
To set the time on multiple receiver cameras, follow steps 1–3 on each
receiver camera.
The number of receiver cameras detected is displayed on the sender
camera screen.
779
Syncing time between sender and receiver cameras
Sync the time on the sender and receiver cameras as follows.
1.
Follow steps 1–5 in Preparing the sender camera and steps 1–3 in
Preparing receiver cameras.
2.
Start time synchronization on the sender camera.
Check the number of receiver cameras that are connected, then select
[OK].
After the time is synchronized, the next screen is displayed.
3.
Press < > on all of the cameras.
780
Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Installing the App on a Smartphone
Bluetooth Pairing and Wi-Fi Connection to Smartphones
Main Functions of Camera Connect
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Connecting to Smartphones without Bluetooth Pairing
Editing/Deleting Devices for Connections
Reconnecting Using Connection Information
Automatic Image Transfer to a Smartphone as You Shoot
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can do the following after the camera and smartphone are paired via Bluetooth.
Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone ( ).
Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off ( ).
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone ( ).
You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.
Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone ( ).
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone ( ).
Send images to a smartphone from the camera ( ).
781
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that pairing with the
camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.
782
Installing the App on a Smartphone
Install the app on an Android smartphone or an iPhone.
Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
The app can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App Store can
also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired or
connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
Note
Check the app download site for the required OS version.
Sample screens and other details in this manual may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera firmware, app, Android, or iOS updates.
783
5.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the Bluetooth setting is already set to
[Enable].
A message is displayed if the camera is already paired with another
device. Select [OK] to end the current Bluetooth connection.
6.
Press < >.
785
7.
Start pairing.
Press < > to start pairing.
If Camera Connect is not installed, use the smartphone to scan the QR
code on the screen, go to Google Play or App Store to install Camera
Connect, then press < > to start pairing.
8.
Start Camera Connect.
Following the instructions in the app, select the camera for pairing.
786
9.
Establish a Bluetooth connection.
When a message appears on the smartphone, use the smartphone as
indicated.
Press < >.
787
10.
Complete the connection process.
Press < >.
The name of the connected device is displayed.
Caution
Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use the camera.
Troubleshooting pairing
Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone's Bluetooth
settings screen.
11.
Tap a Camera Connect function.
For details on Camera Connect functions, see Main Functions of
Camera Connect.
Tap a Camera Connect function to initiate a Wi-Fi connection. Tap
[Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection.
788
12.
Confirm that the devices are connected via Wi-Fi.
After a Wi-Fi connection is established, the camera screen switches to
shooting standby.
Selecting [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)] will display the [
Communicating] screen on the camera ( ).
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is now complete.
To end the Wi-Fi connection, select [Disconnect] on the [ Communicating] screen.
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth connection.
To reconnect, start Camera Connect and tap the function you will use.
789
Main Functions of Camera Connect
Images on camera
Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.
Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Remote live view shooting
Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.
Auto transfer
Enables camera and app setting adjustment for automatic transfer of your shots ( ).
Bluetooth remote controller
Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via Bluetooth. (Not
available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
Auto power off is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote controller feature.
Camera settings
Camera settings can be changed.
Updating camera firmware
Enables camera firmware updates.
Note
For details on other functions, you can check the main Camera Connect screen.
791
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Even when the camera power switch is set to < >, as long as it is paired to a
smartphone via Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to browse images on the camera or
perform other operations.
If you prefer not to stay connected to the camera via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth when it is off, either
set [ : Airplane mode] to [On] or set [ : Bluetooth settings] to [Disable].
Caution
This function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the
smartphone connection information is erased.
792
Connecting to Smartphones without Bluetooth Pairing
This section describes how to establish a direct Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone without
Bluetooth pairing.
Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet
1.
Select [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
793
3.
Select an option.
If you have selected [Camera Connect], select [Use different
connection method] on the [Camera Connect] screen.
If you have selected [Content Transfer Professional], select [Add a
device to connect to] on the [Content Transfer Professional]
screen.
794
4.
Install the app on a smartphone.
If the app is not installed, use the smartphone to scan the QR code on
the screen, go to Google Play or App Store to install the app, then
press < >.
5.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when settings are already registered on
the camera, you can apply the registered settings.
6.
Select [OK].
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
795
Changing device nicknames
You can change the nickname of devices the camera connects to.
Communication settings
Configurable settings include the wireless LAN and IP address.
Selecting [Wireless LAN] enables you to change the target SSID, for example.
Selecting [TCP/IPv4] enables you to configure network-related settings such as the IP
address.
Selecting [TCP/IPv6] enables you to configure settings used for IPv6 ( ).
Depending on the communication setting, not all items may be displayed.
Deleting connection information
You can delete the connection information.
798
Reconnecting Using Connection Information
The configured connection information can be used to connect again.
1.
Select [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)] ( ).
2.
Select the device.
[ ]: Bluetooth pairing, [ ]: Wi-Fi connections
3.
Select [OK].
If you have selected Bluetooth pairing, the following screen is
displayed, and you will use the app.
799
Automatic Image Transfer to a Smartphone as You
Shoot
Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following these steps, make
sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.
1.
Select [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)] ( ).
2.
Select [Send to smartphone after shot].
3.
Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
4.
Set [Size to send].
800
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone connected via Wi-Fi.
Displaying the menu screen
1.
Switch to playback.
2.
Press the < > button ( ).
3.
Select [Send images to smartphone].
If you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is
displayed requesting you to establish a Wi-Fi connection. After
pressing <
>, tap a Camera Connect function to connect via Wi-Fi,
then start again from step 1.
801
Setting the size of images to send
1.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
Note
When sending multiple images, you can also change [Size to send] as needed on
the confirmation screen before sending.
803
Sending the current image
1.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
2.
Select [Send img shown].
804
Selecting and sending images
1.
Select [Send selected].
2.
Select images to send.
Turn the < > dial to select images to send, then press < >.
To switch to selecting images from 3-image display, turn the < >
dial counterclockwise. To return to single-image display, turn the
<
> dial clockwise.
After selecting the images to send, press the < > button.
805
3.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
4.
Select [Send].
806
Sending a selected range of images
1.
Select [Send range].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select other images, repeat step 2.
To change the number of images in index display, turn the < > dial
( ).
3.
Press the < > button.
807
4.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
5.
Select [Send].
808
Sending all images on a card
1.
Select [Send all card].
2.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
3.
Select [Send].
809
Sending images found by searching
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [ : Set image search
conditions] at once. For details on [ : Set image search conditions], see Setting Image
Search Conditions.
1.
Select [Send all found].
2.
Select an option.
In [Size to send], you can select the size of images to send.
3.
Select [Send].
810
Ending image transfer
Press the <
> button on the image transfer screen.
To end the Wi-Fi connection, select [Disconnect] on the [ Communicating] screen.
Caution
During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the camera's
shutter button is pressed.
Note
You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
You can select up to 999 files at a time.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving
function is recommended.
Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that time.
Note that
size still photos are not reduced.
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
811
Live Streaming
Pairing with a Smartphone via Bluetooth
Setting Up Streaming
You can live-stream images from the camera.
Check the streaming requirements and terms of service in advance on the streaming site.
Pairing with a Smartphone via Bluetooth
1.
Prepare the smartphone ( ).
2.
Select [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)] ( ).
3.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the network setting is already set to
[Enable].
812
4.
Select [Camera Connect].
5.
Select [Add a device to connect to].
6.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the Bluetooth setting is already set to
[Enable].
813
7.
Press < >.
8.
Start pairing.
Press < > to start pairing.
If Camera Connect is not installed, use the smartphone to scan the QR
code on the screen, go to Google Play or App Store to install Camera
Connect, then press < > to start pairing.
9.
Start Camera Connect.
Following the instructions in the app, select the camera for pairing.
814
10.
Establish a Bluetooth connection.
Press < >.
11.
Complete the connection process.
Press < >.
When a message appears on the smartphone, use the smartphone as
indicated.
The name of the connected device is displayed.
Press the < > button.
815
Setting Up Streaming
1.
Switch to movie recording ( ).
2.
Select [ : Live streaming] ( ).
3.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when settings are already registered on
the camera, you can apply the registered settings.
4.
Select [OK].
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
816
5.
Complete the streaming settings in Camera Connect.
Select the streaming platform you will use, then configure the settings
accordingly.
You can enter a URL on the screen to select a streaming site.
Set the streaming quality, based on your communication environment.
6.
Start streaming.
[STBY] is shown on the recording standby screen.
Use Camera Connect to start and stop streaming. You can also start or
stop streaming by pressing the movie shooting button on the camera.
817
Caution
Video and audio may be noisy during streaming, depending on the communication
environment. Test streaming in advance and check the video and audio quality.
Try the following if video and audio is noisy or skips. These steps may improve the
quality.
• Bring the camera and access point (wireless router, tethering smartphone, etc.)
closer together, change their relative positions, and keep the space between
them free of people and objects.
• Indoors, set up the access point and camera in the same room.
• Set up away from devices that use the 2.4 GHz band, such as microwave
ovens or cordless phones.
If noise from an external microphone is distracting, try placing the microphone on
the side of the camera with the external microphone IN terminal as far from the
camera as possible.
Although selecting 3.5 Mbps as the streaming quality in Camera Connect may
enable more stable streaming than with 6 Mbps, image quality will be lower.
The camera will become warmer during streaming. Use the stand or a tripod, or
take other measures to avoid handheld recording.
Note that Canon is in no way responsible for third-party services.
No image is recorded to the card during streaming (but a card must be in the
camera).
Test streaming in advance to make sure the image is straight and in the correct
orientation, and adjust the orientation as needed.
Be sure to read Wireless Communication Precautions.
818
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Deleting Connection Information
Reconnecting Using Connection Information
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, )
via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
1.
Select [ : Connect to Wireless Remote] ( ).
2.
Select [Add a device to connect to].
819
3.
Select [OK].
This screen is not displayed if the Bluetooth setting is already set to
[Enable].
A message is displayed if the camera is already paired with another
device. Select [OK] to end the current Bluetooth connection.
4.
Pair the devices.
When the screen shown above appears, press and hold the <W> and
<T> buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for at least 3 sec.
Press < > after the camera displays [Paired with: ****************]
(where **** is a unique BR-E1 identifier).
820
5.
Set up the camera for remote shooting.
For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1's
Instruction Manual.
Caution
Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated.
Note
When you will not use Bluetooth, setting [ : Bluetooth settings] to [Disable] is
recommended ( ).
821
Using Camera Control API (CCAPI)
Setting a Port Number
Configuring User Authentication
Configuring the Connection
Changing Settings
Before using an application or other product applying the Camera Control API (CCAPI),*
prepare the camera for CCAPI control by connecting it to the smartphone, tablet, or
computer you will use.
* Camera Control API is an HTTP-based application programming interface for controlling Canon
cameras over a network.
Setting a Port Number
1.
Select [ : Camera Control API] ( ).
Enter the camera name after the camera displays [Register a
nickname to identify the camera. This nickname will be used for
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connections.].
824
2.
Select an option.
Port no. (HTTP)
The HTTP port number can be changed as needed.
Port no. (HTTPS)
The HTTPS port number can be changed as needed.
HTTPS
Set to [Disable] when using HTTP.
825
Configuring User Authentication
1.
Select [ : Camera Control API] ( ).
Enter the camera name after the camera displays [Register a
nickname to identify the camera. This nickname will be used for
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connections.].
2.
Select [User authentic.].
3.
Select use of user authentication.
If you have selected [Enable], enter the [User name] and [Password]
in [Edit account].
826
Configuring the Connection
1.
Select [Connect].
2.
Select [Add with wizard].
To configure connection details, select [Add manually].
3.
Select an option.
[Wired ] is displayed when a wired LAN is available.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
For instructions on configuring communication functions, see Basic
Communication Settings.
828
6.
Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
When the screen above appears on the camera, use the smartphone,
computer, or other device to access the indicated URL from the
application developed for camera control.
Display of the screen above on the camera indicates that a connection
has been established.
To end the connection, select [Disconnect].
830
Changing Settings
You can change the settings when the camera is not connected.
Check/edit connections
Check or edit connection settings.
1.
Select [Check/edit connections].
2.
Select the intended device.
832
3.
Select items to check or change.
Wireless LAN (or Wired)
When wireless LAN settings have been configured, you can change the
SSID (network name) and details such as the connection method,
security, and type of encryption.
TCP/IPv4
You can change the TCP/IPv4 settings.
TCP/IPv6
You can change the TCP/IPv6 settings.
Check connection
You can review connection settings.
Delete connection
You can clear the connection settings.
Auto connect
Selecting [Enable] will automatically establish a connection the next time the camera starts
up after you turn it off.
833
GPS Device Settings
GPS Receiver GP-E2
Smartphone
GPS Connection Display
You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a smartphone.
GPS Receiver GP-E2
1.
Attach GP-E2 to the camera.
Attach GP-E2* to the camera's hot shoe and turn it on. For details,
refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
* Requires a Multi-Function Shoe Adapter AD-E1 (sold separately).
2.
Select [ : GPS device settings] ( ).
3.
Select [Select GPS device].
834
4.
Select [GPS receiver].
5.
Configure GPS device settings.
For details on [Set up], refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
6.
Take the picture.
Caution
Precautions when using GP-E2
Before use, check the countries and regions where use of GPS is allowed, and
follow local regulations.
Update the GP-E2 firmware to Ver. 2.0.0 or later.
Firmware updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the
Canon website.
GP-E2 cannot be connected to the camera with a cable.
The camera does not record the shooting direction.
835
Smartphone
Complete these settings after installing the Camera Connect smartphone app ( ).
1.
On the smartphone, activate location services.
2.
Establish a Bluetooth connection.
Start Camera Connect and pair the camera and smartphone via
Bluetooth.
3.
Select [ : GPS device settings] ( ).
4.
Select [Select GPS device].
5.
Select [Smartphone].
6.
Take the picture.
Images are geotagged with the information from the smartphone.
836
GPS Connection Display
You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in the GPS
connection icon on the screens for still photo shooting or movie recording ( and ,
respectively).
Gray: Location services are off
Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
On: Location information acquired
For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when GP-E2 is used, refer to the
GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Geotagging images as you shoot
While the screen shows that [
] is on, the images you capture will be geotagged.
837
Geotagging information
You can check geotag information by displaying a shot, pressing the < > button to
access playback screens with detailed information, and then pressing < > vertically.
(1) Latitude
(2) Longitude
(3) Elevation
(4) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Caution
The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the
camera via Bluetooth.
Direction information is not acquired.
Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after
you turn the camera on.
Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
•
Pairing with a wireless remote control via Bluetooth
• Turning the camera off
• Quitting Camera Connect
•
Deactivating location services on the smartphone
Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
•
The camera power turns off
• The Bluetooth connection is ended
•
The smartphone's remaining battery level is low
838
Note
Movies are tagged with the geotag information acquired when you start recording.
Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
839
Linked Shooting
Basic Linked Shooting
Positioning the Cameras
In linked shooting over wireless LAN, you can coordinate shooting by up to 10 receiver
cameras with a sender camera that you shoot from.
Note that there is a slight delay in the shutter release timing between the sender and
receiver cameras. Moreover, movie recording is not supported.
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
Note
For details on cameras or combinations of cameras and accessories you can use
in linked shooting, see Preparing to Use Communication Functions.
840
4.
Select [LinkedShot].
Use the < > dial to select [LinkedShot] at the bottom.
5.
Select [Create with wizard].
6.
Select [Sender].
Select [OK].
842
7.
Select [Auto connect].
Select [OK].
After the screen is displayed, the camera is ready.
Up to nine compatible receiver cameras can be linked when you select
[Manual connect].
843
3.
Select [OK].
The following screen is displayed.
When using multiple receiver cameras, repeat steps 1–3 on each
receiver camera.
More receivers cannot be added after setup is complete. In that case,
you will need to configure the settings again from step 1.
The number of receiver cameras detected is displayed on the sender
camera screen.
845
Connecting the sender and receiver cameras
Use the sender and receiver cameras to establish a connection.
1.
Follow steps 1–7 in Preparing the sender camera and steps 1–3 in
Preparing receiver cameras.
2.
On the sender camera, select [OK].
Check the number of receiver cameras that are connected, then select
[OK].
Once the cameras are connected, the following screen is displayed.
846
3.
Press < > on all of the cameras.
Sender camera
Receiver camera
Display returns to the [Network settings] screen.
847
Positioning the Cameras
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
Position receiver cameras where there is an unobstructed line of sight to them from the
sender camera.
Receiver cameras can be positioned up to approx. 50 m from the sender camera.
However, the effective range for linked shooting may be shorter depending on wireless
communication conditions, which are affected by factors such as camera positioning, the
environment of use, and weather conditions.
Pressing the sender camera shutter button halfway also has the effect of pressing the
receiver camera shutter buttons halfway. Similarly, pressing the sender camera shutter
button completely has the same effect on receiver cameras, which also shoot.
There is a slight delay in the shutter release timing between the sender and receiver
cameras, and simultaneous shooting is not possible.
Caution
Do not use multiple flash units. Although slight, the difference in shutter release
timing may cause out-of-sync flash firing and inadequate exposure.
848
Note
In linked shooting, pressing the AE lock or depth-of-field preview button executes
focusing and metering just as pressing the shutter button halfway does.
Once you have established a connection between sender and receiver cameras,
the settings are retained even after changes such as replacing the batteries.
If you will no longer use a receiver camera in linked shooting, set [LinkedShot] in
[Connection settings] on the receiver camera to [Disconnect].
849
EOS Multi Remote Settings
EOS Multi Remote provides a shooting system for controlling multiple EOS cameras on a
wired or wireless network from a single sender camera, smartphone, tablet, or computer on
the same network.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EOS Multi Remote instruction manual.
Configuring the Camera
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Connection settings].
3.
Select [SET*].
850
4.
Select [Create with wizard].
5.
Select an option.
6.
Select an option.
7.
Follow the on-screen instructions to finish setup.
851
Basic Communication Settings
Connecting via Wired LAN
Connecting via WPS
Connecting to Detected Networks
Connecting by Entering a Network Name
Connecting in Camera Access Point Mode
Setting the IP Address Manually
Configuring IPv6
Registering Sets of Communication Settings as Connection Settings
This section describes how to configure communication settings and register them in
[Comm settings].
If communication settings are displayed when you are configuring network features, choose
a connection method in the links above and follow the steps on the screen displayed
([Comm settings] or [LAN type] screen).
Connecting via Wired LAN
Register communication settings that involve a wired LAN as follows. Use of wired LAN with
the camera requires Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan CF-R20EP (both sold
separately).
Adding the connection with the wizard
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
852
2.
In [Network], select [Enable].
3.
Select [Manual setting].
4.
Select [Comm settings].
853
5.
Select [NW*].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Selecting [Configure offline] will keep the camera disconnected from
the network after configuration.
854
Connecting via WPS
Register communication settings with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) as follows.
WPS connections
Options for connection methods include push-button configuration (PBC) and personal
identification number (PIN). When establishing a connection, check the method supported
by your access point.
PBC
The camera and access point can be connected simply by pressing the WPS button on the
access point.
Connecting may be more difficult if multiple access points are active nearby. If so, try to
connect with [WPS (PIN mode)].
Check the position of the WPS button on the access point in advance.
It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a connection.
PIN
An 8-digit identification number indicated on the camera is entered on the access point to
establish a connection.
Even if multiple access points are active nearby, connecting by using this shared
identification number is relatively reliable.
It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a connection.
Adding the connection with the wizard
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
In [Network], select [Enable].
857
3.
Select [Manual setting].
4.
Select [Comm settings].
5.
Select [NW*].
858
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select [Configure online].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
8.
Select [Wi-Fi ].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
859
9.
Select [Connect with WPS].
10.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
For [WPS (PBC mode)]
Press the access point's WPS button. For details on where the button is and how long to
press it, refer to the access point user manual.
Select [OK] to initiate connection with the access point.
Go to step 12 after the camera is connected to the access point.
860
For [WPS (PIN mode)]
On the access point, enter the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the camera screen. For
instructions on entering PIN codes on the access point, refer to the access point's
Instruction Manual.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
11.
Connect to the access point.
Select [OK] to initiate connection with the access point.
The following screen is displayed once the camera is connected to the
access point.
12.
Select [Auto setting].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If you have selected [Manual setting], also see Setting the IP Address
Manually.
861
5.
Select [NW*].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select [Configure online].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
864
8.
Select [Wi-Fi ].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
9.
Select the network name.
(1) Network names (SSIDs)
(2) Security icon (for access points with encryption)
(3) Channel
Use the < > dial to select the name of the network for the
connection.
[ ] in the list indicates that the access point supports the 6 GHz
band.
Note
[Refresh]
To display [Refresh], scroll down the screen in step 9.
Select [Refresh] to search for access points again.
865
5.
Select [NW*].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select [Configure offline].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
869
11.
Select the type of security.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
The same type of security must be set on both the other device and the
camera. See Authentication and data encryption methods for details on
types of authentication and encryption.
12.
Enter the password.
Press < > to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the
password.
This screen is only displayed for certain types of security.
871
13.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If you have selected [Manual setting], also see Setting the IP Address
Manually.
14.
Select use of IPv6.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
When selecting [Enable], configure IPv6 settings after all settings are
complete ( ).
When IPv6 is used, the camera only connects via IPv6. IPv4
connections are disabled.
872
15.
Press < >.
The communication settings are saved.
873
5.
Select [NW*].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Selecting [Configure offline] will keep the camera disconnected from
the network after configuration.
875
8.
Select [Wi-Fi ].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
9.
Select [Camera access point mode].
[Configure online] options
[Configure offline] options
876
12.
Select a channel setting option.
To specify the settings manually, select [Manual setting], then turn the
< > dial.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
13.
Select the type of security.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If you have selected [None], the [IP address setting (IPv4)] screen is
displayed ( ).
Available options vary depending on the [Channel setting] option you
chose.
The same type of security must be set on both the other device and the
camera. See Authentication and data encryption methods for details on
types of authentication and encryption.
878
14.
Enter the password.
Press < > to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the
password.
15.
Select how to set the IP address.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If you have selected [Manual setting], also see Setting the IP Address
Manually.
16.
Check the SSID and password.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
879
17.
Press < >.
The communication settings are saved.
880
Setting the IP Address Manually
Set the IP address as follows if you have selected [Manual setting] on the [IP address
setting (IPv4)] screen.
1.
Select [Manual setting].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
881
2.
Select an option to configure.
The items displayed vary depending on the communication function.
Select an option to access the screen for numerical input.
To use a gateway, select [Enable], then select [Address].
To use a DNS address, select [Manual setting], then select [Address].
882
3.
Enter the number.
To set the entered numbers and return to the screen for step 2, press
the < > button.
4.
Select [OK].
When you have completed setting the necessary items, select [OK].
If you are unsure what to enter, see Checking Network Settings or ask
the network administrator or other person in charge of the network.
883
4.
Select the communication settings that will use IPv6.
5.
Select [Change].
6.
Select [TCP/IPv6].
886
7.
Select an option to configure.
Use TCP/IPv6
•
Select [Enable] or [Disable] for IPv6.
Manual setting
• To set the IP address manually, select [Enable]. [DNS server] is
set to [Manual setting], and you can configure [DNS address],
[Manual address], [Prefix length], and [Gateway].
887
DNS server
• To set the DNS server IP address manually, select [Manual
setting].
•
Select [Disable] if you will not use a DNS server.
• If the setting is currently [Auto assign], setting [Manual setting] to
[Enable] changes it to [Manual setting].
DNS address/Manual address/Gateway
•
Select an option and enter the IP address.
888
Prefix length
•
To set the prefix length, turn the < > dial to select a value (1–
128).
889
Registering Sets of Communication Settings as
Connection Settings
You can register multiple communication settings (multiple Wi-Fi settings, or combinations of
wired LAN and Wi-Fi settings) as a single set of connection settings.
With a combination of wired LAN and Wi-Fi settings, communication is restricted to the wired
LAN when it is available but otherwise switches to the Wi-Fi connection. When the wired
LAN becomes available again, communication is restricted to it.
This section explains how to register connection settings using function and communication
settings that are already configured.
Caution
Settings for multiple networks cannot be configured in camera access point mode
settings.
Note
Use of wired LAN with the camera requires Battery Grip BG-R20EP or Cooling Fan
CF-R20EP (both sold separately).
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Connection settings].
890
3.
Select [SET*].
4.
Select [Create from list].
5.
Select [Func settings *].
891
6.
Select [Select from list].
7.
Select function settings.
The function settings are registered, and display returns to the
[Change] screen.
8.
Select [Comm settings 1].
892
9.
Select [Select from list].
10.
Select communication settings.
The first communication settings are registered, and display returns to
the [Change] screen.
You can register wired LAN or Wi-Fi settings in any order.
11.
Select [Comm settings 2].
893
12.
Select [Select from list].
13.
Select communication settings.
Note
Select Wi-Fi settings if wired LAN settings are already registered
in [Comm settings 1], or select wired LAN settings if Wi-Fi
settings are already registered in [Comm settings 1].
14.
Exit the screen for changing settings.
Press the < > button.
894
15.
Select [Connect].
16.
Select [OK].
The connection is initiated.
895
Checking and Editing Network Settings
Ending Connections from the [Connection settings] Screen
Reconnecting from the [Connection settings] Screen
Checking and Editing Connection Settings
Manually Editing Connection Settings
Specifying Connection Options
Ending Connections from the [Connection settings]
Screen
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Connection settings].
3.
Select [Disconnect].
896
4.
Select [OK].
The devices are disconnected.
897
5.
Select [OK].
The devices are connected again.
If settings were changed on the target device, restore the previous
settings to enable connections by the camera.
899
4.
Check or change the settings.
Change with wizard/Change from list
Change connection settings ( ).
Save/load settings on card
Save connection settings to a card, or load saved connection settings
from a card into the camera ( ).
Delete settings
Select to delete connection settings.
Selecting [OK] deletes the settings.
Confirm settings
Select to check connection settings.
Connect
Select to re-establish a connection ( ).
901
Changing connection settings
Settings originally completed using the connection wizard can be changed as follows.
Change with wizard
You can use the connection wizard to change connection settings saved on the camera.
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Change with wizard].
3.
Use the connection wizard to change connection settings.
902
Change from list
You can use communication and function settings saved on the camera to change
connection settings saved on the camera. You can also register settings names.
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Change from list].
3.
Select an option and change setting details as needed.
Settings name
Select to name sets of settings. Use the virtual keyboard ( ) to enter
text.
903
NW*/Comm settings*
Select to change, add, or clear communication settings.
• Selecting [Select from list] lists communication settings saved on
the camera. Select the communication settings to use.
To view communication setting details, select settings and press
the <
> button.
•
Selecting [Clear selected] clears communication settings with
registered connection settings. Select [OK] on the confirmation
screen.
MODE*/Function settings*
Select to change, add, or clear function settings.
•
Selecting [Select from list] lists function settings saved on the
camera. Select the function settings to use.
To view function setting details, select settings and press the
<
> button.
•
Selecting [Clear selected] clears function settings with registered
connection settings. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note
You can register two sets of communication and function settings to a single set of
connection settings. Note that depending on setting details, only one set can be
registered in some cases.
Clearing all function settings also clears communication settings, and the
connection settings will be labeled [Unspecified].
904
Saving and loading settings
Connection settings can be saved on a card and applied to other cameras. Connection
settings configured on other cameras can also be applied to the camera you will use.
Note
[ : Save/load cam settings on card] enables you to save all communication
settings on the camera to a card or load all communication settings for another
camera from a card.
Saving settings
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Save/load settings on card].
3.
Select [Save settings to card].
905
4.
Select [OK].
The file name is determined automatically by the camera: WFTNPF,
followed by a number (01 to 40) and the extension NIF. To rename the
file as desired, press the < > button.
The settings are saved to the card.
The settings file is saved to an area of the card shown when the card is
opened (in the root directory).
Caution
40 settings files can be saved on one card from the camera. To save 41 or more,
use another card.
906
5.
Select [OK].
Information from the settings file is loaded into the selected settings
number.
Caution
Even if a computer or other device is used to save 41 or more settings files on a
card, only 40 are displayed on the camera's screen for loading settings. To load 41
or more settings files, load 40 from one card, then load remaining files from another
card.
Note
[ : Save/load cam settings on card] enables you to save all communication
settings on the camera to a card or load all communication settings for another
camera from a card.
908
Manually Editing Connection Settings
You can add, change, or delete communication and function settings saved on the camera.
You can also configure settings that are not set using the connection wizard, such as a
setting that determines what happens if files with the same name as existing files are sent to
the FTP server.
Editing communication settings
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Manual setting].
3.
Select [Comm settings].
909
4.
Select [NW*].
Select saved settings to edit.
5.
Change, delete, or check the settings as needed.
Change
Select to change individual settings in sets of communication settings.
•
Selecting [Wireless LAN] enables you to change the target SSID,
for example.
• Selecting [TCP/IPv4] enables you to configure network-related
settings such as the IP address.
• Selecting [TCP/IPv6] enables you to configure settings used for
IPv6 ( ).
•
Depending on the communication setting, not all items may be
displayed.
910
Delete settings
Select to delete communication settings.
Selecting [OK] deletes the settings.
Confirm settings
Select to check communication settings.
911
Confirm settings
Select to check function settings.
915
Directory structure of the target folder
Configured in [FTP server] → [Directory structure].
With [Default], the root folder is used for image storage. If you have created a subfolder in
the root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, images are saved in that folder.
Selecting [Camera] automatically creates a folder structure matching that of the camera's
(such as A/DCIM/100EOSR1) in the server's root folder for image storage. If you have
created a subfolder in the root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, a folder
structure such as A/DCIM/100EOSR1 is automatically created in that folder for image
storage.
Overwriting files of the same name
Configured in [FTP server] → [Overwrite same file].
With [Overwrite same file] set to [Disable]
If there is already a file with the same name in the target folder on the FTP server, the new
file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore and a number, as in
IMG_0003_1.JPG.
When you resend images if initial transfer fails
Even if the camera is configured to overwrite files of the same name, if you resend an image
file that could not be transferred initially, the existing file may not be overwritten in some
cases. If this happens, the new file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore, a
letter, and a numeral, as in IMG_0003_a1.JPG.
Passive mode
Configured in [FTP server] → [Passive mode].
Enable this setting in network environments protected by a firewall. If an Error 41 occurs
(Cannot connect to FTP server), setting passive mode to [Enable] may enable access to the
FTP server.
Trusting target servers
Configured in [FTP server] → [Trust target server].
Set to [Enable] if you prefer to connect to FTP servers even when trust cannot be
established based on the root certificate used. In this case, take suitable security measures.
916
Specifying Connection Options
You can configure settings used for FTP transfer. Settings are also available for
authentication information used in LAN environments with 802.1X authentication.
1.
Select [ : Network settings] ( ).
2.
Select [Connection option settings].
3.
Select an option to configure.
FTP transfer settings
EOS Utility settings
Smartphone settings
EOS Multi Remote settings
802.1X authentication
917
FTP transfer settings
Selecting [FTP transfer settings] enables you to configure settings related to FTP transfer
and power saving.
Automatic transfer / Images to transfer / Transfer with SET / Set root certif
For details, see Transferring Images to an FTP Server.
Power saving
When [Enable] is set and no image is transferred for a certain period, the camera will
log off from the FTP server and disconnect from the LAN. The connection is re-
established automatically when the camera is ready for image transfer again. If you
prefer not to disconnect from the LAN, set to [Disable].
Protect images
To automatically protect images transferred via FTP, set to [Enable] ( ).
EOS Utility settings
Selecting [EOS Utility settings] enables you to configure direct transfer settings.
Set up direct transfer
For details, see
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF Images.
918
Smartphone settings
Selecting [Send to smartphone after shot] in [Smartphone settings] enables you to set
the size of images to send automatically.
Auto send / Size to send
For details, see Automatic Image Transfer to a Smartphone as You Shoot.
EOS Multi Remote settings
Enables you to set up the camera as a sender camera for EOS Multi Remote.
For details, refer to the EOS Multi Remote instruction manual.
919
802.1X authentication
Selecting [802.1X authentication] enables you to set, check, or delete 802.1X
authentication settings, using a setup wizard.
Configure these settings when connecting to networks that require 802.1X authentication.
First, save the certificate for the type of 802.1X authentication used to a card in the camera.
File types and names that can be loaded using this function are as follows.
Type File Name
Root certificate
8021X_R.CER
8021X_R.CRT
8021X_R.PEM
Client certificate
8021X_C.CER
8021X_C.CRT
8021X_C.PEM
8021X_C.P12
8021X_C.PFX
Private key 8021X_C.KEY
920
Note that the camera supports following protocols.
Protocol Supported Authentication
EAP-TLS X.509, PKCS#12
EAP-TTLS MS-CHAP v2
PEAP MS-CHAP v2
Setup wizard
Follow the wizard to configure the authentication settings.
Confirm settings
Select to check authentication settings.
Delete settings
Select to delete authentication settings. Selecting [OK] on the screen displayed deletes
the settings.
921
Airplane Mode
You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions.
1.
Select [ : Airplane mode] ( ).
2.
Set to [On].
[ ] is displayed on the screen.
Note
[ ] may not be displayed in still photo shooting, movie recording, or playback,
depending on display settings. If it is not displayed, press the <
> button
repeatedly to access detailed information display.
922
Reference
Virtual Keyboard Operations
Virtual Keyboard Operations
(1)
Input area, for entering text
(2)
Cursor keys, for moving in the input area
(3)
Current no. of characters/no. available
(4)
Keyboard
(5)
Switch input modes
(6)
Space
(7)
Delete a character in the input area
(8)
Exit input
Use < > or the < > or < > dial to move within (2) and (4)–(7).
Press < > to confirm input or when switching input modes.
925
Responding to Error Messages
Resolve any errors displayed on the camera screen by referring to these examples of
corrective actions. You can also check error details by accessing [ : Network settings] →
[Error description].
Click the following error numbers to jump to the corresponding section.
11 12
21 22 23
41 43 44 45 46 48 49
61 64 65
81
91
121 125 127
130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137
161
927
11: Connection target not found
In the case of [ : Connect to smartphone(tablet)], is the app running?
• Establish a connection using the app ( ).
In the case of [ : Connect to EOS Utility], is EOS Utility running?
•
Start EOS Utility and try to connect again ( ).
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption key for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the encryption keys do not match when an access point that
encrypts communication is used.
Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct encryption key for
authentication is set on the camera (
).
12: Connection target not found
Are the target device and access point turned on?
•
Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a connection still
cannot be established, perform the procedures to establish the connection again.
928
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
On the camera, the IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct setting?
• If no DHCP server is used, configure the setting after setting the IP address to
[Manual setting] on the camera (
).
What to check on the DHCP server
Is the power of the DHCP server on?
• Turn on the DHCP server.
Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
• Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
•
Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the network to
reduce the number of addresses in use.
Is the DHCP server working correctly?
•
Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly as a DHCP
server.
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera (
, ).
•
Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
929
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
On the camera, does the DNS server's IP address setting match the server's
actual address?
• Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual DNS server address
( , ).
What to check on the DNS server
Is the power of the DNS server on?
•
Turn the DNS server on.
Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding names
correct?
•
On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding names are
entered correctly.
Is the DNS server working correctly?
•
Check the DNS server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a
DNS server.
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
•
Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
930
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
Is another device on the camera network using the same IP address as the
camera?
• Change the camera's IP address to avoid using the same address as another
device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address of the device that has a
duplicate address.
• If the camera's IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network environments using
a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto setting].
41: Cannot connect to FTP server
What to check on the camera
The camera's proxy server setting is [Enable]. Is this the correct setting?
•
If no proxy server is used, set the camera's proxy server setting to [Disable] ( ).
Do the camera's [Address setting] and [Port No.] settings match those of the
proxy server?
•
Configure the camera's proxy server address and port number to match those of the
proxy server (
).
Are the camera's proxy server settings correctly set on the DNS server?
•
Make sure the proxy server's [Address] is correctly set on the DNS server.
On the camera, does the FTP server's IP address setting match the server's actual
address?
•
Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual FTP server address
( ).
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
•
This error occurs if the passwords do not match when a key index has been set on
the access point or when you have selected a type of security in the [Security]
settings that requires password input.
Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct password for
authentication is set on the camera (
).
On the camera, does the [Port number setting] for the FTP server match the actual
port number of the FTP server?
• Configure the same port number (usually 21 for FTP/FTPS or 22 for SFTP) on the
camera and FTP server. Configure the port number on the camera to match the
actual FTP server port number ( ).
Are the camera's FTP server settings correctly set on the DNS server?
• Make sure the FTP server's [Address] is correctly set on the DNS server. Make
sure the [Address] for the FTP server is correctly set on the camera ( ).
931
What to check on the FTP server
Is the FTP server working correctly?
•
Configure the computer correctly to function as an FTP server.
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the FTP server address and port
number, then set them on the camera.
Is the power of the FTP server on?
•
Turn on the FTP server. The server may have been turned off because of an
energy-saving mode.
On the camera, does the FTP server's IP address setting (in [Address]) match the
server's actual address?
• Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual FTP server address
( ).
Is the FTP server configured to restrict access to only some IP addresses?
•
Check the camera's IP address in [Confirm settings] ( ) and change the FTP
server settings.
Is a firewall or other security software enabled?
•
Some security software uses a firewall to restrict access to the FTP server. Change
the firewall settings to allow access to the FTP server.
•
You may be able to access the FTP server by setting [Passive mode] to [Enable]
on the camera ( ).
Are you connecting to the FTP server via a broadband router?
•
Some broadband routers use a firewall to restrict access to the FTP server. Change
the firewall settings to allow access to the FTP server.
•
You may be able to access the FTP server by setting [Passive mode] to [Enable]
on the camera ( ).
What to check on the proxy server
Is the proxy server on?
•
Turn on the proxy server.
Is the proxy server working correctly?
•
Check the proxy server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a
proxy server.
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the proxy server's address setting
and port number, then set them on the camera.
932
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera (
, ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
43: Cannot connect to FTP server. Error code received from server.
What to check on the proxy server
Is the proxy server on?
• Turn on the proxy server.
Is the proxy server working correctly?
•
Check the proxy server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a
proxy server.
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the proxy server's address setting
and port number, then set them on the camera.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
•
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera (
, ).
•
Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
What to check on the FTP server
Have you exceeded the maximum number of FTP server connections?
•
Disconnect some network devices from the FTP server or increase the maximum
number of connections.
933
44: Cannot disconnect FTP server. Error code received from server.
This error occurs from a failure to disconnect from the FTP server for some
reason.
• Restart the FTP server and camera.
45: Cannot login to FTP server. Error code received from server.
What to check on the camera
On the camera, is the [Login name] set correctly?
•
Check the login name for accessing the FTP server. Check upper- and lower-case
letters, and make sure the correct login name is set on the camera ( ).
On the camera, is the [Login password] set correctly?
•
When a login password is set on the FTP server, check upper- and lower-case
letters, and make sure the correct login password is set on the camera ( ).
What to check on the FTP server
Do the user rights for the FTP server allow reading, writing, and log access?
•
Configure the FTP server's user rights to allow reading, writing, and log access.
Is the folder specified as the transfer destination on the FTP server named with
ASCII characters?
•
Use ASCII characters for the folder name.
934
46: For the data session, error code received from FTP server
What to check on the FTP server
The connection was terminated by the FTP server.
• Restart the FTP server.
Do the user rights for the FTP server allow reading, writing, and log access?
• Configure the FTP server's user rights to allow reading, writing, and log access.
Do user rights allow access to the target folder on the FTP server?
• Configure the user rights for access to the target folder on the FTP server to allow
saving images from the camera.
Is the power of the FTP server on?
•
Turn on the FTP server. The server may have been turned off because of an
energy-saving mode.
Is the hard disk of the FTP server full?
•
Increase available space on the hard disk.
48: Security of the connection to the target server cannot be verified.
If you trust this server and connect, set [Trust target server] to
[Enable].
This error occurs from a failure to confirm security of the target server connection
when connecting via FTPS.
•
Confirm that the certificate is set correctly.
•
Change [Trust target server] to [Enable] if you prefer to trust target servers
regardless of certificate settings.
49: Check server fingerprint
This error occurs if you attempt to connect to an SFTP server for the first time, or
if the SFTP server certificate has changed.
• Confirm that the fingerprint displayed on the camera matches the one on the server,
then select [OK].
935
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
• Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera.
What to check on the camera
Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
• Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the camera ( ).
What to check at the access point
Is the access point turned on?
•
Turn on the power of the access point.
If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
•
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point ( ).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption method?
•
The camera supports AES encryption ( ).
If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
•
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [MAC address] screen ( ).
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
•
Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera.
The wireless LAN connection was lost, for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
• The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access point from
another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in use nearby (interfering
with IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ax (2.4 GHz band)), or influence of rain or high humidity.
936
81: Wired LAN connection lost
Is the LAN cable securely connected?
• Reconnect the LAN cable between the camera and server. Because the cable may
be severed, try using another cable to connect the devices.
Is the hub or router on?
• Turn on the hub or router.
Is the server on?
• Turn on the server. The server may have been turned off because of an energy-
saving mode.
91: Other error
A problem other than error code number 11 to 81 occurred.
•
Turn the camera's power switch off and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
The target Web server does not have enough free space.
•
Delete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space on the Web
server, then try sending the data again.
125: Check the network settings
Is the network connected?
•
Check the connection status of the network.
127: An error has occurred
A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the camera is
connected to the Web service.
•
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to image.canon.
130: The server is currently busy
Please wait a moment and try again
The image.canon site is busy at the moment.
• Try accessing image.canon over Wi-Fi again later.
937
131: Try again
An error occurred when connecting to image.canon over Wi-Fi.
• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to image.canon.
132: Error detected on server
Try again later
The image.canon site is currently offline for maintenance.
• Try accessing image.canon over Wi-Fi again later.
133: Cannot log in to Web service
An error occurred when signing in to image.canon.
•
Check the image.canon settings.
•
Try accessing image.canon over Wi-Fi again later.
134: Set the correct date and time
The date, time, and time zone settings are incorrect.
•
Check the [ : Date/Time/Zone] settings.
135: Service is not available because image.canon web link settings
being cleared. Clear the web link settings on the camera and try
settings again.
The settings for image.canon were changed.
•
Check the image.canon settings.
136: The QR code shown on the camera was not scanned correctly
by the dedicated app. Try camera web link setup again.
The QR code was not scanned correctly by the smartphone.
•
Reconfigure camera web link settings and scan the QR code displayed again on the
camera.
938
137: The QR code shown on the camera has expired. Try camera web
link setup again.
The QR code displayed has expired.
• Reconfigure camera web link settings and scan the QR code displayed again on the
camera.
161: An error has occurred
A streaming error has occurred.
• Check the streaming settings.
• Try streaming again.
939
Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshoot camera issues by checking the camera and connected devices as described in
this section. If troubleshooting does not resolve the problem, contact a Canon Service
Center for product information and advice on product handling.
Cannot transfer images to an FTP server.
Transfer is paused in the following cases.
•
Movie recording in progress
• Pre-recording in progress
•
[ : Standby: Low res.] is set to [Off]
Cannot perform linked shooting.
When performing linked shooting, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
<
>.
Linked shooting is not possible with the still photo shooting/movie recording switch set to
< >.
The camera heats up, and the transmission rate drops.
Continuous wireless operation over an extended period in high temperatures may cause
the camera's internal temperature to rise and slow down transfers.
940
Wireless Communication Precautions
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
Nearby Electronic Devices
Precautions for Using Multiple Cameras
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems occur when using the
wireless communication functions, try the following corrective actions.
941
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not be established
even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case, bring the camera and the
smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using the camera.
Install the device where people or objects do not come between the device and the
camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the influence of the following electronic
devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices to transmit communication.
The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ax using radio waves in the
2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission rate will drop if there are
Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless telephones, microphones, smartphones,
other cameras, or similar devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
Precautions for Using Multiple Cameras
When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make sure the
cameras' IP addresses are different.
When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the transmission
rate drops.
When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ax (2.4 GHz band) access points, leave a
gap of five channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio wave interference. For
example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2 and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
942
Security
When connecting the camera to a network, make sure to use a secure network environment.
It is recommended to use the camera with the default settings.
When connecting the camera to a network, there is a risk of unauthorized access from
unintended third parties or cyber-attacks. If access from an external network is not required,
physically and/or virtually block access so that only specified devices can access the
network. Additionally, Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) may be intercepted by malicious third parties,
posing a risk of eavesdropping on communication content.
If access to an external network is required, it is important to implement a secure method of
communication, such as using a VPN (Virtual Private Network) that can block access from
the outside. Use Wi-Fi in a secure environment. AES encryption is recommended.
In particular, the following functions do not support protocol encryption for communication
with the camera; therefore, use these functions in a secure network environment.
Content Transfer Professional
Camera Connect
EOS Utility
Caution
Canon shall not be liable for any direct or indirect damages caused by network
security issues.
The camera cannot be directly connected to the communication lines (including
public wireless LAN) of telecommunications carriers (mobile communications
companies, fixed-line communications companies, Internet providers, etc.). When
connecting the camera to the Internet, be sure to connect via a router or similar
device.
943
Checking Network Settings
Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then enter ipconfig/all and press the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask, gateway, and DNS
server information are also displayed.
macOS
In macOS, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press the <Return> key.
The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated in the [enX] item (X: number) next to
[inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the macOS help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on the network,
change the rightmost number when configuring the IP address assigned to the camera in
the processes described in
Setting the IP Address Manually.
Example: 192.168.1.10
944
Wireless Communication Status
Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.
Quick Control screen
Information display screen during playback
(1) Wi-Fi function
(2) Wireless signal strength
(3) Bluetooth function
945
Wi-Fi function indicator
Communication Status
Appearance on the Screen
Wi-Fi Function Wireless Signal Strength
Not connected
When set to [Network: Disable]
Not displayed
When set to [Network: Enable]
Connecting
(blinking)
Connected
Sending data
Connection error
(blinking)
Bluetooth function indicator
Connection Status Appearance on the Screen
Not connected
When set to [Bluetooth: Disable] Not displayed
When set to [Bluetooth: Enable]
Connected
946
App Selection for USB Connections
By connecting the camera to a smartphone or computer with the interface cable, you can
transfer images or import images to the smartphone or computer.
1.
Select [ : Choose USB connection app] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Photo Import/Remote Control
Select if you will use EOS Utility after connecting to a computer, or if
you will use Android apps or the iOS version of Photos.
Video calls/streaming
Select if you will use UVC/UAC-compatible applications after
connecting to a computer.
After selecting [Video calls/streaming], use the interface cable to
connect to the computer, then start the application.
The resolution and frame rate of image output is 2K (1920×1080) at 30
fps.
Audio output is LPCM/16bit/2CH (channels 1 and 2), even with [ :
Audio format] set to [LPCM/24bit/4CH].
Canon app(s) for iPhone
Select if you will use an iOS app.
For details on the cables required to connect the camera to
smartphones, visit the Canon website (
).
Caution
For [Video calls/streaming], consider using an optional household power outlet
accessory when using the camera over extended periods.
948
Save/Load Communication Settings on Card
Settings on the wireless features tab can be saved on a card and applied to other cameras.
Settings configured on the wireless features tab on other cameras can also be applied to the
camera you will use.
Note
[ : Save/load cam settings on card] enables you to save all communication
settings on the camera to a card or load all communication settings for another
camera from a card.
Saving settings
1.
Select [ : Save/load comm. settings on card] ( ).
2.
Select [Save to card].
949
3.
Select [OK].
The file name is set automatically by the camera. To rename the file as
desired, press the < > button.
The settings are saved to the card.
The settings file is saved to an area of the card shown when the card is
opened (in the root directory).
Note
Up to ten camera settings files can be saved on a card. If a card already has ten
camera settings files, either overwrite existing files or use a different card.
950
Caution
Even if a computer or other device is used to save more than 10 settings files on a
card, only 10 are displayed on the camera's screen for loading settings. When you
have more than 10 settings files, divide them among multiple cards so that each
card has no more than 10.
Settings files saved by other camera models cannot be loaded.
It may not be possible to load settings files that were saved by a camera with a
different firmware version.
952
Resetting Communication Settings
All settings of network features can be cleared. This can prevent the information from being
leaked if you lend the camera or transfer ownership.
1.
Select [ : Reset communication settings] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
Caution
If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone's Wi-Fi
settings screen, remove the Wi-Fi connection information of the camera for which
you restored default wireless communication settings.
953
Set-up
This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up [ ] tab.
to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB]
mode.
• Tab Menus: Set-up
• Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback
• Folder Settings
• Still Photo File Numbering
•
Movie Clip Numbering
•
File Naming
• Card Formatting
•
Auto Rotate
•
Adding Orientation Information to Movies
•
Date/Time/Zone
•
Language
•
System Frequency
•
Help
•
Beeps
•
Volume
•
Audio Monitor
•
Screen Brightness
•
Viewfinder Brightness
•
Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone
•
Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone
•
Screen and Viewfinder Display
• UI Magnification
• HDMI Resolution
•
Cooling Fan Settings
• Shutter at Shutdown
• Sensor Cleaning
•
Password Management
• Power Saving
• Resetting the Camera
•
Custom Shooting Mode (C1–C3)
• Save/Load Camera Settings on Card
• Battery Information
•
Copyright Information
954
Country/Area/Guidance/Audio settings
(1) Date/Time/Zone
(2) Language
(3) System frequency
(4)
Help text size
(5)
Beep
(6) Volume
(7) Audio monitor
Customize display
(1) Screen brightness
(2) Viewfinder brightness
(3) Screen/viewfinder color tone
(4)
Fine-tune VF color tone
(5) Screen/viewfinder display
(6) UI magnification
(7) HDMI resolution
957
Various settings
(1) Cooling fan settings
(2) Shutter at shutdown
(3) Sensor cleaning
(4) Manage password
(5) Power saving
Note
[Cooling fan settings] is displayed when Cooling Fan CF-R20EP (sold
separately) is attached.
Reset/All settings
(1) Reset camera
(2) Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)
(3) Save/load cam settings on card
958
Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted
Recording is possible when card or is in the camera (except under some
conditions). With only one card inserted, there is no need to follow these steps.
With two cards inserted, you can select the recording method and card to use for recording
and playback as follows.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
1.
Select [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] ( ).
960
2.
Set the recording method.
/ separate
Select [Enable] for automatic configuration of the recording method for
still photos and movies. Movies are recorded to card and still photos
to card .
Caution
Specifying [Enable] will make [ Rec options], [ Rec
options], [ Record/play], and [ Record/play]
unavailable.
Note
For playback, press the < > button for movie playback in
movie recording mode or for still photo playback in still photo
shooting mode.
961
Rec options
Set the recording method for still photos.
• Standard
Records still photos to the card selected in [ Record/play].
•
Auto switch card
Same as [Standard], but additionally, the camera switches to the
other card when one card becomes full. When the camera switches
cards, a new folder is created.
•
Rec. separately
Enables you to set a specific image size for each card ( ). For
each shot, a still photo is recorded to card
and in your
specified image quality.
Note that recording separately to and is not available
for RAW images.
•
Rec. to multiple
For each shot, a still photo is recorded to card and in the
same image quality.
Consider using an SD card with fast writing speeds for card ,
such as a UHS-II card.
Caution
Maximum burst for [Rec. separately] is lower if you specify
different image sizes for cards
and ( ).
962
Note
Rec. separately/Rec. to multiple
Images are recorded with the same file number to card and
.
The number of shots available as shown in the viewfinder and
on the Quick Control screen is for the card with less free
space.
[Card* full] is displayed when one of the cards becomes full,
and shooting is no longer possible. To continue shooting,
either replace the card or set [ Rec options] to [Standard]
and select the card with free space.
See Folder Settings for details on [Folder] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.].
Rec options
Set the recording method for movies.
•
Standard
Records movies to the card selected in [ Record/play].
•
Auto switch card
Same as [Standard], but shooting ends when the card becomes
full. When you resume shooting, the camera switches to the other
card. At this time, a new folder is created.
963
• Main Proxy
Main movies are recorded to card
and proxy movies to card
with the same file name (but with _Proxy appended to proxy
movies). You can set the file name in the [Movies] setting in [ :
File name].
• Rec. to multiple
For each recording, the same movie is recorded to card and .
Note that movie recording is not available when card is an SD/
SDHC card.
Caution
Recording to SD cards may not be possible, depending on the
movie recording size. Pressing the movie shooting button will
not start recording. For details, see
Specifications.
964
Note
Main Proxy
When recording stops for a main movie, recording also stops
for the proxy movie.
Main movie recording continues even if proxy movie recording
stops.
Recording is possible even with only one card loaded.
The same angle of view and frame rate is used for proxy
movies as for main movies.
Recording resolution is as follows.
•
For [ / ] (4096×2160) main movies: [ / ]
(2048×1080) proxy movies
•
For [ / ] (3840×2160) main movies: [ / ]
(1920×1080) proxy movies
At frame rates of 100 fps or higher, proxy movies cannot be
recorded.
Audio quality can be set for each type of movie in [ : Audio
format].
Rec. to multiple
Images are recorded with the same file number to card and
.
The available recording time shown in the viewfinder and on
the Quick Control screen is for the card with less recording
time.
[Card* full] is displayed when one of the cards becomes full,
and shooting is no longer possible. To continue shooting,
either replace the card or set [
Rec options] to [Standard]
and select the card with free space.
See Folder Settings for details on [Folder] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.].
965
Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted
With [ Rec options]/[ Rec options] set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select
the card for recording and playback.
With [ Rec options] set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple], or with [ Rec
options] set to [
Main Proxy] or [Rec. to multiple], select the card for playback.
Setting via the menu
Standard/Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
•
Select [ Record/play] for still photos or [ Record/play] for movies.
: Use card 1 for recording and playback
: Use card 2 for recording and playback
Rec. separately/Rec. to multiple/ Main Proxy
Select [Play].
•
Select [ Play] for still photos or [ Play] for movies.
• Pressing the [ ] button in still photo shooting mode plays images from the card
selected in [ Play].
•
Pressing the [ ] button in movie recording mode plays images from the card
selected in [ Play].
966
Note
With [Priority: ] set, the camera switches to the priority card when cards are
inserted or removed.
967
Folder Settings
Creating a Folder
Renaming Folders
Selecting a Folder
You can create or select the folder for saving still photos. You can also rename folders.
Note
Movie files are saved in the following folder (with **** indicating the reel number).
• XF-HEVC S or XF-AVC S movie files (.MP4): REEL_**** folder in the XFVC
folder (up to 999 files)
•
RAW movie files (.CRM): REEL_**** folder in the CRM folder (up to 999 files)
When a new card is loaded, the folder created is named with the reel number set in
the [Reel Number] setting for [Movies] in [
: File name]. Once the folder has
been created, other folders cannot be created, and folders cannot be renamed.
Creating a Folder
1.
Select [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] ( ).
2.
Select [ Folder].
968
3.
Select [Create folder].
4.
Select [OK].
To rename the folder, select [Change folder name].
969
Renaming Folders
1.
Enter letters and numbers of your choice.
You can enter five characters.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
Use the < > dial or < > to select a character, then press < > to
enter it.
2.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
970
Selecting a Folder
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest file number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest file number
Select a folder on the folder selection screen.
Captured images are stored in your selected folder.
Note
Folders
Folders are named as in “100EOSR5,” with a three-digit folder number followed by
five letters or numbers. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–
9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased
by one is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (
) is executed, a new folder
will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating folders with a computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder with “DCIM” as the name.
Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. “100ABC_D” is the required format for folder names, and
the first three digits must be a folder number in the range 100–999. The last five
characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to Z,
numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that two
folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for example,
“100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining five characters in each name
are different.
971
2.
Set the item.
Select [Numbering].
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
If you want to reset the file numbering, select [Manual reset] ( ).
Select [OK] to create a new folder, and the file number will start with
0001.
Caution
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if
the card still has free space. After a message requesting you to replace the card is
displayed, switch to a new card.
973
Continuous
For continuous file numbering regardless of switching cards or
creating folders
File numbering is continuous up to 9999, even if you replace a card, create a folder, or
switch the target card (as in
→ ). This is useful when you want to save images
numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one
folder on a computer.
Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you
switch to. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you use a
newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing cards or switching target cards
Card A (
)
Card B ( )
(1) Next sequential file number
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
974
Auto Reset
For restarting file numbering from 0001 after switching cards or
creating folders
File numbering is reset to 0001 if you replace a card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (as in
→ ). This is useful if you want to organize images by cards or folders.
Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you
switch to. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing cards or switching target cards
Card A ( )
Card B ( )
(1) File numbering is reset
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
975
Manual Reset
For resetting file numbering to 0001 or starting from 0001 in new
folders
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the
file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images taken
yesterday and the ones taken today.
976
Movie Clip Numbering
Continuous
Auto Reset
Recorded movies saved in a folder are assigned a clip number from 001 to 999. You can
change how clips are numbered.
(Example)
(1) Clip number
1.
Select [ : Clip Number] ( ).
2.
Set the item.
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
Note
The XFVC and CRM folder each hold up to 999 files. You can check the number of
movie files by referring to [
: Set image search conditions] ( ). If a card
already has 999 files, either delete existing movies or use a different card.
977
Continuous
For continuous file numbering regardless of switching cards
Clip numbering is continuous up to 999, even if you replace a card or switch the target card
(as in → ). This is useful when movies numbered between 001 to 999 on multiple cards
will be saved in a single folder on a computer, for example.
Note that numbering may continue after the number of any existing movies on cards that
you switch to. If you prefer continuous movie numbering, consider using a newly formatted
card each time.
Card A ( )
Card B ( )
(1) Next sequential clip number
978
Auto Reset
For restarting clip numbering from 001 after switching cards
Clip numbering is reset to 001 if you replace a card or switch the target card (as in → ).
This is useful if you want to organize movies by cards.
Note that numbering may continue after the number of any existing movies on cards that
you switch to. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 001, use a
newly formatted card each time.
Card A ( )
Card B ( )
(1) Clip numbering is reset
979
File Naming
Registering/Changing Still Photo File Names
Movie File Name Settings
Registering/Changing Still Photo File Names
File names consist of four alphanumeric characters followed by a four-digit file number ( )
and file extension. You can change the first four alphanumeric characters, which by default
are unique for each camera and set when the camera is shipped.
User setting 1 enables you to register four characters of your choice. User setting 2 adds
three initial, registered characters of your choice to a fourth character representing the
image size that is added automatically after you shoot.
(Example)
1.
Select [ : File name] ( ).
2.
Select [Stills].
3.
Select [Change User setting*].
980
4.
Enter letters and numbers of your choice.
Enter four characters for User setting 1 or three for User setting 2.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press < > to enter it.
5.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
981
6.
Select a registered file name.
Select [File name], then choose a registered file name.
Caution
An underscore (“_”) cannot be used as the first character.
Note
Notes on [User setting2]
Shooting after you have selected “*** + image size” (as registered to User setting 2)
will add a character representing the current image size to your file name as the
fourth character. Meanings of added characters are as follows.
“***L”: , , , or
“***M”: or
“***S”: or
“***T”:
“***C”:
The automatically added fourth character enables you to determine image sizes
without opening the files after transferring them to a computer. Based on file
extensions, you can also distinguish RAW, JPEG, and HEIF images.
982
Movie File Name Settings
You can set how movie files (clips) are named.
Movie file name structure
(Example)
Item Description
(1) Camera index
Two letters in the range A–Z. An underscore (_) can also be used as
the second character. Identifies the camera used.
(2) Reel number
A 4-digit number from 0001 to 9999. A different number is
automatically assigned to identify the card used. You can set the
default value. Advances by one when the first recording on a new
card* is made.
*Newly purchased or formatted card
(3) Clip number
A 3-digit number from 001 to 999 preceded by C, as in C001–C999.
After C999, D is used at the beginning.
Automatically assigned to each clip (movie file). You can set the
default value.
(4) Codec identifier
“A” (as in AVC) is automatically set for H.264 main movies, “H” for
HEVC, and “X” for RAW.
(5) Recording date
Year, month, and day, set automatically based on when recording
began.
(6) Recording time
Hour, minute, and second, set automatically based on when recording
began.
(7) Random component
Two characters, from A to Z and 0 to 9, randomly set for each clip
(movie file).
(8) User-defined field Five characters, from A to Z and 0 to 9. Default: CANON.
(9) Proxy identifier _Proxy is automatically appended to proxy movie files.
File names for main and proxy movies is identical except for _Proxy, as described in (9).
File names assigned for [Rec. to multiple] are the same for files on both cards.
983
User defined
Enter letters or numbers of your choice.
• You can enter five characters.
•
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
•
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
•
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press < > to enter it.
985
Card Formatting
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer,
format the card with this camera.
Caution
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased.
Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you
need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc.
before formatting the card.
1.
Select [ : Format card] ( ).
2.
Select a card.
[ ] represents card 1, and [ ], card 2.
986
3.
Format the card.
Select [OK].
For low-level formatting, press the < > button to add a checkmark
< > to [Low level format], then select [OK].
987
Conditions requiring card formatting
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed ( ).
Low-level formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card's writing or reading speed seems slow or if you
want to totally erase the data on the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the formatting
will take longer than normal formatting.
During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in
this case, normal formatting will already be complete and you can use the card as usual.
Card file formats
CFexpress cards are exFAT formatted.
SD cards are FAT16 or FAT12 formatted.
SDHC cards are FAT32 formatted.
SDXC cards are exFAT formatted.
Individual movies recorded to exFAT-formatted cards are recorded as a single file
(without splitting them into multiple files) even if they exceed 4 GB, so the resulting
movie file will exceed 4 GB.
Caution
It may not be possible to use cards formatted with this camera in other cameras.
Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some computer
operating systems or card readers.
Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be aware
of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards, take steps to
protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards.
Note
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
988
Auto Rotate
You can change the auto rotation setting that straightens images shot in vertical orientation
when they are displayed.
1.
Select [ : Auto rotate] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
On
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
On
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
Off
Images are not automatically rotated.
989
Caution
Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback even
if you later set auto rotation to [On].
Note
If a picture is taken while the camera is aimed up or down, automatic rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
990
Adding Orientation Information to Movies
For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information indicating which
side is up can be added automatically to enable playback in the same orientation on
smartphones or other devices.
1.
Select [ : Add rotate info] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Enable
Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in
which they were recorded.
Disable
Play movies horizontally on smartphones or other devices, regardless
of the recording orientation.
Caution
Movies are played horizontally on the camera and via HDMI video output,
regardless of this setting.
Orientation information is not added to main and proxy movies when [ : Main
rec. format] is set to [RAW].
991
Date/Time/Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow
these steps to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and
the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be
sure to set your date/time.
1.
Select [ : Date/Time/Zone] ( ).
2.
Set the time zone.
Turn the < > dial to select [Time zone].
Press < >.
992
Turn the < > dial to select the time zone, then press < >.
If your time zone is not listed, press the < > button, then set the
difference from UTC in [Time difference].
Turn the < > dial to select a [Time difference] option (+ / − / hour /
minute), then press < >.
Set by turning the < > dial, then press < >.
After entering the time zone or time difference, turn the < > dial to
select [OK], then press <
>.
3.
Set the date and time.
Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < >.
Set by turning the < > dial, then press < >.
993
4.
Set daylight saving time.
Set it as necessary.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >.
When the daylight saving time is set to [ ], the time set in step 3 will
advance by 1 hour. If [ ] is set, the daylight saving time will be
canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour.
5.
Exit the setting.
Turn the < > dial to select [OK].
Caution
The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when the battery is exhausted, or when it is exposed to freezing
temperatures for an extended period. If this happens, set them once again.
After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are set.
994
Note
Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.
995
System Frequency
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting determines the frame
rates available when you record movies.
1.
Select [ : System frequency] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
59.94Hz:NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico, etc.).
50.00Hz:PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
997
Example: [Multi function lock]
< >
999
Volume
The volume of camera sounds is adjustable.
1.
Select [ : Volume] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
3.
Adjust the volume.
Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume, then press < >.
Note
The camera always beeps, regardless of [ : Shutter mode] settings, with
[Always play at release] selected in [Shutter volume] settings.
1002
4.
Adjust the volume.
Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume, then press < >.
Note
You can use headphones to check sound from the built-in microphone or an
external microphone when [ : Sound recording] is set to [On] and [High Frame
Rate] is set to [Disable].
Selecting output channels for the headphone terminal
You can select the combination of channels for output from the headphone terminal during
shooting or playback. This setting also applies to speaker output (
).
1.
Select [ : Audio monitor] ( ).
2.
Select [Headphones].
1004
3.
Select [Shoot. monitor CH] or [Playback monitor CH].
4.
Select the combination of channels for audio output (L/R).
Shoot. monitor CH
Playback monitor CH
CH1+2 indicates that the signal is a combination of channels 1 and 2.
The same applies to CH1+3, CH3+4, and so on.
Caution
There is no sound from channels 3 and 4 for [Playback monitor CH] when you
shoot with [
: Audio format] ( ) set to [AAC/16bit/2CH], because no sound is
recorded for channels 3 and 4.
1005
Screen and Viewfinder Display
You can specify to use the screen or viewfinder for display, to avoid accidentally activating
the viewfinder sensor when the screen is open.
1.
Select [ : Screen/viewfinder display] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
AUTO1: Auto 1 ( : only screen)
Always use the screen for display when it is open.
Use the screen for display when it is closed and facing you, and switch
to the viewfinder when you look through it.
AUTO2: Auto 2 ( : auto switching)
Normally use the screen for display when it is facing you, but switch to
the viewfinder when you look through it.
: Viewfinder
Always use the viewfinder for display.
: Screen
Always use the screen for display when it is open.
Note
You can also switch between viewfinder and screen display by pressing a button
you have customized by assigning to switching. With this setting set to [AUTO1] or
[AUTO2], the camera responds to the viewfinder sensor accordingly.
With [AUTO1] set, the camera does not respond to the viewfinder sensor when the
screen is open.
1013
UI Magnification
You can magnify menu screens by double-tapping with two fingers. Double-tap again to
restore the original display size.
1.
Select [ : UI magnification] ( ).
2.
Select [Enable].
Caution
Use camera controls when configuring menu functions with the display magnified.
Touch-screen operations are not supported.
1014
HDMI Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a television or
external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1.
Select [ : HDMI resolution] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Auto
The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or
delay issues when the camera switches resolution.
1080i
Output at 1080i resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or delay
issues when the camera switches resolution.
Note
If the card contains a mix of movies recorded with different settings, it may take
some time before images are displayed.
1015
3.
Select an option.
Off
Keeps the fan off.
On (always at set speed)
The fan remains on at the speed set in [Fan rotation speed].
On (high speed in standby)
The fan remains on at high speed both in standby and when the
camera is not recording movies or sound. During sound recording, the
fan remains on at the speed set in [Fan rotation speed].
Caution
Warm air is discharged from the exhaust vent while the cooling fan is on.
Under these conditions, the fan remains on at high speed even when set to [On
(high speed in standby)].
•
When recording High Frame Rate movies
•
When recording time-lapse movies
•
When only recording to external devices connected via HDMI
1017
Fan Rotation Speed
1.
Select [Fan rotation speed].
2.
Set the fan level.
Note
Setting [Fan] to [On (always at set speed)] with [Fan rotation speed] set to
[Stop] will automatically switch [Fan rotation speed] to [Low].
1018
Shutter at Shutdown
You can set whether to leave the shutter open or close it when the camera's power switch is
set to < >.
1.
Select [ : Shutter at shutdown] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
: Closed
Closes the shutter. Normally set to closed, to prevent dust from
adhering to the sensor when you switch lenses.
: Open
Leaves the shutter open. This keeps camera quieter when the power
switch is set to < > or < >. Useful when you want to shoot
quietly.
Note
Regardless of the setting, the shutter remains as it is when auto power off is
activated.
1019
Sensor Cleaning
Cleaning Now
Cleaning Automatically
Cleaning Manually
The camera's sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor.
Note
For best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other flat
surface.
Cleaning Now
1.
Select [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).
2.
Select [Clean now ].
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note that
[Clean now ] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
1020
Cleaning Automatically
1.
Select [Auto cleaning ].
2.
Select an option.
Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < >.
Note
When set to [At pwr off] or [Enable], the sensor is cleaned when the screen goes
off, including when it has been turned off automatically.
1021
Cleaning Manually
Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed manually with a
commercially available blower or similar tool.
Always use a fully charged battery.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it
done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
1.
Select [Clean manually].
2.
Select [OK].
3.
Remove the lens and clean the sensor.
1022
4.
End the cleaning.
Set the power switch to < >.
Note
Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended.
Caution
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut
off, the shutter will close. These may result in damaging the image sensor
and shutter curtains.
•
Setting the power switch to < >.
•
Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power
is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may damage
the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper will sound as
a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor
cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
1023
Password Management
Use these settings to manage the password entered when the power switch is set to
< > or the camera resumes operation from auto power off. For instructions on setting
the password required on camera startup, see
Setting a Password.
Password Request
Changing the Password
Clearing Entered Information
Password Request
You can choose whether a password must be entered after the power switch is set to
<
> or the camera resumes operation from auto power off.
1.
Select [ : Manage password] ( ).
2.
Select [Pword. request].
1024
3.
Enter the password initially set.
4.
Select an option.
1025
Changing the Password
You can change the password to enter when the power switch is set to < > or the
camera resumes operation from auto power off.
1.
Select [Change password].
2.
Enter the password initially set.
1026
3.
Enter a new password.
Enter a six-digit number, then select [OK].
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Reenter the password, then select [OK].
1027
Clearing Entered Information
You can reset passwords and settings for shooting and menu functions to defaults.
1.
Select [Clear entered information].
2.
Select [OK].
1028
Power Saving
You can adjust the timing of when the screen dims and then turns off, when the camera
turns off, and when the viewfinder turns off after the camera is left idle (Screen dimmer,
Screen off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off).
1.
Select [ : Power saving] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Note
[Screen dimmer] and [Screen off] apply while the shooting screen is displayed.
These settings do not apply during menu display or image playback.
The camera turns off during menu display or image playback after the time set in
[Screen dimmer], [Screen off], and [Auto power off] elapses.
To protect the screen, the screen turns off 30 min. after it is dimmed (although the
camera itself remains on), even if [Screen off] and [Auto power off] are set to
[Disable].
[Viewfinder off] also applies while the screen is still on. After this time elapses, the
viewfinder sensor is deactivated.
Only [Viewfinder off] applies during viewfinder display. After this time elapses, the
viewfinder sensor is deactivated and the viewfinder turns off.
Images on the screen are displayed at a lower frame rate after the screen dims
during still photo shooting standby.
Auto power off does not take effect during USB connections, whether to Camera
Connect or other apps or devices.
1029
Resetting the Camera
The camera's settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be restored to their
defaults.
1.
Select [ : Reset camera] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Reset individual settings
Settings for individual selected options can be reset.
Factory reset
Resets all settings to defaults.
3.
Clear the settings.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note
Still photo Custom shooting modes are reset when [Custom shooting mode (C1-
C3)] in [Reset individual settings] is selected in still photo shooting mode, and
movie Custom shooting modes are reset when this option is selected in movie
recording mode.
1030
Custom Shooting Mode (C1–C3)
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
You can register current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function
settings as Custom shooting modes assigned to [C1] to [C3] modes. You can register
different functions to use when shooting still photos or movies.
1.
Select [ : Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)] ( ).
2.
Select [Register settings].
1031
3.
Register the desired items.
Select the Custom shooting mode to register, then select [OK] on the
[Register settings] screen.
The current camera settings are registered to Custom shooting mode
C*.
In still photo shooting, the registered shooting mode is indicated in the
Custom shooting mode icon (as in [
], [ ], [ ]).
Custom shooting mode icons change to [ ], [ ], and [ ] for
movie recording.
Depending on the menu items, setting options changed in other
shooting modes may not be carried over to the Custom shooting mode
settings.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode can be
automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable this automatic update,
set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
1032
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of each mode can be restored to default
settings, as they were before registration.
Note
You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
1033
Save/Load Camera Settings on Card
Saving Camera Settings
Loading Camera Settings
Current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function settings can be
saved to a card as a camera settings file. By loading a camera settings file, you can apply
the state of the settings as saved. This enables you to save optimal settings for particular
scenes or subjects, or load settings files on other EOS R5 Mark II cameras to use the
cameras with the same settings.
Saving Camera Settings
1.
Select [ : Save/load cam settings on card] ( ).
2.
Select [Save to card].
1034
3.
Select [OK].
(1) Target card
The camera settings are saved to the card.
To rename the file to an 8-character name of your choice before saving
it, press the < > button on the screen in step 3.
For instructions, see File Naming. The steps are the same.
Caution
Camera settings files saved by a camera other than an EOS R5 Mark II cannot be
loaded on this camera.
It may not be possible to load camera settings files that were saved by a camera
with a different firmware version.
Note
Up to ten camera settings files can be saved on a card. If a card already has ten
camera settings files, either overwrite existing files or use a different card.
1035
Battery Information
Registering Batteries to the Camera
Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Not in Use
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using. By registering multiple batteries
to the camera, you can check their approximate remaining capacity and usage history.
1.
Select [ : Battery info.] ( ).
2.
Check the battery information.
(1) Battery position
(2) Model of battery or household power source used.
(3) Battery level indicator ( ) with the remaining battery level, in 1%
increments.
(4) The number of shots taken with the current battery. The number is reset
when the battery is charged.
(5) State of battery recharge performance, in three levels.
(Green): Battery recharge performance is good.
(Green): Battery recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
1037
Caution
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6P is recommended. Use of non-
genuine batteries may prevent the camera from operating at full performance and
may lead to malfunction.
Remaining capacity display in 1% increments is not shown with Battery Pack
LP-E6NH/LP-E6N or Battery Grip BG-R10 attached. Moreover, these batteries
cannot be registered.
Note
The shutter count is the number of still photos taken (not including movie
recording).
Battery information is also displayed when optional battery grips or cooling fans are
used.
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions in the
message.
1038
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6P battery packs to the camera. To register multiple batteries
to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery.
1.
Press the < > button.
With the battery info. screen displayed, press the < > button.
If the battery is not registered, it will be grayed out.
2.
Select [Register].
3.
Select [OK].
The battery is now displayed in white.
1039
Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers
It is convenient to label registered LP-E6P battery packs with their serial numbers, using
commercially available labels.
1.
On a label approx. 25×15 mm, write the serial number (1).
2.
Apply the label.
Set the power switch to < >.
Remove the battery from the camera.
Apply the label as shown in the illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
1040
Caution
Do not apply the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2.
Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or
impossible to turn on the power.
The label may peel off after repeated insertion and removal from the battery
magazine if an optional Battery Grip BG-R20/BG-R20EP is used. If it peels off,
apply a new label.
1041
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered
Battery Not in Use
You can check the remaining capacity of batteries not currently in use, as well as their last
date of use.
1.
Find the matching serial number.
On the battery history screen, find the battery serial number (1)
matching the serial number that the battery is labeled with.
You can check the respective battery's approximate remaining capacity
(2) and the date when it was last used (3).
1042
Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information.
Caution
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when
you select [Display copyright info.].
Note
You can also set or check copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software,
).
1.
Select [ : Copyright information] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
1044
3.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press < > to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
1045
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and
[Copyright] information.
1046
Other Information
Show log
Select [ : Show log] ( ) to display a record of any changes to the password, to
network information, or to other settings.
Manual/software URL
To download instruction manuals, select [ : Manual/software URL] ( ) and scan the
displayed QR code with a smartphone. You can also use a computer to access the
website at the URL displayed and download software.
Certification Logo Display
Select [ : Certification Logo Display] ( ) to display some of the logos of the
camera's certifications. Other certification logos can be found on the camera body and
packaging.
Firmware
Used to update the firmware of the camera, lens, or other compatible accessories in
use.
An asterisk after the icon and [ : Firmware] when online features such as [
Upload to image.canon] are set and the camera can connect to the internet indicates
that new firmware is available on Canon servers. To update the firmware, select [ :
Firmware] and follow the on-screen instructions. The asterisk is cleared when
[Network] in [
: Network settings] is set to [Disable], or if you connect a different
device.
You can also update the camera firmware from Camera Connect ( ).
1047
Tab Menus: Control Customization
Customized controls when shooting (still photo shooting)
(1)
Customize buttons for shooting
(2) Customize dials/control ring
(3) direction to set Tv/Av
(4) direction to set Tv/Av
(5) Switch / when shooting
(6) Touch Shutter
(7) Multi function lock
Customized controls when shooting (movie recording)
(1) Customize buttons for shooting
(2) Shutter btn function for movies
(3)
Customize dials/control ring
(4) direction to set Tv/Av
(5) direction to set Tv/Av
(6) Switch / when shooting
(7) Multi function lock
1049
Customized controls when shooting
(1) Touch & drag AF settings
(2) AF area selection control
(3) sensitivity- AF pt select
(4) Focus/control ring
(5) Focus ring rotation
(6) RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity
Customized controls when playback
(1) Customize buttons for playback
(2) Image jump w/
(3) Img jump w/ +
(4) Switch / during playback
1050
Control Customization Details
[Customized controls when shooting]
[Customized controls when playback]
[Customized controls/Reset]
You can customize camera features on the [ ] tab to suit your shooting preferences.
[Customized controls when shooting]
[Customize buttons for shooting]
You can assign common shooting functions to camera buttons that are easy for you to use.
Different functions, for use when shooting still photos or movies, can be assigned to the
same button.
1.
Select [ : Customize buttons for shooting] ( , ).
2.
Select a camera control.
To switch to [ : Customize buttons for playback] ( ), press the
<
> button.
1052
3.
Select a function to assign.
Press < > to set it.
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[ ] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
Note
[ ]: “AF Stop” or “Lens Function” button on super telephoto lenses with Image
Stabilizer.
[ ]: “Menu direct” button on Speedlites.
Only still photo shooting settings can be assigned to [ ], [ ], or [ ].
To clear settings configured with [ : Customize buttons for shooting], select
[ : Clear all customized controls].
1053
Functions available for customization
AF
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: Metering and AF start
○*
1
- - - - ● ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: AF stop
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● - - -
: AF point selection
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ - -
: Direct AF point selection
- - - - - - - - - - - ● -
: Set AF point to center
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Start/stop whole area AF tracking
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● - -
: Switch to registered AF point*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Switch to registered AF func.*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Direct AF area selection*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Direct select of sub to detect*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: One-Shot AF Servo AF*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
1054
: Moving AF pt, meter., AF by eye ctrl*
1
●*
3
- - - - - - - - - - - -
: Move AF point by eye control*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Moving AF point, start AF by eye ctrl*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Eye control*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: AF on detected subject*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Eye Detection AF*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Eye detection
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Spot detection
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Register people priority
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Action Priority*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Focus mode
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Peaking
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Focus guide
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Register focus preset
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Recall focus preset
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
1055
: Subj. detect. AF*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Drive mode*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Switch cont. shooting modes*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*2: Cannot be assigned as a function available in still photo shooting.
*3: Default in still photo shooting.
1056
Exposure Compensation
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: AE lock, AF stop
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Metering start
○*
1
- - - - - - - - - - - -
: AE lock
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: AE lock (hold)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○
●*
4
○ ○ ○ - - -
: AE lock (while button pressed)*
1
○ - - - - - - - - - - - -
: AE lock/FE lock*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●*
3
○ ○ ○ - - -
: Release AE Lock
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Expo comp (hold btn, turn )
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: ISO speed
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Set ISO speed(hold btn,turn )
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Flash firing*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: FE lock*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*3: Default in still photo shooting.
*4: Default in movie recording.
1057
Image
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: Image size selection*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: One-touch image quality setting*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: One-touch image quality (hold)*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Cropping/aspect ratio*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Switch between crop/aspect*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Auto Lighting Optimizer
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: White balance selection
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: WB Shift/Bkt.*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: WB correction*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Picture Style
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Record func+card/folder sel.
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*2: Cannot be assigned as a function available in still photo shooting.
1058
Movies
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: False color*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Zebra*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Movie recording
-
●*
1
*
3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Pause Movie Servo AF*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Audio Status*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●*
4
○ ○ - -
: Cinema zoom (to tele)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Cinema zoom (to wide)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Custom Picture*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Pre-recording*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Movie self-timer*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Standby: Low res.*
2
- - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*2: Cannot be assigned as a function available in still photo shooting.
*3: Default in still photo shooting.
*4: Default in movie recording.
1059
Operation
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: Flash function settings*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ -
●*
3
: Quick flash group control*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
: Dial function settings
-
○*
1
● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Maximize screen brightness (temp)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Power off
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Screen off
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Unlock while button pressed
- - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - -
: Short press: LCD illumination Long press: LCD info switching
- - - ○ - - - - - - - - -
: Short press: LCD info switching Long press: LCD illumination
- - - ● - - - - - - - - -
: LCD panel illumination
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: LCD panel info switching
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Shooting mode settings
-
○*
1
○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
1060
: Switch to Custom shooting mode
- - ○ - - - - - - - - - -
: Silent shutter function*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Switch focus/control ring
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Depth-of-field preview*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●*
3
○ ○ - -
: Reset selected item in Fv mode*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Reset Tv/Av/ /ISO in Fv mode*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Quick Control screen
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Magnify/Reduce
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Image replay
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Magnify images during playback
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Register/recall shooting func*
1
- - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
: Menu display
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Manual HF anti-flicker shoot(Tv)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Recom. Tv for HF anti-flicker shoot*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Touch Shutter*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
1061
: OVF sim. view assist*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Display frame rate set.*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Communication function
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Airplane mode
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Create folder*
1
- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: Switch between VF/screen
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
: No function (disabled)
-
○*
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○*
1
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*3: Default in still photo shooting.
1062
Shutter btn function for movies
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely
during movie recording.
Caution
In movie recording, the [Shutter btn function for movies] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button in [ : Customize buttons for shooting].
1.
Select [ : Shutter btn function for movies] ( ).
2.
Select an option.
Half-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button halfway.
Fully-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button
completely.
1063
3.
Select an option.
[Half-press] options
[Fully-press] options
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop
movie recording not only with the movie shooting button but also by
pressing the shutter button completely, or by using Remote Switch
RS-80N3 (sold separately).
1064
Customize dials/control ring
Frequently used functions can be assigned to the <
>/< >/< >/< > dials.
1.
Select [ : Customize dials/control ring] ( , ).
2.
Select a camera control.
3.
Select a function to assign.
Press < > to set it.
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
Note
To clear settings configured with [ : Customize dials/control ring], select [ :
Clear all customized controls].
1065
Functions available for dials
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
: Direct AF point selection
- ○ ○ -
: Select AF area
- ○ ○ ○
: Select AF area(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: Change shutter speed
- - - ○
: Change aperture value
- - - ○
: Exposure compensation
- ○ ○ ○
: Set ISO speed
- ● ○ ○
: Change shutter spd. (hold meter. btn)
- - - ○
: Change aperture (hold meter. btn)
- - - ○
: Exposure comp. (hold meter. btn)
- - - ●
: Set ISO speed(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: Flash exposure comp./output(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
● ○ ○ -
: Aperture setting in M mode
○ ○ ● -
: White balance selection
- ○ ○ ○
: Select color temperature
- ○ ○ ○
: Picture Style
- ○ ○ ○
: White balance selection(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: Select color temperature(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: Picture Style(while holding metering button)
- - - ○
: No function (disabled)
○ ○ ○ ○
Note
The < > dial cannot be customized in [Fv] mode.
[ ]: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters.
1066
direction to set Tv/Av
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture value can be reversed.
Reverses the turning direction of the <
>, < >, and < > dial in [M] shooting mode
and only the <
> dial in other shooting modes. The direction of the < > and < >
dials in [M] mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation in [P], [Tv], and [Av]
modes.
: Normal
: Reverse direction
direction to set Tv/Av
The direction to set the shutter speed and aperture value with the control ring of RF or RF-S
lenses or mount adapters can be reversed.
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Switch
/ when shooting
Functions assigned to the Main dial and Quick control dial 2 can be reversed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Touch Shutter
Touch Shutter can be specified. When set to [Enable], [ ] display in the lower left of the
shooting screen changes to [ ], and Touch Shutter is enabled.
For Touch Shutter instructions, see Shooting with the Touch Shutter.
1067
Multi function lock
Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This can help
prevent accidentally changing settings.
1.
Select [ : Multi function lock] ( , ).
2.
Select camera controls to lock.
Select a camera control and press < > to display [ ].
3.
Select [OK].
Setting the power/multi-function lock switch to < > locks the
selected [ ] camera controls.
Note
An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Multi function lock] indicates that the default
setting has been modified.
1068
Touch & drag AF settings
You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by tapping or dragging on the screen as you
look through the viewfinder.
Touch & drag AF
Select [Enable] to enable Touch and Drag AF.
1069
Positioning method
You can set how positions are specified by tapping or dragging.
Absolute
The AF point moves to the tapped or dragged position on the screen.
Relative
The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount corresponding to the
amount you drag, no matter where you tap the screen.
Active touch area
You can specify the area of the screen used for tap and drag operations.
Note
A round orange frame [ ] is displayed when you tap the screen with [ : AF
area] set to [Whole area AF]. After you lift your finger at the position to move the
AF point to, [
] is displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject
selection, tap [ ].
1070
Rel. sensitivity
By setting [Positioning method] to [Relative], you can specify the amount of movement in
response to tapping or dragging.
For faster AF point positioning, set toward the positive end, and for slower positioning, set
toward the negative end.
1071
AF area selection control
You can set how AF area selection methods are switched.
: →M-Fn button
Press the < > button, then the < > button. Each press switches the AF area.
: →Main Dial
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to switch the AF area.
Note
When [ →Main Dial] is set, use < > to move the AF point horizontally.
sensitivity- AF pt select
You can adjust Multi-controller sensitivity, which applies to AF point positioning.
1072
Focus/control ring
In this menu, you can configure lens [Focus/control ring] functionality.
Lenses without a focusing/control ring switch
FOCUS: Use as focus ring
The ring works as a focusing ring.
CONTROL: Use as control ring
The ring works as a control ring. To restrict [
: Focus mode] to [AF], press the < >
button and add a checkmark [
] to [Focus mode is AF when used as a control ring].
Lenses for which this menu is displayed that have both focusing and
control rings
FOCUS: Use as focus ring
No change to focusing or control ring operation.
CONTROL: Use as control ring
The focusing ring works as a control ring. Control ring operation is disabled.
Note
This menu is not displayed for lenses with a focusing/control ring switch. Use the
lens to configure focusing/control ring functionality.
For details on lenses with both focusing and control rings for which the camera
displays this menu, visit the Canon website.
Switching is also possible from the Quick Control screen, when customized with
[ : Customize Quick Controls] ( ).
1073
Focus ring rotation
You can reverse the direction that the focusing ring of RF lens is rotated to adjust settings.
: Normal
: Reverse direction
RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity of the RF lens focusing ring.
: Varies with rotation speed
Focusing ring sensitivity varies depending on rotation speed.
: Linked to rotation degree
The focal position is adjusted based on the amount of rotation, regardless of the rotation
speed.
1074
[Customized controls when playback]
Customize buttons for playback
You can assign common playback functions to camera buttons that are easy for you to use.
1.
Select [ : Customize buttons for playback] ( ).
2.
Select a camera control.
To switch to [ : Customize buttons for shooting] ( ), press the
< > button.
3.
Select a function to assign.
Press < > to set it.
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
Note
To clear settings configured with [ : Customize buttons for playback], select
[
: Clear all customized controls].
1075
Functions available for customization
●: Default ○: Available for customization
: Protect
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Rating
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Erase images
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
/ : Protect(Hold:Record memo)
○ - - - - -
/ : Rating (Hold: Record memo)
● - - - - -
: Hold to record voice memo
○ - - - - -
: Press to record voice memo
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
/ : Play memo(Hold:Rec. memo)
○ - - - - -
/ : Protect (image jump w/ + )
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
/ : Rating (image jump w/ + )
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Cropping
○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
1076
: Image search
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Magnify/Reduce
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Switch display
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Send images to smartphone
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Transfer images to FTP server
○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
: Image sel./transfer (FTP Server)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Image sel./transfer (EOS Utility)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
: Same as Custom. Button when shoot.
- ● ○ ○ ● ○
: No function (disabled)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ●
1077
Image jump w/
To set how the camera jumps through images, you can turn the < > dial on the
playback screen in single-image display.
Note
With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the < > dial to
select the number of images to jump by.
With [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial to select the rating ( ).
Selecting will show all rated images as you browse.
You can also change the jump method by pressing < > horizontally on the
playback screen in single-image display.
1078
Img jump w/ +
To set how the camera jumps through images, you can turn the < > dial while pressing
the button assigned to [
/ ] [ / ] on the playback screen in single-image display.
Note
You can configure this function when assigning [ / ] [ / ] to a button in [ :
Customize buttons for playback] ( ).
With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the < > dial to
select the number of images to jump by.
With [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial to select the rating ( ).
Selecting will show all rated images as you browse.
1079
Switch / during playback
You can switch the functions assigned to these dials, as used on the playback screen.
Disable
Assigns [Image jump] to the < > dial and [Magnify/Index view] to the < > dial.
Enable
Assigns [Magnify/Index view] to the < > dial and [Image jump] to the < > dial.
Note
Corresponding icons in menus and on screens such as the Quick Control and
Magnify/Reduce screen are changed accordingly.
1080
[Customized controls/Reset]
Eye control
Eye control can be specified. For eye control instructions, see Using Eye Control.
Touch control
[Sensitive] makes the touch-screen panel more responsive than [Standard].
To disable touch operations, select [Disable].
Caution
Precautions for touch-screen panel operations
Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or if
your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction may
occur. In this case, turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
Attaching a commercially available protective sheet or a sticker on the screen may
impair responsiveness to touch operations.
The camera may not respond as well if you quickly perform touch operation when
[Sensitive] is set.
1081
Clear all customized controls
Selecting [
: Clear all customized controls] clears all control customization settings.
1082
Tab Menus: Custom Functions
Shooting mode/Exposure
(1)
Restrict shooting modes
(2)
Exposure level increments
(3) ISO speed setting increments
(4)
Speed from metering/ISO Auto
(5) Bracketing auto cancel
(6) Bracketing sequence
(7)
Number of bracketed shots
Exposure
(1) Safety shift
(2)
Same expo. for new aperture
(3) AE lock meter. mode after focus
(4) Set shutter speed range
(5) Set aperture range
(6)
AE Microadjustment
(7) FE Microadjustment
1084
Drive
(1) Continuous shooting speed
(2) Limit continuous shot count
Various settings/Reset
(1) Add cropping information
(2) Default Erase option
(3) Av setting without lens
(4)
Release shutter w/o lens
(5)
Retract lens on power off
(6) Add IPTC information
(7) Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)
Selecting [
: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings.
1085
[Shooting mode/Exposure]
Restrict shooting modes
You can restrict the shooting modes available with the < > button.
Select available shooting modes [Fv/P/Av/M/Tv/BULB/C1/C2/C3], then press < > to add
a checkmark [
]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Caution
Restricted shooting mode settings are not registered to [C1], [C2], or [C3].
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all nine modes at the same time.
Exposure level increments
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation,
AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/2: 1/2-stop
Note
Display when set to [1/2-stop] is as follows.
ISO speed setting increments
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increment to a whole stop.
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
Note
Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop increments
when ISO Auto is set.
1087
Speed from metering/ISO Auto
You can set the ISO speed status after the metering timer ends in cases where, for ISO
Auto operation in [P]/[Tv]/[Av]/[M]/[BULB] mode, the camera has adjusted the ISO speed
during metering or during the metering timer.
: Restore Auto after metering
: Retain speed after metering
Bracketing auto cancel
You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the power switch is set
to < >.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed.
0−+: 0, -, +
−0+: -, 0, +
+0−: +, 0, -
AEB
White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction M/G Direction
0: Standard exposure 0: Standard white balance 0: Standard white balance
−: Underexposure −: Blue bias −: Magenta bias
+: Overexposure +: Amber bias +: Green bias
1088
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed.
When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed shots will be taken as shown
in the following table.
3: 3 shots
2: 2 shots
5: 5 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0) –1 +1
2: 2 shots Standard (0) ±1
5: 5 shots Standard (0) –2 –1 +1 +2
7: 7 shots Standard (0) –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3
Note
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or − side when setting the AEB range. With
white balance bracketing, the second shot is adjusted toward the negative side for
the B/A or M/G direction.
1089
[Exposure]
Safety shift
If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to
obtain the standard exposure. [Shutter speed/Aperture] applies to [Tv] or [Av] mode. [ISO
speed] applies to [P], [Tv], or [Av] mode.
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
ISO: ISO speed
Note
Safety shift overrides any changes to [ISO speed range] or [Min. shutter spd.]
from default settings in [ : ISO speed settings] if standard exposure cannot
be obtained.
The minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed are
determined by [Auto range] ( ). However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds
the [Auto range], the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set
ISO speed.
Safety shift will take effect as necessary even when flash is used.
1090
Same expo. for new aperture
The maximum aperture value may decrease (the lowest f/number may increase) in [M]
mode (manual exposure shooting) with ISO speed set manually (except when set to ISO
Auto) if you (1) Change lenses, (2) Attach an extender, or (3) Use a zoom lens with a
variable maximum aperture value. This function prevents the corresponding underexposure
by adjusting ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv value) automatically to maintain the same
exposure as before (1), (2), or (3).
With [ISO speed/Shutter speed], the ISO speed is automatically adjusted within the ISO
speed range. If exposure cannot be maintained by adjusting ISO speed, shutter speed (Tv
value) is automatically adjusted.
OFF: Disable
ISO: ISO speed
ISO/Tv: ISO speed/Shutter speed
Tv: Shutter speed
Caution
Does not respond to changes in effective aperture value from changes in
magnification when macro lenses are used.
Cannot provide the same exposure as before (1), (2), or (3) if [ISO speed] is set
and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds in [ISO speed range].
Cannot provide the same exposure as before (1), (2), or (3) if [Shutter speed] is
set and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds set in [ : Set shutter
speed range].
Shutter speed is limited to 1/8000 when [ : Shutter mode] is [Electronic ]
and [Same expo. for new aperture] is set to [Shutter speed] or [ISO speed/
Shutter speed].
Note
Also responds to changes in the highest f/number (minimum aperture).
The original exposure setting is restored if you perform (1), (2), or (3) with [ISO
speed], [ISO speed/Shutter speed], or [Shutter speed] set and do not adjust ISO
speed, shutter speed, or aperture value before returning the camera to the original
state, before (1), (2), or (3).
Shutter speed may change to maintain exposure if the ISO speed increases to an
expanded ISO speed when [ISO speed] is set.
1091
AE lock meter. mode after focus
For each metering mode, you can specify whether to lock the exposure (AE lock) once
subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF. The exposure will be locked while you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway. Select metering modes for AE lock and add a
checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range for each [
: Shutter mode] option. In [Fv], [Tv], or
[M] mode, you can set the shutter speed manually within your specified range. In [P] or [Av]
mode, or in [Fv] mode with shutter speed set to [AUTO], the shutter speed is set
automatically within your specified range (except for movie recording). Select [OK] to
register the setting.
Mech shutter/elec 1st-curtain
•
Lowest speed: Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/4000 sec.
•
Highest speed: Can be set in a range of 1/8000 sec.–15 sec.
Electronic
•
Lowest speed: Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/16000 sec.
•
Highest speed: Can be set in a range of 1/32000 sec.–15 sec.
Caution
Setting [Highest speed] for [Electronic ] to 1/32000 sec. will not limit highest
speeds faster than 1/8000 sec. in [P] or [Av] mode.
This setting does not apply to high-frequency anti-flicker shooting.
1092
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture value range. In [Fv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] mode, you can set the
aperture value manually within your specified range. In [P] or [Tv] mode, or in [Fv] mode
with the aperture value set to [AUTO], the aperture value is set automatically within your
specified range. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Max. aperture
Can be set in a range of f/1.0–f/64.
Min. aperture
Can be set in a range of f/91–f/1.4.
Note
The available aperture value range varies depending on the lens's minimum and
maximum aperture value.
1093
AE Microadjustment
Caution
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment only if
necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent you from
obtaining suitable exposure.
You can fine-tune the standard exposure level. Effective if images in autoexposure shooting
without exposure compensation usually seem underexposed or overexposed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
To access the adjustment screen, select [Enable], then press the < > button.
Standard exposure can be adjusted in a range of ±1 stop, in 1/8-stop increments. Set on
the positive side if shots tend to be underexposed and on the negative side if they tend
to be overexposed.
Caution
The effective exposure compensation range available in movie recording remains
unchanged if you adjust standard exposure with AE Microadjustment, and only the
standard exposure level is changed. An exposure compensation amount equivalent
to the AE Microadjustment amount is not applied to resulting images if the effective
exposure compensation range in movie recording is exceeded (for example, an
exposure compensation amount of +1 stop is not applied if AE Microadjustment is
set to +1 stop and exposure compensation to +3 stops).
Note
Exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops from the adjusted standard
exposure when shooting.
1094
FE Microadjustment
Caution
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment only if
necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent you from
obtaining suitable flash exposure.
You can fine-tune the standard flash exposure level. Effective if main subjects in autoflash
shooting without flash exposure compensation usually seem underexposed or overexposed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
To access the adjustment screen, select [Enable], then press the < > button.
Standard flash exposure can be adjusted in a range of ±1 stop, in 1/8-stop increments.
Set on the positive side if main subjects tend to be underexposed and on the negative
side if they tend to be overexposed.
1095
[Drive]
Continuous shooting speed
You can set the continuous shooting speed for [ ] High-speed continuous shooting +,
[
] High-speed continuous shooting, and [ ] Low-speed continuous shooting. Select
[OK] to register the setting.
High speed continuous +
Can be set in a range of 30–3 shots/sec.
High speed
Can be set in a range of 20–2 shots/sec.
Low speed
Can be set in a range of 15–1 shots/sec.
Caution
Applies only when [ : Shutter mode] is set to [Electronic ].
Even if you set a continuous shooting speed, continuous shooting at the specified
speed may not be possible under some shooting conditions. For precautions on
continuous shooting, see
Selecting the Drive Mode.
Limit continuous shot count
You can limit the maximum burst for continuous shooting, so that while you keep holding
down the shutter button with continuous shooting set, the camera automatically stops
shooting after the specified number of continuous shots.
You can set it from 99 to 2 exposures. Pressing the < > button returns the setting to
[Disable].
When [Disable] is set, continuous shooting can continue up to the maximum burst shown at
right in the viewfinder.
1096
[Various settings/Reset]
Add cropping information
Adding cropping information displays vertical lines for the aspect ratio specified in shooting,
so that you can compose shots as if shooting with a medium- or large-format camera (6×6
cm, 4×5 inch, and so on).
When you shoot, instead of cropping images recorded to the card, the camera adds aspect
ratio information to images for cropping in the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
You can import images to Digital Photo Professional on a computer and easily crop images
to the aspect ratio set at the time of shooting.
OFF: Disable
6:6: Aspect ratio 6:6
3:4: Aspect ratio 3:4
4:5: Aspect ratio 4:5
6:7: Aspect ratio 6:7
5:6: Aspect ratio 10:12
5:7: Aspect ratio 5:7
Caution
Cropping information can only be added when [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] is
set to [Full-frame].
JPEG or HEIF images are not saved at the cropped size if you use the camera to
process RAW images with cropping information ( ). In this case, RAW processing
produces JPEG or HEIF images with cropping information.
Note
Vertical lines indicating your specified aspect ratio are displayed on the screen.
1097
Default Erase option
You can set which option is selected by default in the erase menu ( ), which is accessed
by pressing the < > button during image playback or during review after shooting.
By setting an option other than [Cancel], you can simply press < > to erase images
quickly.
: [Cancel] selected
: [Erase] selected
: [Erase ] selected
: [Erase non- ] selected
: [Erase voice memo] selected
Caution
Be careful not to erase images accidentally when an option other than [Cancel] is
set.
Av setting without lens
You can specify whether the aperture value can still be set without a lens attached.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Aperture value can still be set without a lens attached. Convenient when you want to
prepare for shooting and have already decided about the aperture value.
1098
Release shutter w/o lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without a lens attached.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Retract lens on power off
You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as RF35mm F1.8 Macro IS
STM) automatically when the camera's power switch is set to <
>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
Caution
With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
Note
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens's focus mode
switch setting (AF or MF).
1099
Add IPTC information
Registering IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information to the
camera from software such as the EOS application EOS Utility enables you to record
(embed) this information in JPEG/HEIF/RAW still photos at the time of shooting. This is
helpful in file management and other tasks using the IPTC information.
For instructions on registering IPTC information to the camera and details on the
information you can register, refer to the software instruction manual.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Caution
IPTC information is not added when you record movies.
Note
During playback, you can check whether IPTC information was added.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to check IPTC information
in images.
IPTC information registered to the camera is not erased if you select [ : Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)] ( ), but the setting changes to [Disable].
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)
Selecting [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Functions settings.
Note
Settings for [ : AE Microadjustment] and [ : FE Microadjustment] are set to
[Disable] but not cleared when [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] is performed.
Note that although information added using [
: Add IPTC information] is
retained, the setting changes to [Disable].
1100
Registering My Menu
Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs
My Menu Tab Settings
Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items
Menu Display Settings
On the My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions you often adjust.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs
1.
Select [ : Add My Menu tab] ( ).
2.
Select [OK].
You can create up to five My Menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.
1102
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs
1.
Select [MY MENU*: Configure].
2.
Select [Select items to register].
3.
Register the desired items.
Select an item, then press < >.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
1103
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items on the menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab itself.
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort registered
items], select an item to rearrange, then press <
>. With [ ] displayed, turn the
<
> dial to rearrange the item, then press < >.
Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items] deletes one item at
a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the registered items on the tab.
Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*]
tab.
1104
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1.
Select [Rename tab].
2.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press < > to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
3.
Confirm input.
Press the < > button, then select [OK].
1105
Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items
You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered on them.
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu
tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [
] tab will
revert to its default.
Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The
tabs themselves will remain. When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered
on all the created tabs will be deleted.
Caution
Performing [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs] will also delete tab names
renamed with [Rename tab].
1106
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press
the < > button.
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [ ] tab selected.
Display only My Menu tab
Restricts display to the [ ] tab ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] tabs are not
displayed).
1107
Reference
This chapter provides reference information on camera features.
• Importing Images to a Computer
• Importing Images to a Smartphone
• Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera
• Using a Battery Grip
• Using a Cooling Fan
• Troubleshooting Guide
• Error Codes
• Information Display
• Specifications
1108
Importing Images to a Computer
Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable
Using a Card Reader
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.
If you will import many images, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable
1.
Install EOS Utility ( ).
2.
In [ : Choose USB connection app], select [Photo Import/Remote
Control] (
).
3.
Connect the camera to the computer.
Use the interface cable included with the camera.
When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector ( )
and insert the plug in the digital terminal.
Insert the other end of the cable into the computer's USB terminal
(Type-C).
1109
4.
Use EOS Utility to import the images.
Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
1110
Using a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1.
Install Digital Photo Professional ( ).
2.
Insert the card into the card reader.
3.
Use Digital Photo Professional to import the images.
Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
Note
When using a card reader instead of EOS software to transfer images from the
camera to a computer, copy the folders on the card (CRM, DCIM, and XFVC) to the
computer.
1111
Importing Images to a Smartphone
Preparation
Using Camera Connect
Using Smartphone Features
You can import images captured with the camera to a smartphone by connecting the
smartphone to the camera with Multi-Function Shoe Adapter for Smartphone Link AD-P1
(sold separately, for Android smartphones only) or a USB cable.
Preparation
1.
Select an option in [ : Choose USB connection app] ( ).
Select [Photo Import/Remote Control] when connecting an Android
smartphone, or when connecting an iPhone and using the Photos app.
Select [Canon app(s) for iPhone] when connecting an iPhone and
using Camera Connect.
After the settings are complete, turn the camera off.
2.
Connect the camera to the smartphone with AD-P1 or a USB cable.
When using AD-P1, refer to the instruction manual included with
AD-P1.
Use of a Canon USB cable (Interface Cable IFC-100U or IFC-400U) is
recommended when connecting Android smartphones.
For details on USB cables used to connect iPhones, visit the Canon
website ( ).
1113
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the
Camera
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E2 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6P
without removing it from the camera. The camera can also be powered.
Charging
1.
Connect the USB power adapter.
With the camera power switch set to < >, insert the USB power
adapter plug fully into the < > terminal.
1116
2.
Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
Charging begins, and the access lamp (1) is lit in green.
[ ] is displayed on the LCD panel.
When charging is finished, the access lamp turns off.
Supplying power
To power the camera without charging batteries, set the camera power switch to < >.
However, batteries are charged during auto power off.
The battery level indicator is gray when power is supplied.
To change from powering the camera to charging, set the camera power switch to
<
>.
1117
Caution
The camera cannot be powered unless a battery pack is in it.
When batteries are depleted, the adapter charges them. In this case, power is not
supplied to the camera.
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it
continuously for more than 24 hours.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by
the access lamp blinking in green), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and
wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the
camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on ambient
temperature and remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures takes longer.
The remaining battery level may decline when power is supplied to the camera. To
avoid running out of battery power, use a fully charged battery.
Before disconnecting USB power adapters, set the camera power switch to
< >.
Some commercially available power adapters have been confirmed to charge and
power the camera. For details, check the Canon website ( ).
You can also charge Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N ( ).
1118
Using a Battery Grip
Attaching to the Camera
Loading Batteries
Using a Household Power Outlet
Button and Dial Operations
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera
Equipped with buttons and dials for vertical shooting, Battery Grip BG-R20/BG-R20EP is an
optional camera accessory that can power the camera with two batteries.
BG-R20EP is also equipped with an Ethernet RJ-45 terminal, which enables the camera to
be used with a wired LAN ( ).
Attaching to the Camera
1.
Remove the contact covers.
Remove contact covers (1) and (2) on the battery grip.
Attach battery grip contact cover (1) to (2) for storage.
1119
2.
Remove the battery compartment cover.
Turn off the camera before removing the battery.
Remove the battery compartment cover from the camera.
Attach the cover to the battery grip.
1120
To remove the cover, slide the lever to release it, following the
attachment procedure in reverse.
3.
Attach and lock the battery grip.
Insert the battery grip contacts into the camera and turn the release dial
to lock the battery grip in place.
1121
4.
Remove the battery magazine.
Caution
Do not touch the camera or battery grip contacts.
When reattaching the battery compartment cover to the camera, attach it opened to
at least 90°.
1122
Loading Batteries
1.
Load the batteries.
Insert the batteries as shown.
When only one battery is used, it can be inserted in either position.
To secure the batteries, push in the direction of the arrows until they
click into place.
To remove the batteries, press the battery magazine lever in the
direction of the arrow.
1123
2.
Load the battery magazine.
Insert the battery magazine all the way in to secure it.
The BG-R20EP battery magazine incorporates a battery holder (3).
Open upward when loading batteries and close downward after the
batteries are loaded.
1124
Caution
When loading batteries, make sure the electrical contacts are clean. Wipe off any
dirt on the contacts with a soft cloth.
Load batteries after attaching the battery grip to the camera. If the battery grip is
attached to the camera with batteries already loaded, it may prevent correct display
of battery check results.
Before removing the battery grip, turn the camera off and remove the batteries.
Reattach the contact covers on the battery grip contacts after removing the battery
grip. If the battery grip will not be used for some time, remove the batteries.
Keep the product free of dirt, dust, water, or salt during storage.
If a battery communication error message is displayed when a battery grip is
attached, follow the instructions in the message. If the camera loses power,
reinstall the battery magazine and restart the camera.
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions in the
message, then turn off the camera and reattach the battery grip.
1125
Using a Household Power Outlet
1.
Attach the DC coupler.
Attach DC Coupler DR-E6P (sold separately) the same way as the
batteries.
Pass the DC coupler cord through the battery magazine cord groove.
Insert the battery magazine all the way in to secure it.
2.
Attach the battery magazine.
Guide the end of the cord out of the cord hole.
1126
3.
Connect the DC coupler to the USB power adapter.
Securely connect the DC coupler receptacle to the plug of USB Power
Adapter PD-E2 (sold separately).
Note
To help prevent disconnection, use a cable tie to secure the cords
of the DC coupler and USB power adapter as shown.
4.
Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
1127
Caution
While the camera is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or plug, and
do not remove the battery magazine.
Avoid getting the DC coupler cord caught between the battery grip and battery
magazine.
1128
Button and Dial Operations
To use the buttons and dials, turn the vertical-grip on/off switch (3) to ON.
The buttons and dials are used the same way as corresponding buttons and dials on the
camera.
(
3
) (
4
) (
9
) (
10
)
(
1
)
(
2
) (
6
)(
5
) (
7
) (
8
)
(1)
< > Multi-function button
(2)
Shutter button
(3)
Vertical-grip On/Off switch
(4)
< > Main dial
(5)
< > Magnify/reduce button
(6)
< > Multi-controller
(7)
< > AF start button
(8)
< > Quick control dial 2
(9) < > AE lock/FE lock button
(10) < > AF point selection button
1129
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the
Camera
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E2 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6P
without removing it from the battery grip. The camera can also be powered.
Charging
1.
Connect the USB power adapter.
With the camera power switch set to < >, insert the USB power
adapter plug fully into the camera < > terminal.
1130
2.
Charge the battery.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
Charging begins, and the battery grip charge lamp lights up.
[ ] is displayed on the camera LCD panel.
When charging is finished, the charge lamp turns off.
Supplying power
To power the camera without charging batteries, set the camera power switch to <
>.
However, batteries are charged during auto power off.
The battery level indicator is gray when power is supplied.
To change from powering the camera to charging, set the camera power switch to
< >.
1131
Caution
The camera cannot be powered without a battery pack in the battery grip.
Charging is not possible with LP-E6P loaded and DC Coupler DR-E6P connected.
When batteries are depleted, the adapter charges them. In this case, power is not
supplied to the camera.
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it
continuously for more than 24 hours.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by
the charge lamp blinking), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and wait a
few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the camera to
the nearest Canon Service Center.
The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on ambient
temperature and remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures takes longer.
The remaining battery level may decline when power is supplied to the camera. To
avoid running out of battery power, use a fully charged battery.
Before disconnecting USB power adapters, set the camera power switch to
<
>.
Some commercially available power adapters have been confirmed to charge and
power the camera. For details, check the Canon website ( ).
You can also charge Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N ( ).
Note
You can also charge a single LP-E6P battery at one time.
1132
Using a Cooling Fan
Attaching to the Camera
Loading Batteries
Using a Household Power Outlet
Setting Up a Cooling Fan
Using a USB Power Adapter for Charging/Power
Cooling Fan CF-R20EP (sold separately) is an accessory with a fan to cool the camera and
a LAN terminal to add wired LAN functionality.
(1)
(2)
(1) Air supply vent
(2) Intake vent
1133
Attaching to the Camera
1.
Remove the covers.
Remove contact covers (1) and (2) on the cooling fan.
Attach cooling fan contact cover (1) to (2) for storage.
1134
Remove the dust cover (3) from the air supply vent and store it.
2.
Remove the battery compartment cover.
Turn off the camera before removing the battery.
Remove the battery compartment cover from the camera.
1135
Attach the cover you removed to the cooling fan.
To remove the cover, slide the lever to release it, following the
attachment procedure in reverse.
1136
3.
Secure the cooling fan.
Insert the contacts into the camera and turn the release dial to lock in
place.
Caution
Do not touch the camera or cooling fan contacts.
When reattaching the battery compartment cover to the camera, attach it opened to
at least 90°.
1137
Loading Batteries
Load one or two LP-E6P batteries.
1.
Open the battery compartment cover.
1138
2.
Load the batteries.
Insert the batteries as shown.
Push in until the batteries click into place.
When only one battery is used, it can be inserted in either position.
To remove the batteries, press the release levers in the direction
shown.
1139
3.
Close the battery compartment cover.
Caution
When attaching batteries, make sure the electrical contacts are clean. Wipe off any
dirt on the contacts with a soft cloth.
Load batteries after attaching the cooling fan to the camera. If the cooling fan is
attached to the camera with batteries already loaded, it may prevent correct display
of battery check results.
Before removing the cooling fan, turn the camera off and remove the batteries.
After removing the cooling fan, attach the contact covers to the cooling fan contacts
and the dust cover to the air supply vent. If the cooling fan will not be used for
some time, remove the batteries.
Keep the product free of dirt, dust, water, or salt during storage.
If a battery communication error message is displayed when a cooling fan is
attached, follow the instructions in the message. If the camera loses power,
reinstall the batteries and restart the camera.
1140
Using a Household Power Outlet
1.
Attach the DC coupler.
Attach DC Coupler DR-E6P (sold separately) the same way that
batteries are loaded.
Only one DC coupler can be installed, in the position shown.
Pass the DC coupler cord out of the cord hole.
Close the battery compartment cover.
1141
2.
Connect the DC coupler to the USB power adapter.
Securely connect the DC coupler receptacle to the plug of USB Power
Adapter PD-E2 (sold separately).
Note
To help prevent disconnection, use a cable tie to secure the cords
of the DC coupler and USB power adapter as shown.
3.
Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
1142
Caution
While the camera is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or plug, and
do not remove batteries.
1143
Setting Up a Cooling Fan
Setting up a cooling fan
For setting details, see Cooling Fan Settings.
The <FAN> indicator is lit when the cooling fan is in use.
Caution
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
While the cooling fan is on, warm air is discharged from the camera exhaust vent.
Do not block the cooling fan intake vent or the camera exhaust vent with your hand
or other objects while the cooling fan is in use.
Fan noise may be included in movies that you record, in some shooting conditions.
If so, it may help reduce these sounds if you use an external microphone and
position it away from the cooling fan.
The sound of the cooling fan operating at a different speed may be recorded when
you start recording after standby, depending on the cooling fan settings.
The cooling fan may not operate in cold conditions.
Before recording, always confirm that the <FAN> indicator is lit.
Setting up a Network Connection
For settings details, see Communication Functions.
1144
Using a USB Power Adapter for Charging/Power
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E2 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6P
without removing it from the cooling fan. The camera can also be powered.
Charging
1.
Connect the USB power adapter.
With the camera power switch set to < >, insert the USB power
adapter plug fully into the camera < > terminal.
2.
Charge the battery.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
Charging begins, and the cooling fan charge lamp is lit.
[ ] is displayed on the camera LCD panel.
When charging is finished, the charge lamp turns off.
1145
Supplying power
To power the camera without charging batteries, set the camera power switch to < >.
However, batteries are charged during auto power off.
The battery level indicator is gray when power is supplied.
To change from powering the camera to charging, set the camera power switch to
< >.
Caution
The camera cannot be powered without a battery pack in the cooling fan.
Charging is not possible with LP-E6P loaded and DC Coupler DR-E6P connected.
When batteries are depleted, the adapter charges them. In this case, power is not
supplied to the camera.
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it
continuously for more than 24 hours.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by
the charge lamp blinking), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and wait a
few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the camera to
the nearest Canon Service Center.
The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on ambient
temperature and remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures takes longer.
The remaining battery level may decline when power is supplied to the camera. To
avoid running out of battery power, use a fully charged battery.
Before disconnecting USB power adapters, set the camera power switch to
<
>.
Some commercially available power adapters have been confirmed to charge and
power the camera. For details, check the Canon website ( ).
You can also charge Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N ( ).
Note
You can also charge a single LP-E6P battery at one time.
1146
Troubleshooting Guide
Power-related problems
Shooting-related problems
Communication problems
Operation problems
Display problems
Playback problems
Sensor cleaning problems
Computer connection problems
Problems with the multi-function shoe
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this
Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, take the camera to the nearest Canon
Service Center.
Power-related problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the battery charger.
If the battery's remaining capacity ( ) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be charged.
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6P.
In case of charging or charger issues, see Charging the Battery.
The charger's lamp blinks at high speed.
If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication with the battery
failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the
charge lamp will blink in orange at a constant high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the
charger's power plug from the power outlet, reattach the battery, wait a few minutes, and
then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem persists, take the
camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
1147
The charger's lamp does not blink.
For safety, hot or cold batteries inserted in the charger are not charged, and the lamp
remains off. In this case, let the battery adjust to the ambient temperature before
attempting to charge it again. During charging, if the battery's temperature becomes
high for any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery
temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold
separately).
Batteries are not charged while the camera power switch is set to < >. However,
batteries are charged during auto power off.
Batteries are not charged when their remaining capacity is already at least 94%.
Operating the camera will stop charging in progress.
The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power adapter.
In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a protective circuit
stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery, and wait a few
minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
If batteries are hot or cold, the access lamp blinks in green and a protective circuit stops
charging. In this case, let the battery adjust to the ambient temperature before
attempting to charge it again.
The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power adapter.
Try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.
The camera cannot be powered with the USB power adapter.
Check the battery compartment. The camera cannot be powered without a battery pack.
Check the remaining battery level. When batteries are depleted, the adapter charges
them. In this case, power is not supplied to the camera.
The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set to
< >.
Make sure the battery is inserted properly in the camera ( ).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed ( ).
Charge the battery ( ).
1148
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is set
to <
>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp
will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is
complete, the power will turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/ do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is
displayed.
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6P.
Remove and install the battery again ( ).
If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
Use a fully charged battery ( ).
The battery performance may have degraded. See [ : Battery info.] to check the
battery recharge performance level ( ). If the battery performance is poor, replace the
battery with a new one.
The number of available shots will decrease with any of the following operations:
•
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period
•
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture
•
Using the lens's Image Stabilizer
•
Using the wireless communication functions
•
Using accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. To deactivate auto power off, set [Auto power off] in [ :
Power saving] to [Disable] ( ).
Even if [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen and viewfinder will still turn off
after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Screen off] or [Viewfinder off] (although
the camera itself remains on).
1149
Shooting-related problems
The lens cannot be attached.
To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera cannot be
used with EF-M lenses (
).
Noise is audible from the camera when it is turned on.
Drive noise may be audible from the camera.
No images can be shot or recorded.
Make sure the card is properly inserted ( ).
Slide the card's write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting ( ).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space
( , ).
Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to focus. Press
the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus manually ( , ).
The card cannot be used.
If a card error message is displayed, see Inserting/Removing Cards and Error Codes.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another
camera.
Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this camera and
then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible
to use the card.
The image is out of focus or blurred.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > ( ). For lenses without a focus mode
switch, set [ : Focus mode] to [ ].
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake ( ).
With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the Image Stabilizer switch to
<
>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed ( ), set a
higher ISO speed ( ), use flash ( ), or use a tripod.
1150
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF ( ). Shooting with the focus locked is not
possible with Servo AF ( ).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
High-speed continuous shooting may be slower depending on the battery level, ambient
temperature, flickering light, shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, shooting settings, and other
conditions. For details, see Selecting the Drive Mode, or see File size / Number of shots
available / Maximum burst for continuous shooting for still photos.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
Shooting intricate subjects such as fields of grass may result in larger file sizes, and the
actual maximum burst may be lower than the guidelines in
File size / Number of shots
available / Maximum burst for continuous shooting for still photos.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
Estimated maximum burst indicated in the viewfinder does not change when you switch
cards, even if you switch to a high-speed card. Maximum burst listed in File size /
Number of shots available / Maximum burst for continuous shooting for still photos is
based on the standard Canon test card, and the actual maximum burst is higher for
cards with faster writing speeds. For this reason, estimated maximum burst may differ
from actual maximum burst.
Some image quality options are not available with cropped shooting.
/ / / image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)] is set,
or with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
High-speed display is not available during high-speed continuous
shooting.
Refer to the high-speed display requirements in High-Speed Display.
The aspect ratio cannot be set.
Aspect ratios cannot be set for RF-S or EF-S lenses ([1.6x (crop)] is set automatically).
Aspect ratios cannot be set when [ : Add cropping information] is set to an option
other than [Disable].
1151
ISO 100 cannot be set for still photo shooting.
The minimum speed in the ISO speed range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for still photo shooting.
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable] or [Enhanced].
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to
[HDR PQ].
Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image comes out
bright.
Set [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] ( ). When [Low], [Standard], or
[High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation, the image may come out bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual exposure
and ISO Auto are set.
See M: Manual Exposure to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
With [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [Standard] or [High], [Chromatic aberr corr] and
[Diffraction correction] are not displayed, but they are both set to [Enable] for
shooting.
[Digital Lens Optimizer] is not displayed in movie recording.
Images are not displayed after shooting in multiple-exposure shooting.
When [On:ContShtng] is set, images are not displayed for review after capture, and
image playback is not available (
).
Using flash in [P] or [Av] mode lowers the shutter speed.
Set [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to [1/*-1/60sec. auto]*
1
or [1/*
sec. (fixed)]*
1
( ).
* 1: The value of “1/*” varies depending on current settings.
1152
The flash does not fire.
Make sure any flash units are securely attached to the camera.
The flash always fires at full output.
Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash mode always fire at full
output ( ).
When [Flash metering mode] in [Flash C.Fn settings] for [ : External Speedlite
control] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash always fires at full output
( ).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash exposure
compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the Speedlite's flash exposure
compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the
camera.
High-speed sync is not available in [Fv] or [Av] mode.
Set [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to an option other than [1/*
sec. (fixed)]*
1
( ).
* 1: The value of “1/*” varies depending on current settings.
Remote control shooting is not possible.
Check the position of the remote control's release timing switch.
If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see Remote Control Shooting or
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control.
A white [ ] or red [ ] icon is displayed during movie
recording.
Indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. For details, see Warning
Indicator Display During Shooting or Recording.
The [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] setting changed to [Disable].
The [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] setting is changed to [Disable] if the color depth (10
bit or 8 bit) of the main recording format set for time-lapse movies differs from the color
depth of the main recording format set for normal movie recording when you record
time-lapse movies after setting [ : HDR shooting (PQ)] to [HDR PQ].
1153
Movie recording stops by itself.
If the card's writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop automatically. For details
on cards that can record movies, see Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size,
and card performance requirements. To find out the card's writing speed, refer to the
card manufacturer's website, etc.
Perform low-level formatting to initialize the card if the card's writing or reading speed
seems slow ( ).
Movie recording stops automatically at 6 hr.
In High Frame Rate movie recording, recording stops automatically at the following
times.
• Set to 119.88/100.00 fps: 1 hr. 30 min.
• Set to 239.76/200.00 fps: 45 min.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
ISO speed is set automatically in [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] recording mode. In [ ] mode,
you can manually set the ISO speed (
).
The minimum speed in the ISO speed range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for movie recording.
Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable] or [Enhanced].
The exposure changes during movie recording.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture value during movie recording, the changes
in the exposure may be recorded.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming during
movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure changes or lens
sounds to be recorded, or loss of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie recording.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be caused by
fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during movie recording. Also,
changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone may be recorded. In [
] mode,
using a slower shutter speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.
1154
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the
image may look distorted. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie
recording.
Sound is not recorded in movies.
Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies.
A time code is not added.
Time codes are not added when you record High Frame Rate movies with [Count up] in
[ : Time code] set to [Free run] ( ).
In movie recording, time codes can be added to HDMI video output by setting [Time
code] to [On] in the [HDMI] setting for [ : Time code] ( ).
Time codes advance faster than the actual time.
Time codes in High Frame Rate movie recording advance as follows per second ( ).
•
Set to 119.88/100.00 fps: 4 sec.
•
Set to 239.76/200.00 fps: 8 sec.
I cannot record movies during still photo shooting.
It may not be possible to record movies during still photo shooting if operations such as
extended image display increase the camera's internal temperature. Turn off the camera
or take other measures, and wait until the camera cools down.
Reducing the movie recording size may enable recording.
Cannot record movies.
Format (initialize) the card with this camera ( ).
Recording to card is not available with [ : Main rec. format] set to [RAW].
Two cards are required for movie recording when [ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] is
set to [On]. Either set [ : Dual shooting (still&movie)] to [Off] or insert both card 1
and 2.
1155
The camera vibrates.
Image stabilization by the camera may make the camera seem to vibrate. This does not
indicate damage.
The camera makes a sound when shaken.
If you shake the camera with the power switch set to < >, the Image Stabilizer
system will shift and make a sound. This is not a malfunction.
1156
Communication problems
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or later.
Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.
Install the Camera Connect app (free of charge) on the smartphone (
).
Pairing with a previously paired smartphone is not possible if pairing information
registered for another camera remains on the smartphone. In this case, remove the
camera's registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the smartphone and try
pairing again (
).
Wi-Fi functions cannot be set.
If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable,
Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface cable before setting any
functions (
).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting them
with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate
the Wi-Fi connection before connecting the interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and playback may not
be possible. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you have changed the
settings or selected a different setting, reconnection may not be established even after
selecting the same SSID. In this case, delete the camera connection settings from the
Wi-Fi settings on the smartphone and set up a connection again.
A connection may not be established if the app you are connecting to is running when
you reconfigure connection settings. In this case, quit the app for a moment and then
restart it.
1157
Operation problems
Settings change when I switch from still photo shooting to movie
recording or vice versa.
Separate settings are retained for use when shooting still photos and recording movies.
I cannot adjust settings with <
>, < >, < >, < >, < >, or < >.
Set the power/multi-function lock switch to < > to release the multi-function lock
( ).
Check the [ : Multi function lock] setting ( ).
Touch operation is not possible.
Make sure [ : Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] ( ).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
Check settings on the [ ] tab (Control customization, ).
In movie recording, check the [ : Shutter btn function for movies] setting ( ).
1158
Display problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
Tabs and items on the menu screen vary for still photos and movies.
In [ ] or [ ] mode, some tabs and items are not displayed.
The display starts with [ ] My Menu, or the [ ] tab alone is displayed.
[Menu display] on the [ ] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or [Display only
My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] ( ).
The file name's first character is an underscore (“_”).
Set [ : Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first character will be an
underscore ( ).
The fourth character in the still photo file name changes.
[Stills] in [ : File name] is set to [*** + image size]. Select either the [Preset code] file
name or the file name registered in [User setting1] (
).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 (
).
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
Make sure the correct date and time are set ( ).
Check the time zone and daylight saving time ( ).
The date and time are not in the image.
The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and time are recorded
in the image data as shooting information. When you print photos, this information can
be used to include the date and time ( ).
[###] is displayed.
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can
display, [###] will be displayed.
1159
The screen does not display a clear image.
If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
1160
Playback problems
Images are not displayed immediately.
It may take a moment before images are displayed on the screen after you press the
< > button. It may help to set [Screen dimmer] in [ : Power saving] to [Disable].
Part of the image blinks in black.
[ : Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] ( ).
A red box is displayed on the image.
[ : AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] ( ).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back:
•
Cropped images
The image cannot be erased.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased ( ).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another camera.
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
The images have been filtered for playback with [ : Set image search conditions]
( ). Clear the image search conditions.
Mechanical sounds or sounds of camera operations can be heard
during movie playback.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens or
sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera or lens
is operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external microphone may
reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone, it
may be more effective to remove the external microphone from the camera and position
it away from the camera and lens.
1161
Movie playback stops by itself.
Extended movie playback or movie playback under high ambient temperature may
cause the camera's internal temperature to rise, and movie playback may stop
automatically.
If this happens, playback is disabled until the camera's internal temperature decreases,
so turn off the power and let the camera cool down a while.
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
Significant change in the exposure level during autoexposure movie recording may
cause recording to stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. In this case, record
in [ ] mode ( ).
The movie is played in slow motion.
Because high frame rate movies are recorded as 29.97/25.00 fps movies, they are
played back as follows.
•
Set to 119.88/100.00 fps: Slow motion playback at 1/4 speed
•
Set to 239.76/200.00 fps: Slow motion playback at 1/8 speed
No picture appears on the television.
Make sure [ : System frequency] is set to [59.94Hz:NTSC] or [50.00Hz:PAL] correctly
for the video system of your television.
Make sure the HDMI cable's plug is inserted all the way in ( ).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader used and the computer's operating system, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. In this case, connect the camera to the computer with
the interface cable, then import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS
software, ).
1162
Images cannot be resized or cropped.
This camera cannot resize JPEG images, RAW images, or frame-grab images from
8K or 4K movies saved as still photos ( ).
In-camera cropping is not available for RAW images, or for frame-grab images from 4K
or 8K movies ( ).
Dots of light appear on the image.
White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images if the sensor is affected
by cosmic rays or similar factors. Their appearance may be reduced by performing
[Clean now ] under [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).
1163
Sensor cleaning problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
Although there is a mechanical sound from the shutter during cleaning after [Clean now
] is selected, no image is recorded to the card ( ).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
Repeatedly turning the power switch < > and < > within a short period may
prevent the [ ] icon from being displayed ( ).
1164
Computer connection problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
Install EOS Utility (EOS software) on the computer ( ).
Make sure the main EOS Utility window is displayed.
Check the version of the application.
Communication between the connected camera and computer does not
work.
When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [ : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] ( ).
Problems with the multi-function shoe
A message was displayed on the screen when I attached an accessory.
If [Communication error Reattach accessory] is displayed, reattach the accessory. In
case this message is displayed again after reattachment, make sure the terminals of the
multi-function shoe and accessory are clean and dry. If you cannot remove the dirt or
moisture, contact a Canon Service Center.
If [Accessory unavailable status] is displayed, check the terminals of the multi-function
shoe and accessory and make sure the accessory is not damaged.
I cannot use USB on the camera while using Multi-Function Shoe
Adapter for Smartphone Link AD-P1.
The camera USB port is not available while Multi-Function Shoe Adapter for
Smartphone Link AD-P1 is in use. To use the camera USB port, disconnect AD-P1.
1165
Error Codes
(1) Error number
(2) Cause and countermeasures
If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
If the problem persists, write down the error code (Err xx) and request service.
1166
Information Display
LCD Panel
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Movie Recording Screen
Scene Icons
Playback Screen
LCD Panel
Still photo/movie standby screen 1
(1) Eye control
(2)
Shooting mode
(3) Battery level
(4) Flash exposure compensation
(5) Exposure compensation
(6) Bluetooth function
(7)
Wi-Fi function/wired LAN
(8)
Shutter speed
(9) Aperture value
(10) Exposure level indicator (exposure compensation amount/AEB range)
(11) ISO speed
(12) Highlight tone priority
1167
Still photo standby screen 2
(1) AF area
(2)
Drive mode
(3) AF operation
(4)
Metering mode
(5) Card slot
(6) Shooting mode (movies)
(7)
Resolution (movies)
(8) White balance
(9) Picture Style
(10)
HDR shooting (PQ)
(11) RAW format (movies)
(12) Frame rate (movies)
1168
Movie standby screen 2
(1)
AF area
(2) Image Stabilizer (IS mode)
(3) Card slot
(4) White balance
(5) Picture Style/Custom Picture
(6)
HDR shooting (PQ)
(7) Movie recording time available
1169
Movie recording in progress
(1)
Shooting mode
(2) Battery level
(3) Recording in progress/External recording in progress (10-bit, via HDMI)
(4) Elapsed recording time
1170
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
1171
(1) Movie recording time available
(2) No. of remaining shots for focus bracketing, multiple exposures, or interval timer
(3) Maximum burst
(4)
Number of available shots/Sec. until self-timer shoots
(5)
Focus bracketing/Multiple exposures/Bulb timer/Pre-continuous/Interval timer
(6)
Shooting mode
(7)
AF area
(8)
AF operation
(9) Card
(10) Image quality
(11) Drive mode
(12)
Still photo cropping/Aspect ratio
(13)
Accessory attached indicator
(14)
Touch Shutter/Create folder
(15)
Electronic shutter
(16)
Electronic level
(17) Battery level
(18) Image Stabilizer (IS mode)
(19) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(20) Set AF point to center
(21) Quick Control button
(22) Anti-flicker shooting
(23) White balance/White balance correction
(24) Picture Style
(25) Subject to detect
(26) Metering mode
(27) Display simulation/OVF sim. view assist
(28) Magnify button
(29) AF point (Flexible Zone AF 1)
1172
(30)
Cooling fan settings
(31) HDR shooting (PQ)/View Assist
(32) Flash ready/FE lock/High-speed sync
(33)
AE lock
(34) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock warning
(35) Aperture value
(36)
Exposure level indicator (exposure compensation amount/AEB range)
(37) Overheating warning
(38) Still photo image quality warning
(39)
AEB/FEB
(40) Wi-Fi function/wired LAN
(41)
Wireless signal strength/Airplane mode
(42) GPS connection status
(43) Focal length
(44) Bluetooth function
(45) ISO speed
(46) Highlight tone priority
(47)
Exposure compensation
1173
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Standby
Movie recording in progress
1175
(1) Movie recording time available
(2) Shooting mode
(3) Card for recording/playback
(4)
Movie recording size
(5)
Headphone volume
(6)
Audio recording level (manual input)
(7)
Movie Servo AF
(8)
Movie self-timer
(9) Overheat control
(10) Image Stabilizer (Movie digital IS)
(11) Movie shooting button (start recording)
(12)
HDR movie recording
(13)
Cooling fan settings
(14)
Exposure level indicator (metering levels)
(15)
Audio recording level indicator
(16)
Elapsed recording time
(17) Recording status (left: main movie, right: proxy movie)
(18) Movie recording in progress
(19) Movie shooting button (stop recording)
*For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items also included in
Still Photo Shooting Screen, which are not shown here.
Caution
You can specify the information displayed in response to pressing the < >
button (
).
The electronic level is not displayed when the camera is connected via HDMI to a
television.
The electronic level, grid lines, and histogram cannot be displayed during movie
recording (and if they are currently displayed, recording a movie will clear the
display).
When movie recording starts, the movie recording remaining time will change to the
elapsed time.
Note
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
1176
Subject
Background
Scene Icons
In [ ] shooting mode or [ ] recording mode, the camera detects the type of scene and
sets all settings accordingly. The detected scene type is indicated in the upper left of the
screen.
People*
1
Subjects Other Than People
Background
Color
In
Motion*
2
Nature/
Outdoor
Scene
In
Motion*
2
Close*
3
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*
4
*
4
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blueDark
With Tripod*
1
*
5
*
6
*
4
*
5
*
6
*
4
* 1: An icon for subjects other than people is displayed in time-lapse movie recording, even if people
are detected.
* 2: Not displayed during movie recording.
* 3: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension tube or close-up
lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
* 4: Icons of scenes selected from those that can be detected are displayed.
* 5: Displayed when all the following conditions apply.
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
* 6: Displayed with any of the following lenses.
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
•
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
•
Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
* Slower shutter speeds are used when the conditions in both *5 and *6 apply.
Note
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the
actual scene.
1177
Playback Screen
Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Basic information display for still photos
1178
(1) HDR View Assist
(2) Bluetooth function
(3) Wireless signal strength
(4)
Wi-Fi function/wired LAN
(5)
Battery level
(6)
Current image no./Total images/No. of images found
(7)
Shutter speed
(8)
Aperture value
(9) Exposure compensation amount
(10) Already sent to a computer/smartphone
(11) Voice memo
(12)
Rating
(13)
Image protection
(14)
Card no.
(15)
Folder no.-File no.
(16)
Image quality/Edited image/Cropping/Frame Grab
(17) ISO speed
(18) Highlight tone priority
Caution
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may not be
displayed.
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
1179
Detailed information display for still photos 1
(1) Aperture value
(2) Picture Style (image characteristics/setting details)
(3) Shutter speed
(4) White balance correction/Bracketing
(5) Shooting mode/Multiple exposure/Frame Grab
(6) White balance
(7) Flash exposure compensation amount/Bounce
(8) First image of scene
(9) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping
(10) Exposure compensation amount
(11) Shooting date and time
(12) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(13)
Scroll bar
(14) ISO speed
(15) Highlight tone priority
(16) Metering mode
(17) File size
*For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items also included in Basic information display for still photos, which are not shown
here.
*For images captured in RAW+JPEG/HEIF shooting, indicates RAW file sizes.
*Lines indicating the image area are displayed for images taken with the aspect ratio set ( ) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set
for image quality.
*Images with added cropping information are displayed cropped.
*During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, [ ] will be displayed.
*[
] indicates images shot with bounce flash photography.
*[ ] indicates images captured in multiple-exposure shooting.
*[ ] indicates test shots for time-lapse movies.
1180
*[ ] indicates images created and saved by performing RAW image processing, resizing, cropping, HEIF to JPEG
conversion, or frame-grabbing.
*[
] indicates images cropped and then saved.
*HEIF images that have been converted to JPEGs are labeled [
].
*Upscaled images are labeled [
].
1181
Detailed information display for movies 1
(1) Recording mode/High Frame Rate movie
(2) Movie recording size
(3)
Frame rate (left: shooting, right: playback)
(4) Compression method
(5) Custom Picture/Picture Style (image characteristics/setting details)
(6)
Recording time/Time code
(7) Bit rate
*For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items that are also included in
Basic information display for still photos, Detailed
information display for still photos 1, and Basic information display for movies, which are not shown here.
*[ ] indicates movies captured in High Frame Rate recording.
Note
During movie playback, “*, *” is displayed for the [Fineness] and [Threshold]
parameters of [Sharpness] in [
: Picture Style].
1184
Detailed information display for movies 2
(1) Movie file name
(2) Proxy movie
(3) Movie auto level
(4) Image Stabilizer (Movie digital IS)
(5) Main movie recording format
*For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items that are also included in Basic information display for still photos, Detailed
information display for still photos 1, Detailed information display for still photos 2, Basic information display for movies, and
Detailed information display for movies 1which are not shown here.
1185
Specifications
Type
Type: Digital single-lens non-reflex AF/AE camera
Lens mount: Canon RF mount
Compatible lenses: Canon RF lens group (including RF-S lenses)
* Canon EF or EF-S lenses (excluding EF-M lenses) also compatible, using Mount Adapter EF-EOS R
Lens focal length:
When using RF/EF lenses: Same as focal length indicated on the lens
When using RF-S/EF-S lenses: Approx. 1.6 times the focal length indicated on the lens
Image sensor
Type: Full-frame back-illuminated stacked CMOS sensor
Effective pixels*
1
*
2
Max. approx. 45 megapixels
Total pixels*
1
Approx. 50.3 megapixels
Screen size Approx. 36.0×24.0 mm
Dual Pixel CMOS AF Supported
*1: Rounded to the nearest 100,000.
*2: Using RF or EF lenses.
The effective pixel count may be lower with certain lenses and image processing.
1186
Recording system
Image recording format: Compliant with Design rule for Camera File system 2.0 and Exif
2.31*
1
* 1: Supports time difference information
Image type / recording format / extension
Image type / recording format Extension
Still photo
JPEG .JPG
HEIF .HIF
RAW
.CR3
C-RAW
Movies
RAW .CRM
XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit
XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit
.MP4
News Metadata*
1
.XML
*1: When MP4 movie is recorded with [Add File: On], “.CPF” file will be created.
Recording media
Recording media:
Card 1: CFexpress memory card
* Type B: Card slot
* CFexpress 2.0 and VPG400 supported
Card 2: SDXC/SDHC/SD memory card
* Compatible with UHS-II
1187
Still photo recording
Recording pixel count
Image size
Resolution (Pixels)
Still photo cropping / aspect ratio
3:2
1.6x (crop)*
1
1:1 4:3 16:9
JPEG / HEIF
L
Approx. 44.8
megapixels*
2
(8192×5464)
Approx. 17.3
megapixels
(5088×3392)
Approx. 29.8
megapixels
(5456×5456)
Approx. 39.8
megapixels*
2
(7280×5464)
Approx. 37.7
megapixels
(8192×4608)
M
24.0
megapixels
(6000×4000)
16.0
megapixels
(4000×4000)
Approx. 21.3
megapixels*
2
(5328×4000)
Approx. 20.2
megapixels*
2
(6000×3368)
S1
Approx. 11.6
megapixels
(4176×2784)
Approx. 7.8
megapixels
(2784×2784)
Approx. 10.3
megapixels
(3712×2784)
Approx. 9.8
megapixels*
2
(4176×2344)
S2
Approx. 3.8
megapixels
(2400×1600)
Approx. 3.8
megapixels
(2400×1600)
Approx. 2.6
megapixels
(1600×1600)
Approx. 3.4
megapixels*
2
(2112×1600)
Approx. 3.2
megapixels*
2
(2400×1344)
RAW
/
Approx. 44.8
megapixels*
2
(8192×5464)
Approx. 17.3
megapixels
(5088×3392)
Approx. 44.8 megapixels*
2
(8192×5464)
*Values for recorded pixels are rounded off to the nearest 100,000th.
*RAW/C-RAW images are generated in [3:2], and the set aspect ratio information is appended to the
images.
*JPEG/HEIF images are generated in the set aspect ratio.
*These aspect ratios (M / S1 / S2) and pixel counts also apply to resizing.
*1: Angle of view of approx. 1.6 times the indicated focal length.
*2: Aspect ratios are slightly different for these image sizes.
1188
Still photo file size / Number of shots available / Maximum burst for continuous
shooting
Mechanical shutter / electronic first-curtain
Image quality
File size [Approx.
MB]
Available shots
[Approx.]*
1
Maximum burst [Approx.]
CFexpress card*
1
SD card*
2
JPEG*
3
L 13.0 23710 760 760
M 7.8 39370 670 660
S1 4.6 67580 670 660
S2 1.8 171670 670 660
HEIF*
4
L 12.5 24290 690 640
M 8.1 37350 740 740
S1 4.9 60570 780 780
S2 1.8 148190 790 780
RAW*
3
47.6 6540 230 95
20.6 15210 580 580
RAW+JPEG*
3
+L
47.6 + 13.0 5120 150 87
+L
20.6 + 13.0 9260 310 190
RAW+HEIF*
4
+L
47.6 + 12.5 4860 89 84
+L
20.6 + 12.5 8420 180 170
*1: Number of shots available and maximum burst for CFexpress cards apply to 325 GB CFexpress cards
conforming to Canon testing standards.
*2: Maximum burst for SD cards applies to 128 GB UHS-II SD cards conforming to Canon testing
standards.
*3: When [
HDR shooting (PQ): Disable] is set.
*4: When [
HDR shooting (PQ): HDR PQ] is set.
*Maximum burst as measured under conditions conforming to Canon testing standards (One-shot AF,
High-speed continuous shooting+, JPEG/HEIF image quality: 8, ISO 100, Picture Style: Standard, and room
temperature: 23°C / 73°F)
*File size, number of shots available, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting conditions (including
remaining battery level, battery temperature, cropping/aspect ratio, JPEG/HEIF image quality, subject,
memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, and Custom Functions).
1189
Electronic shutter
Image quality
File size [Approx.
MB]
Available shots
[Approx.]*
1
Maximum burst [Approx.]
CFexpress card*
1
SD card*
2
JPEG*
3
L
See “Mechanical shutter / electronic
first-curtain.”
200 200
M 200 200
S1 200 200
S2 200 200
HEIF*
4
L 200 200
M 200 200
S1 200 200
S2 200 200
RAW*
3
93 86
170 170
RAW+JPEG*
3
+L
85 82
+L
160 150
RAW+HEIF*
4
+L
79 79
+L
150 150
*1: Number of shots available and maximum burst for CFexpress cards apply to 325 GB CFexpress cards
conforming to Canon testing standards.
*2: Maximum burst for SD cards applies to 128 GB UHS-II SD cards conforming to Canon testing
standards.
*3: When [
HDR shooting (PQ): Disable] is set.
*4: When [
HDR shooting (PQ): HDR PQ] is set.
*Maximum burst as measured under conditions conforming to Canon testing standards (One-shot AF,
High-speed continuous shooting+, JPEG/HEIF image quality: 8, ISO 100, Picture Style: Standard, and room
temperature: 23°C / 73°F)
*File size, number of shots available, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting conditions (including
remaining battery level, battery temperature, cropping/aspect ratio, JPEG/HEIF image quality, subject,
memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, and Custom Functions).
1190
Movie recording
Main recording format
Main recording format File extension
RAW CRM
XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit MP4
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit MP4
XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit MP4
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit MP4
Proxy recording format
Proxy recording format File extension
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit MP4
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit MP4
*Set automatically depending on the main recording system.
*When [ Rec options] of [Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [ Main Proxy], proxy recording
is possible.
1191
Movie recording size
Main movie
Recording
format
Compres-
sion
method /
RAW
format
Resolu-
tion
Image
quality
Frame rate (fps)
239.76 200.00 119.88 100.00 59.94 50.00
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
High
Quality
Intra
Standard
Intra
Light
Intra
Standard
LGOP
8K-D
Normal
8K-U
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
8K-D
Normal
8K-U
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420
8bit
Standard
LGOP
4K-D
Fine
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
4K-U
Fine
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
2K-D
Fine Yes Yes
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
Full HD
Fine Yes Yes
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
High
Quality
Intra
Standard
Intra
Light
Intra
Standard
LGOP
4K-D
Fine
Normal
Yes*
1
*
3
Yes*
1
*
3
Yes Yes
4K-U
Fine
Normal
Yes*
1
*
3
Yes*
1
*
3
Yes Yes
Standard
Intra
Standard
LGOP
2K-D
Fine Yes Yes
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
Full HD
Fine Yes Yes
Normal
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes*
1
Yes Yes
1192
RAW*
2
Standard
RAW
RAW ―
Light
RAW
Yes Yes
Standard
RAW
SRAW ―
Yes Yes
Light
RAW
Yes Yes
1193
Recording
format
Compression
method /
RAW format
Resolution
Image
quality
Frame rate (fps)
29.97 25.00 24.00 23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
High Quality
Intra
Standard
Intra
Light Intra
Standard
LGOP
8K-D
Normal
Yes*
3
Yes*
3
Yes Yes
8K-U
Yes*
3
Yes*
3
Yes
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
8K-D
Normal
Yes Yes Yes Yes
8K-U Yes Yes Yes
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
4K-D
Fine Yes Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes Yes
4K-U
Fine Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes
2K-D
Fine Yes Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes Yes
Full HD
Fine Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
High Quality
Intra
Standard
Intra
Light Intra
Standard
LGOP
4K-D
Fine Yes Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes Yes
4K-U
Fine Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes
Standard
Intra
Standard
LGOP
2K-D
Fine Yes Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes Yes
Full HD
Fine Yes Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes Yes
RAW*
2
Standard
RAW
RAW ―
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Light RAW Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standard
RAW
SRAW ―
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Light RAW Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1: With [High Frame Rate: Disable] setting, movie is recorded with audio and the movie is played back at
actual speed. With [High Frame Rate: Enable] setting, no audio is recorded and the movie is played in
slow motion at 29.97 fps (NTSC) /25.00 fps (PAL) when played back. Only exFAT-formatted cards can
be used for recording (recording to FAT32-formatted cards is not possible).
*2: Recording is possible only when using an CFexpress card.
*3: High Quality Intra cannot be selected.
1194
Proxy movie
The recording format and movie recording size of the proxy movie are set automatically as
shown in the table below depending on the recording format and movie recording size of the
main movie.
Main recording
format
Main movie recording size
Proxy recording
format
Proxy movie recording size
Resolution
Compression
format
Resolution
Compression
format
RAW
RAW
SRAW
Standard RAW
Light RAW
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
2K-D
Standard LGOP
Light LGOP
XF-HEVC S
YCC422 10bit
XF-HEVC S
YCC420 10bit
4K-D
2K-D
Standard Intra
Light Intra
Standard LGOP
XF-HEVC S
YCC420 10bit
2K-D
4K-U
Full HD
Full HD
XF-AVC S
YCC422 10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
4K-D
2K-D
High Quality Intra
Standard Intra
Light Intra
Standard LGOP
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
2K-D
4K-U
Full HD
Full HD
*The angle of view and frame rate of the proxy movie are the same as for the main movie.
*The image quality (Normal/Fine) of the proxy movie is fixed to Normal.
*When [
Main Proxy] is set, a main movie of 100.00 fps or more is not possible.
*Even if recording of the proxy movie stops due to an error, recording of the main movie continues.
*If recording of the main movie stops, recording of the proxy movie also stops.
*When [
Main Proxy] is set, the recording time of the main movie is indicated. When [Rec. to
multiple] is set, the recording time for the card with the least space is indicated.
*If there is no card 1, the time available for recording of the proxy movie is indicated, and proxy movie
recording is possible.
Recording
format
Compres-
sion
method /
RAW
format
Resolu-
tion
Image
quality
Frame rate (fps)
239.76 200.00 119.88 100.00 59.94 50.00
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420
8bit
Standard
LGOP
Light
LGOP
2K-D
Normal
Yes Yes
Full HD Yes Yes
Recording
format
Compression
method /
RAW format
Resolution
Image
quality
Frame rate (fps)
29.97 25.00 24.00 23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
Light LGOP
2K-D
Normal
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Full HD Yes Yes Yes
1195
Built-in and external microphones
Built-in microphone: Monaural microphone
External microphone (External microphone IN terminal): 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini
jack (3-pin)
Multi-function shoe input: Compatible with Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1D
Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size, and card
performance requirements
RAW, 8K-DCI Normal / 8K-UHD Normal
Recording
format
Compression
method /
RAW type
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
RAW
Standard
RAW
29.97
3 min. 13 min. 51 min. 2600 18631
25.00
24.00
23.98
Light RAW
59.94
3 min. 13 min. 51 min. 2600 18631
50.00
29.97 5 min. 20 min. 1 hr. 19 min. 1670 11979
25.00 6 min. 24 min. 1 hr. 34 min. 1400 10048
24.00
6 min. 25 min. 1 hr. 39 min. 1340 9619
23.98
1196
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
High Quality
Intra
24.00
4 min. 17 min. 1 hr. 9 min. 1920 13735
23.98
Standard
Intra
29.97 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 14 min. 1800 12877
25.00 5 min. 22 min. 1 hr. 28 min. 1500 10731
24.00
5 min. 23 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 1440 10302
23.98
Light Intra
29.97 7 min. 28 min. 1 hr. 51 min. 1200 8585
25.00 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7155
24.00
8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 18 min. 960 6869
23.98
Standard
LGOP
29.97
15 min. 1 hr. 3 min. 4 hr. 6 min. 540 3865
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
29.97
21 min. 1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 33 min. 400 2863
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set (when set to RAW movie, LPCM / 24bit / 4CH).
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*When set to UHD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1197
RAW, 8K-DCI Normal / 8K-UHD Normal
Recording format
Compression
method / RAW type
Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
RAW
Standard RAW
29.97
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
―
25.00
24.00
23.98
Light RAW
59.94
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
50.00
29.97
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
25.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
24.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
23.98
XF-HEVC S YCC422
10bit
High Quality Intra
24.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
23.98
Standard Intra
29.97
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
25.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
24.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
23.98
Light Intra
29.97
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
25.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
24.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
23.98
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 V90
25.00
24.00
23.98
1198
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 V60
25.00
24.00
23.98
1199
SRAW, 4K-DCI Fine / 4K-UHD Fine
Recording
format
Compression
method /
RAW type
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
SRAW
Standard
RAW
59.94 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 11 min. 1860 13338
50.00 5 min. 21 min. 1 hr. 25 min. 1550 11121
29.97 9 min. 36 min. 2 hr. 22 min. 930 6686
25.00 10 min. 43 min. 2 hr. 49 min. 780 5613
24.00 11 min. 45 min. 2 hr. 56 min. 750 5399
23.98 11 min. 45 min. 2 hr. 59 min. 740 5327
Light RAW
59.94 10 min. 40 min. 2 hr. 37 min. 840 6042
50.00 12 min. 48 min. 3 hr. 9 min. 700 5041
29.97 20 min. 1 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 13 min. 420 3038
25.00 24 min. 1 hr. 36 min. 6 hr. 15 min. 350 2538
24.00
25 min. 1 hr. 41 min. 6 hr. 38 min. 330 2395
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
LGOP
29.97
1 hr. 3 min. 4 hr. 12 min.
16 hr. 25
min.
135 968
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
29.97
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
25.00
24.00
23.98
1200
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
29.97
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
High Quality
Intra
29.97 14 min. 56 min. 3 hr. 42 min. 600 4294
25.00 17 min. 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 26 min. 500 3579
24.00
17 min. 1 hr. 11 min. 4 hr. 37 min. 480 3436
23.98
Standard
Intra
29.97 18 min. 1 hr. 15 min. 4 hr. 56 min. 450 3221
25.00 22 min. 1 hr. 30 min. 5 hr. 55 min. 375 2685
24.00
23 min. 1 hr. 34 min. 6 hr. 10 min. 360 2577
23.98
Light Intra
29.97 28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
25.00 34 min. 2 hr. 16 min. 8 hr. 52 min. 250 1791
24.00
35 min. 2 hr. 22 min. 9 hr. 14 min. 240 1719
23.98
Standard
LGOP
29.97
56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set (when set to RAW movie, LPCM / 24bit / 4CH).
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*When set to UHD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1201
SRAW, 4K-DCI Fine / 4K-UHD Fine
Recording format
Compression
method / RAW type
Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
SRAW
Standard RAW
59.94
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
―
50.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
29.97
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
25.00 CFexpress 2.0
24.00 CFexpress 2.0
23.98 CFexpress 2.0
Light RAW
59.94
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
50.00 CFexpress 2.0
29.97 CFexpress 2.0
25.00 CFexpress 2.0
24.00
CFexpress 2.0
23.98
XF-HEVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
1202
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S YCC422
10bit
High Quality Intra
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V90
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V90
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 V60
23.98
Standard Intra
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V60
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 V60
23.98
Light Intra
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V60
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 U3
23.98
Standard LGOP
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
1203
4K-DCI Normal / 4K-UHD Normal
Recording
format
Compression
method
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
LGOP
119.88
18 min. 1 hr. 15 min. 4 hr. 56 min. 450 3221
100.00
59.94
37 min. 2 hr. 31 min. 9 hr. 51 min. 225 1612
50.00
29.97
1 hr. 3 min. 4 hr. 12 min.
16 hr. 25
min.
135 968
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
119.88
28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
100.00
59.94
56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
50.00
29.97
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
119.88
28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
100.00
59.94
56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
50.00
29.97
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
25.00
24.00
23.98
1204
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
High Quality
Intra
59.94 7 min. 28 min. 1 hr. 51 min. 1200 8585
50.00 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7155
29.97 14 min. 56 min. 3 hr. 42 min. 600 4294
25.00 17 min. 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 26 min. 500 3579
24.00
17 min. 1 hr. 11 min. 4 hr. 37 min. 480 3436
23.98
Standard
Intra
119.88 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 14 min. 1800 12877
100.00 5 min. 22 min. 1 hr. 28 min. 1500 10731
59.94 9 min. 37 min. 2 hr. 28 min. 900 6440
50.00 11 min. 45 min. 2 hr. 57 min. 750 5367
29.97 18 min. 1 hr. 15 min. 4 hr. 56 min. 450 3221
25.00 22 min. 1 hr. 30 min. 5 hr. 55 min. 375 2685
24.00
23 min. 1 hr. 34 min. 6 hr. 10 min. 360 2577
23.98
Light Intra
119.88 7 min. 28 min. 1 hr. 51 min. 1200 8585
100.00 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7155
59.94 14 min. 56 min. 3 hr. 42 min. 600 4294
50.00 17 min. 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 26 min. 500 3579
29.97 28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
25.00 34 min. 2 hr. 16 min. 8 hr. 52 min. 250 1791
24.00
35 min. 2 hr. 22 min. 9 hr. 14 min. 240 1719
23.98
1205
Standard
LGOP
119.88
17 min. 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 26 min. 500 3579
100.00
59.94
34 min. 2 hr. 16 min. 8 hr. 52 min. 250 1791
50.00
29.97
56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set.
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*Same applies when [Movie cropping: Enable] is set.
*When set to UHD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1206
4K-DCI Normal / 4K-UHD Normal
Recording format Compression method Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
XF-HEVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard LGOP
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 V60
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 V60
50.00
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
Standard LGOP
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 V60
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit
Standard LGOP
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 V60
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
1207
XF-AVC S YCC422
10bit
High Quality Intra
59.94 CFexpress 2.0 ―
50.00 CFexpress 2.0 ―
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V90
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V90
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 V60
23.98
Standard Intra
119.88
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [400MB/sec.
or faster]
―
100.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
―
59.94
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
―
50.00 CFexpress 2.0 ―
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V60
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 V60
23.98
Light Intra
119.88 CFexpress 2.0 ―
100.00 CFexpress 2.0 ―
59.94 CFexpress 2.0 V90
50.00 CFexpress 2.0 V90
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 V60
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 U3
23.98
1208
Standard LGOP
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 V90
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 V60
50.00
29.97
CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00
24.00
23.98
1209
2K-DCI Fine / Full HD Fine
Recording
format
Compression
method
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
LGOP
59.94
2 hr. 49 min.
11 hr. 19
min.
44 hr. 12
min.
50 360
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
Standard
LGOP
59.94
4 hr. 2 min. 16 hr. 7 min. 63 hr. 1 min. 35 253
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
59.94
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1210
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
Intra
59.94 28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
50.00 34 min. 2 hr. 16 min. 8 hr. 52 min. 250 1791
29.97 56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
25.00 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 32 min.
17 hr. 44
min.
125 896
24.00
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min.
18 hr. 28
min.
120 861
23.98
Standard
LGOP
59.94
2 hr. 49 min.
11 hr. 19
min.
44 hr. 12
min.
50 360
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set.
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*When set to Full HD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1211
2K-DCI Fine / Full HD Fine
Recording format Compression method Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
XF-HEVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard LGOP
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
Standard LGOP
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit
Standard LGOP
59.94
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1212
XF-AVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard Intra
59.94 CFexpress 2.0 V60
50.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 U3
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 U3
23.98
Standard LGOP
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1213
2K-DCI Normal / Full HD Normal
Recording
format
Compression
method
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
XF-HEVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
LGOP
239.76
42 min. 2 hr. 50 min. 11 hr. 5 min. 200 1433
200.00
119.88
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
100.00
59.94
2 hr. 49 min.
11 hr. 19
min.
44 hr. 12
min.
50 360
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
239.76
1 hr. 4 hr. 3 min.
15 hr. 50
min.
140 1004
200.00
119.88
2 hr. 1 min. 8 hr. 5 min.
31 hr. 37
min.
70 503
100.00
59.94
4 hr. 2 min. 16 hr. 7 min. 63 hr. 1 min. 35 253
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1214
XF-AVC S
YCC422
10bit
Standard
Intra
239.76 7 min. 28 min. 1 hr. 51 min. 1200 8585
200.00 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7155
119.88 14 min. 56 min. 3 hr. 42 min. 600 4294
100.00 17 min. 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 26 min. 500 3579
59.94 28 min. 1 hr. 53 min. 7 hr. 24 min. 300 2148
50.00 34 min. 2 hr. 16 min. 8 hr. 52 min. 250 1791
29.97 56 min. 3 hr. 47 min.
14 hr. 47
min.
150 1075
25.00 1 hr. 8 min. 4 hr. 32 min.
17 hr. 44
min.
125 896
24.00
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min.
18 hr. 28
min.
120 861
23.98
Standard
LGOP
239.76
42 min. 2 hr. 50 min. 11 hr. 5 min. 200 1433
200.00
119.88
1 hr. 25 min. 5 hr. 40 min. 22 hr. 9 min. 100 718
100.00
59.94
2 hr. 49 min.
11 hr. 19
min.
44 hr. 12
min.
50 360
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set.
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*Same applies when [Movie cropping: Enable] is set.
*When set to Full HD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1215
2K-DCI Normal / Full HD Normal
Recording format Compression method Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
XF-HEVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard LGOP
239.76
CFexpress 2.0 U3
200.00
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 U3
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit
Standard LGOP
239.76
CFexpress 2.0 U3
200.00
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 U3
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1216
XF-AVC S YCC422
10bit
Standard Intra
239.76
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
―
200.00
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B [200MB/sec.
or faster]
―
119.88 CFexpress 2.0 V90
100.00 CFexpress 2.0 V90
59.94 CFexpress 2.0 V60
50.00 CFexpress 2.0 V60
29.97 CFexpress 2.0 U3
25.00 CFexpress 2.0 U3
24.00
CFexpress 2.0 U3
23.98
Standard LGOP
239.76
CFexpress 2.0 U3
200.00
119.88
CFexpress 2.0 U3
100.00
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1217
Proxy movie (2K-DCI Normal / Full HD Normal)
Recording
format
Compression
method
Frame rate
(fps)
Total recording time (approx.)
Video bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
XF-HEVC S
YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S
YCC420 8bit
Standard
LGOP
59.94
8 hr. 44 min.
34 hr. 58
min.
136 hr. 39
min.
16 117
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
Light LGOP
59.94
15 hr. 21
min.
61 hr. 25
min.
239 hr. 55
min.
9 67
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
*Video bit rate indicates video only; audio and metadata are not included.
*When [Audio format: AAC / 16bit / 2CH] is set.
*When [Add News Metadata: Off] is set.
*Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
*When set to Full HD, 24.00 fps is not available.
1218
Proxy movie (2K-DCI Normal / Full HD Normal)
Recording format Compression method Frame rate (fps)
Card performance requirements
CFexpress card SD card
XF-HEVC S YCC420
10bit
XF-AVC S YCC420
8bit
Standard LGOP
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
Light LGOP
59.94
CFexpress 2.0 U3
50.00
29.97
25.00
24.00
23.98
1219
Autofocus (AF)
Focusing method: Dual Pixel CMOS AF
Focusing brightness range
Still photo shooting
EV –6.5 to 21 (with an f/1.2 lens,* center AF point, One-Shot AF at room temperature, and
ISO 100)
* Except RF lenses with a Defocus Smoothing (DS) coating
Movie recording
• 8K30p: EV –4.5 to 21
• 4K30p: EV –3.5 to 21
•
Full HD30p: EV –4.0 to 21
(with an f/1.2 lens,* center AF point, One-Shot AF at room temperature, ISO 100, and
29.97 / 25.00 fps.)
* Except RF lenses with a Defocus Smoothing (DS) coating
Focusing operation
Still photo shooting Movie recording
AF operation
• One-Shot AF
• AI Focus AF
• Servo AF
•
One-Shot AF
• Movie Servo AF
Manual focus (MF) Supported Supported
*When set to AI Focus AF, the camera automatically switches from One-Shot AF to Servo AF in response
to subject movement (also applies during continuous shooting).
*Automatically set to [AI Focus AF] in [
] mode.
Focus mode: AF / MF
* Applies when an RF or RF-S lens without a focus mode switch is used.
* When lenses with a focus mode switch are used, the setting on the lens takes precedence.
Lens compatibility based on AF area: Refer to the Canon website (
).
1220
Number of AF area available for automatic selection
Focusing area Horizontal: Approx. 100%, Vertical: Approx. 100%
Number of AF
zones
Still photos Max. 1053 zones (39×27)
Movies Max. 975 zones (39×25)
*May vary depending on settings.
Selectable positions for AF point
Focusing area Horizontal: Approx. 90%, Vertical: Approx. 100%
Numbers of
positions
Still photos Max. 5850 positions (90×65)
Movies Max. 4500 positions (90×50)
*When set to [1-point AF] and selected using the Multi-controller.
*Values for the selectable positions for AF points do not represent AF performance.
Eye control
This feature is for still photo shooting.
Detection method: Line-of-sight detection using corneal reflections (Purkinje images)
acquired using infrared LEDs and an image of the user's pupil
Viewfinder
Type: OLED color electronic viewfinder
Screen size: Approx. 1.3 cm (0.5 inch)
Dot count: Approx. 5,760,000 dots
Magnification / Angle of view: Approx. 0.76x / Approx. 35.5° (at an aspect ratio of 3:2 and
with a 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m
–1
)
Coverage: Approx. 100% (at L image size, an aspect ratio of 3:2, and approx. 24 mm
eyepoint)
Eyepoint: Approx. 24 mm (at –1 m
–1
from eyepiece lens end)
Dioptric adjustment: Approx. –4.0 to +2.0 m
–1
(dpt)
1221
Screen
Type: TFT color LCD screen
Screen size: Approx. 8.0 cm (3.2 inch) (aspect ratio of 3:2)
Dot count: Approx. 2,100,000 dots
Angle of view: Approx. 170° vertically and horizontally
Coverage: Approx. 100% vertically and horizontally (at L image size and an aspect ratio of
3:2)
Screen brightness: Manually adjustable in a range of 1–7
Touch-screen: Capacitive sensing
LCD panel
Type: Reflective memory LCD
Display format: Dot-matrix display
Dot count: 128 × 128 dots
HDMI output
Output terminal: HDMI output terminal (Type A)
* HDMI CEC not supported
HDMI resolution: Auto / 1080p / 1080i
Exposure control
Metering functions under various shooting conditions
Item Still photo shooting Movie recording
Metering sensor
Based on the image sensor output signals
6144-zone (96×64) metering*
1
DCI: 4800-zone (96×50) metering*
1
UHD: 5184-zone (96×54) metering*
1
Metering mode
Evaluative
metering
Yes Yes
Partial metering
Yes
*Approx. 9.5% in the center of the
screen*
3
Spot metering*
2
Yes
*Approx. 5.3% in the center of the
screen*
3
Center-weighted
average
Yes ―
Metering brightness range (at room
temperature, ISO 100)
EV –3 to 20 EV –1 to 20
*1: Same applies when [1.6x (crop)] or [Movie cropping: Enable] is set.
*2: Multi-spot metering not available (not supported).
*3: When set to Full-frame. Values differ for 1.6x (crop).
1222
ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in still photo shooting
Manual ISO speed setting for still photos
ISO speed
Normal ISO speed ISO 100–51200
Expanded ISO speed L (equivalent to ISO 50), H (equivalent to ISO 102400)
*When set to [Highlight tone priority], the available manual setting range is ISO 200–51200.
*Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ HDR shooting (PQ): HDR PQ] is set.
Manual ISO speed setting range for still photos
ISO speed range ISO speed
Minimum L (equivalent to ISO 50) to ISO 51200
Maximum ISO 100 to H (equivalent to ISO 102400)
ISO Auto setting range for still photos
Auto range ISO speed
Minimum ISO 100–25600
Maximum ISO 200–51200
ISO Auto details for still photos
Shooting mode No flash
Using flash
Variable control of maximum ISO Auto limit for E-
TTL
Compatible lens Incompatible lens
ISO 100–12800 ISO 100–6400 ISO 100–1600
Fv / P / Av / M / Tv
ISO 100*
1
*
2
–51200*
2
ISO 100*
1
*
2
–6400*
2
ISO 100*
1
*
2
–1600*
2
BULB
ISO 400*
3
ISO 400*
3
*1: ISO 200 when set to [Highlight tone priority: Enable/Enhanced].
*2: Varies depending on the [Maximum] and [Minimum] settings for [Auto range].
*3: If outside the setting range, changed to the value most close to ISO 400.
Variable control of maximum ISO Auto limit for E-TTL: Supported
1223
ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in movie recording
Manual ISO speed setting for movies (in M mode)
Custom Picture ISO speed
Normal ISO
speed
Off*
1
*
2
ISO 100–25600
Canon 709 / PQ / HLG ISO 400–25600
Canon Log 2 / Canon Log 3 ISO 800–25600
BT.709 Standard ISO 160–25600
Expanded ISO
speed
Off*
3
*
4
*
5
*
6
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, or 51200)
Canon 709 / PQ / HLG*
6
L (equivalent to ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, or
320)
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, or 51200)
Canon Log 2 / Canon Log 3*
6
L (equivalent to ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250,
320, 400, 500, or 640)
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, or 51200)
BT.709 Standard*
6
L (equivalent to ISO 100 or 125)
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, or 51200)
*1: The lower end of the ISO speed range starts from ISO 200 when [Highlight tone priority] is set.
*2: Settable ISO speeds are ISO 800 – ISO 12800 when [ HDR Movie Mode: Enable] is set.
*3: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ HDR shooting (PQ): HDR PQ] is set.
*4: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [
HDR Movie Mode: Enable] is set.
*5: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [Highlight tone priority] is set.
*6: Expanded ISO speeds are not available in RAW movie recording.
*Maximum ISO speed when set manually corresponds to the [ISO speed range] setting.
1224
Automatic ISO speed setting for movies (in P / Tv / Av mode, and in M mode with ISO
Auto)
Custom Picture ISO speed
Normal ISO
speed
Off*
1
*
2
ISO 100–25600
Canon 709 / PQ / HLG ISO 400–25600
Canon Log 2 / Canon Log 3 ISO 800–25600
BT.709 Standard ISO 160–25600
Expanded ISO
speed
Off*
3
*
4
*
5
*
6
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, or 51200)
Canon 709 / PQ / HLG*
6
Canon Log 2 / Canon Log 3*
6
BT.709 Standard*
6
*1: The lower end of the ISO speed range starts from ISO 200 when [Highlight tone priority] is set.
*2: Settable ISO speeds are ISO 800 – ISO 12800 when [ HDR Movie Mode: Enable] is set.
*3: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ HDR shooting (PQ): HDR PQ] is set.
*4: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [
HDR Movie Mode: Enable] is set.
*5: Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [Highlight tone priority] is set.
*6: Expanded ISO speeds are not available in RAW movie recording.
*Maximum ISO speed when set automatically corresponds to the [Max for Auto] setting.
Manual ISO speed setting range for movies
ISO speed range ISO speed
Minimum ISO 100–25600
Maximum ISO 200–25600, H (equivalent to ISO 51200)
Maximum ISO Auto setting for movies
ISO speed
Max for Auto ISO 6400–25600, H (equivalent to ISO 51200)
Maximum ISO auto setting for time-lapse movies
ISO speed
Max for Auto ISO 400–25600
1225
Shutter
Still photo shooting
Type:
Electronically controlled focal-plane shutter
Rolling shutter, using the image sensor
Shutter mode
Shutter mode Flash photography
Mechanical shutter Possible
Electronic 1st-curtain Possible
Electronic shutter Possible
Shutter speed
Shutter mode Setting range
Mechanical shutter
1/8000–30 sec., bulb
Electronic 1st-curtain
Electronic shutter*
1
1/32000*
2
–30 sec., bulb
*1: Shutter speeds of 1/10000 sec. or faster are only available in Tv or M mode (up to 1/8000 sec. in Fv, P,
or Av mode).
*2: When [ISO speed/Shutter speed] or [Shutter speed] is set with Focus bracketing, Flash photography,
or [Same expo. for new aperture], the maximum shutter speed limit will be 1/8000 sec.
Flash sync speed
Shutter mode
Flash sync speed
EL/EX Speedlite
Non-Canon flash unit
Full-frame 1.6x (crop)
Mechanical shutter 1/200 sec. 1/250 sec. 1/200 sec.
Electronic 1st-curtain 1/250 sec. 1/320 sec. 1/250 sec.
Electronic shutter 1/160 sec. 1/250 sec. 1/160 sec.
1226
Movie recording
Type: Rolling shutter, using the image sensor
Shutter speed: 1/8000*
1
–1/25*
2
*
3
sec.
Movies in Tv or M mode: 1/8000*
1
–1/8*
2
*
3
sec.
* 1: Maximum of 1/4000 sec. in time-lapse movie shooting.
* 2: In normal movie recording, the minimum speed varies depending on the recording mode and
frame rate.
* 3: The minimum speed is 1/250 sec. (NTSC) / 1/200 sec. (PAL) when the frame rate is set to 239.76
or 200.00 fps, and 1/125 sec. (NTSC) / 1/100 sec. (PAL) when the frame rate is set to 119.88 or
100.00 fps.
Image stabilization (IS mode): Provided
Drive
Drive mode and continuous shooting speed
[Max. approx.]
Drive mode AF operation Icon display
Mechanical
shutter
Electronic 1st-
curtain
Electronic shutter
Single shooting Yes Yes Yes
High-speed
continuous
shooting+ [ ]
One-Shot AF
AI Focus AF
Servo AF
Green 12 shots/sec. 12 shots/sec.
30 shots/sec.White 9.0 shots/sec. 9.0 shots/sec.
White (Blinking) 7.2 shots/sec. 7.2 shots/sec.
High-speed
continuous
shooting [
]
One-Shot AF
AI Focus AF
Servo AF
Green 6.0 shots/sec. 8.2 shots/sec.
15 shots/sec.
White 5.2 shots/sec. 6.6 shots/sec.
White (Blinking) 4.0 shots/sec. 5.1 shots/sec.
Low-speed
continuous
shooting [
]
One-Shot AF
AI Focus AF
Servo AF
Green 3.0 shots/sec. 3.0 shots/sec.
5.0 shots/sec.
White 3.0 shots/sec. 3.0 shots/sec.
White (Blinking) 3.0 shots/sec. 3.0 shots/sec.
Self-timer: 10 sec. Yes Yes Yes
Self-timer: 2 sec. Yes Yes Yes
Self-timer: Continuous Yes Yes Yes
External flash
Accessory shoe contacts: 21 pins for accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe,
5 pins for X-sync and communication
Sync terminal: Provided
Flash exposure compensation: ±3 stops (in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments)
1227
Playback
Item Still photos Movies
AF point display Yes
Playback grid Off / 3×3 / 6×4 / 3×3+diag
Magnified view 1.5×–10× (15 levels)
Set image search
conditions
Search conditions
Rating / Date / Folder / Protect / Type of file (1) / Type of file (2)
Rating
OFF / ★ to ★★★★★
Select images / Select range / All images in folder / All images on card / All found images
Protect images
Select images / Select range / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All
images on card / Unprotect all images on card / All found images / Unprotect all found
images
In-camera RAW image
processing
Yes
Resizing Yes
Cropping Yes
VR preview
Supported images:
•
Still photos
Recording format: JPEG, RAW, and C-RAW
Image size: L size
•
Movies
Recording format: No restrictions
Movie recording size
Resolution: 8K-D
Frame rate: 59.94 / 50.00*, 29.97 / 25.00 , 24.00, or 23.98 fps
* Played back with 29.97 fps / 25.00 fps.
Compression: No restrictions
VR image display specifications:
Resolution: Maximum output resolution when HDMI is Full HD 1920×1080.
Frame rate: 59.94 / 50.00*, 29.97 / 25.00 , 24.00, or 23.98 fps
* Played back with 29.97 fps / 25.00 fps.
1228
Frame grab from movies
Individual frames in 8K / 4K movies recorded with the camera can be saved as still photos
(JPEG / HEIF).
8K
DCI
Approx. 35.4 megapixels
(8192×4320)
UHD
Approx. 33.2 megapixels
(7680×4320)
4K
DCI Approx. 8.8 megapixels (4096×2160)
UHD Approx. 8.3 megapixels (3840×2160)
*Still photos are saved as JPEGs from normal movies, and as HEIF images from HDR PQ movies.
*Frame grabbing from RAW movies is not available.
*In-camera resizing or cropping and in-camera upscaling are not available for frame-grabbed still photos.
*The camera cannot frame grab still photos from movies recorded when [
function: On] is set.
Print order (DPOF)
Compliant with DPOF Version 1.1
External interface
Digital terminal
Terminal type USB Type-C™
Transmission Equivalent to USB 10 Gbps (SuperSpeed Plus USB / USB 3.2 Gen 2)
Applications
• For computer communication / smartphone communication
• USB battery charging / camera power supply
HDMI output terminal: HDMI terminal (Type A)
* Resolution switches automatically
* HDMI CEC not supported
External microphone IN terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack (3-pin)
Headphone terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack
Remote control terminal: N3 type terminal
1229
Power source
Battery
Compatible battery packs LP-E6P
Quantity used 1
*LP-E6NH/LP-E6N can also be used but functionality is limited ( ).
*LP-E6 cannot be used.
USB battery charging and camera power supply: Using USB Power Adapter PD-E2
AC power source
DC Coupler DR-E6P, USB Power Adapter PD-E2
Number of shots available
Shooting method Temperature
Available shots (approx.)
Power saving*
1
Smooth*
2
Viewfinder shooting*
3
+23°C / 73°F
340 250
On-screen shooting*
4
630 540
*1: Based on CIPA standards.
*2: According to Canon measurement conditions, which are based on CIPA standards.
*3: When set to [Viewfinder].
*4: When set to [Screen].
*With a new, fully charged LP-E6P
*The number of shots available may vary greatly depending on the shooting environment.
*Fewer shots may be available with a compatible accessory attached to the multifunction shoe, because
the camera powers the accessory.
*LP-E6NH/LP-E6N can also be used, but fewer shots are available.
*Using two LP-E6P batteries with Battery Grip BG-R20 approximately doubles the number of shots
available, compared to the table above.
*Using two LP-E6P with Cooling Fan CF-R20EP and not using the cooling fan and wired LAN function
approximately doubles the number of shots available, compared to the table above.
*Using two LP-E6P with Battery Grip BG-R20EP and not using the wired LAN function approximately
doubles the number of shots available, compared to the table above.
1230
Available operating time
Conditions of use Temperature
Available operating
time
Time available for bulb exposure +23°C / 73°F Approx. 4 hr. 10 min.
Time available for Live View shooting +23°C / 73°F Approx. 4 hr.
Time available for
movie recording*
1
8K RAW
• Light RAW
• 59.94 / 50.00 fps
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 50 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 50 min.
8K DCI
• Standard LGOP
• 29.97 / 25.00 fps
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 1 hr.
4K DCI
• Standard LGOP
• 59.94 / 50.00 fps
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 1 hr. 20 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 1 hr. 10 min.
Full HD
• Standard LGOP
• 29.97 / 25.00 fps
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 10 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 2 hr.
Time available for
movie playback
(normal playback)
4K DCI
• Standard LGOP
• 59.94 / 50.00 fps
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 40 min.
*When using a new, fully charged LP-E6P
*When using the screen
*1: When [Movie Servo AF: Disable] and [Movie cropping: Disable] are set
1231
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
(W) × (H) × (D) Approx. 138.5×101.2×93.5 mm / Approx. 5.45×3.98×3.68 in.
*Based on CIPA guidelines.
Weight
Body (including battery and CFexpress card)
*Based on CIPA guidelines.
Approx. 746 g / Approx. 26.31 oz.
Body only Approx. 656 g / Approx. 23.14 oz.
*Not including body cap or shoe cover.
Operating environment
Operating temperature: 0–40°C / 32–104°F
Operating humidity: 85% or less
1232
Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
Supported standards (equivalent to IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac/ax standards)
Wi-Fi standards (equivalent)
Transmission
method
RU Type
Maximum link speed
5GHz band /
6GHz band
2.4 GHz band
IEEE 802.11ax 2×2 MIMO
OFDM modulation
(OFDMA)
996-tone 1201 Mbps —
484-tone 574 Mbps —
242-tone 229 Mbps 229 Mbps
106-tone 100 Mbps 100 Mbps
52-tone 47 Mbps 47 Mbps
26-tone 24 Mbps 24 Mbps
IEEE 802.11ax
996-tone 601 Mbps —
484-tone 287 Mbps —
242-tone 115 Mbps 115 Mbps
106-tone 50 Mbps 50 Mbps
52-tone 24 Mbps 24 Mbps
26-tone 12 Mbps 12 Mbps
IEEE 802.11ax 2×2 MIMO
OFDM modulation
(CSMA/CA)
—
1201 Mbps 287 Mbps
IEEE 802.11ax 601 Mbps 143 Mbps
IEEE 802.11ac 2×2 MIMO 867 Mbps —
IEEE 802.11ac 433 Mbps —
IEEE 802.11n 2×2 MIMO 300 Mbps 144 Mbps
IEEE 802.11n 150 Mbps 72 Mbps
IEEE 802.11a 54 Mbps —
IEEE 802.11g — 54 Mbps
IEEE 802.11b DSSS modulation — — 11 Mbps
*Compatible with MIMO (multiple-input and multiple-output) 2×2
1233
Transmission frequency (Center frequency)
2.4 GHz band
Frequency 2412 to 2462 MHz
Channels 1 to 11 ch
5 GHz band
Frequency 5180 to 5825 MHz
Channels 36 to 165 ch
*Specifications vary by country/region.
6 GHz band
Frequency 5955 to 7095 MHz
Channels 1 to 229 ch
*Specifications vary by country/region.
Authentication and data encryption methods
2.4 GHz band / 5 GHz band
Connection method Authentication Encryption
Camera access point
Open Disable
WPA2 / WPA3-Personal AES
Infrastructure
Open Disable
Enhanced Open AES
WPA / WPA2 / WPA3-Personal AES
WPA / WPA2 / WPA3-Enterprise AES
WPA3-Enterprise 192-bit AES
6 GHz band
Connection method Authentication Encryption
Infrastructure
Enhanced Open AES
WPA3-Personal AES
WPA3-Enterprise AES
WPA3-Enterprise 192-bit AES
1234
Bluetooth
Standards compliance: Bluetooth Specification Version 5.3 compliant (Bluetooth Low
Energy technology)
Transmission method: GFSK modulation
All data above is based on Canon testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for
camera body only).
Product specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, contact the
respective lens manufacturer.
1235
Trademarks and Licensing
Trademarks
About MPEG-4 Licensing
Accessories
Regulations
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and
is used under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C LLC.
CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA (CompactFlash Association).
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and the
HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator,
Inc.
USB Type-C
®
and USB-C
®
are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
1236
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for
encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was
encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
1237
Accessories
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon
accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as
malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a
leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that repairs arising out of the malfunction
of non-genuine accessories will not be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Caution
Battery Pack LP-E6P is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for
which Canon cannot be held liable.
Check the following website for details on compatible accessories.
https://cam.start.canon/H002/
1238
Regulations
1239
